加载中...
共找到 17,398 条相关资讯
Title: Friday's Final Takeaways: April Rally in Focus Description: Marley Kayden wraps up the trading week with a look back at April's market performance. Later, she chimes in on the status of Spirit Airlines as it faces possible liquidation amidst its 2nd bankruptcy.
Bruce Kasman, JPMorgan chief economist, joins 'Power Lunch' to discuss potential economic fallout from recent energy shocks, non-linear moves in gas prices and much more.
The Investment Committee debate whether earnings can drive stocks higher and how you should position your portfolio.
Jerome Powell delivered his final press conference as Chair of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors in April 2026. During the meeting, Powell expressed his intent to remain on the board.
Valtrion CEO Rob Luna discusses Apple's future growth story after the release of its earnings report on ‘Making Money.' #fox #foxbusiness #media #breakingnews #us #usa #new #news #breaking #apple #stocks #market #economy #investing #finance #business #earnings #growth #technology #ai #volatility #portfolio #trading #risk #ceo #analysis #makingmoney
"Bloomberg Real Yield" highlights the market-moving news you need to know. Today's guests: Wolfe Research Chief Economist Stephanie Roth, Economic Security Project Senior Director of Policy and Research Mike Konczal, BNP Paribas Head of US Credit Strategy Meghan Robson, and CreditSights Global Head of Strategy Winnie Cisar.
Comprehensive cross-platform coverage of the U.S. market close on Bloomberg Television, Bloomberg Radio, and YouTube with Romaine Bostick, Katie Greifeld, Carol Massar and Tim Stenovec. -------- More on Bloomberg Television and Markets Like this video?
Bloomberg's Eliza Ronalds-Hannon joins Scarlet Fu on "Bloomberg Real Yield." Florida's Brightline high-speed rail project is seeking options to address its debt load that avoid sending the Fortress Investment Group-backed firm into a possible bankruptcy, according to people familiar with the matter.
Operator: Good morning, ladies and gentlemen, and welcome to the Standex International Fiscal Third Quarter 2026 Financial Results Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Also note that this call is being recorded on Friday, May 1, 2026. And now I would like to turn the conference over to Christopher Howe, Director of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. Huang Howe: Thank you, operator, and good morning. Please note that the presentation accompanying management's remarks can be found on the Investor Relations portion of the company's website at www.standex.com. Please refer to Standex's safe harbor statement on Slide 2. Matters that Standex management will discuss on today's conference call include predictions, estimates, expectations and other forward-looking statements. These statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially. You should refer to Standex's most recent annual report on Form 10-K as well as other SEC filings and public announcements for a detailed list of risk factors. In addition, I'd like to remind you that today's discussion will include references to the non-GAAP measures of EBIT, which is earnings before interest and taxes; adjusted EBITDA, which is earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization; adjusted EBITDA, EBITDA margin and adjusted EBITDA margin. We will also refer to other non-GAAP measures, including adjusted net income, adjusted operating income, adjusted net income from continuing operations, adjusted earnings per share, adjusted operating margin, free operating cash flow and pro forma net debt to EBITDA. Adjusted measures exclude the impact of restructuring, purchase accounting, amortization from acquired intangible assets, acquisition-related expenses and onetime items. These non-GAAP financial measures are intended to serve as a complement to results provided in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. Standex believes that such information provides an additional measurement and consistent historical comparison of the company's financial performance. On the call today is Standex's Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, David Dunbar; and Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer, Ademir Sarcevic. David Dunbar: Thank you, Chris. Good morning, and welcome to our fiscal third quarter 2026 conference call. This quarter provides another strong proof point that our strategy, shifting to our faster-growing end markets and increasing new product development is working. We delivered top line sales growth of 8%, including organic growth of 6.5%. Our sales in the fast-growing end markets are now about 30% of our total, and new products are expected to add 300 basis points of growth to our 2026 sales results. It is also exciting to see how the mix of our businesses has evolved. Today, Electronics and our Engineering Technologies business generate about 70% of sales and nearly 80% of total segment profits, both built around custom-engineered solutions for attractive secular markets. That mix shift is what we set out to achieve. Our Engineering Technologies segment has effectively repositioned itself as a vital partner for space, defense and aviation customers. So we are renaming the segment Standex Aerospace & Defense. Looking ahead, demand remains healthy. Company-wide book-to-bill was 1.05 and Electronics delivered 1.14, setting us up well as we move into the fourth quarter. I would like to thank our employees, our executives and the Board of Directors for their efforts and continued dedication and support that drove our solid fiscal third quarter 2026 results. Now let's look at the results beginning on Slide 3. In the third quarter, sales increased 8.1% year-on-year to $224.6 million, including 6.5% organic growth. Electronics grew 6.8% organically. New product sales grew approximately 40% to approximately $18.7 million. Sales in the fast-growth markets were approximately $69 million, more than 30% of total sales. We are pleased with the momentum in the business reflected in an overall book-to-bill ratio of 1.05 and within Electronics of 1.14. Adjusted operating margin of 19.7%, was up 30 basis points year-on-year. On March 6, we completed the divestiture of Federal Industries at an enterprise value of approximately $70 million. This is in line with our Portfolio Simplification strategy, allowing us to focus our management and capital resources more on fast growth markets and new product launches. We used the proceeds to pay down about $62 million of debt, reducing net leverage to 1.9x. Beginning this quarter, we will report under four operating segments: Electronics, Aerospace & Defense, Scientific and Engraving & Hydraulics. The Hydraulics business has been combined with the Engraving business under the Engraving & Hydraulics segment. This divestiture continues a decade of deliberate portfolio shaping toward higher growth, higher-margin businesses. In 2014, we operated 16 businesses. Today, we're down to 5. And following the Amran/Narayan acquisition, Electronics represents more than half of Standex, helping drive the performance you see today. Our original fiscal year 2026 sales outlook included a full year contribution from Federal Industries. Even after the Federal divestiture, we still expect fiscal 2026 revenue to increase by about $100 million versus 2025, supported by momentum in new products and fast growth markets, especially in Electronics and Aerospace & Defense. I'm pleased with the momentum that we are building and launching new products. We expect to launch more than 15 new products this fiscal year on top of 16 new products last fiscal year. We expect new product sales pro forma for the Federal divestiture to grow by $24 million to $64 million, adding nearly 300 basis points of organic growth in the year. Our sales into the fast-growing markets such as Space, Defense and Grid, are expected to increase to approximately $270 million, constituting about 30% of our total sales. On a sequential basis, we expect slightly higher revenue driven by higher contributions from fast growth end markets and new product sales and slightly to moderately higher adjusted operating margin due to higher volume and pricing and productivity initiatives, partially offset by growth investments. On a year-on-year basis, in fiscal fourth quarter 2026, we expect slightly to moderately higher revenue, driven by mid- to high single-digit organic growth from growing backlog in fast-growth markets and increased new product sales, partially offset by the revenue impact from the Federal divestiture. We expect slightly lower adjusted operating margin as organic growth and realization of productivity actions are more than offset by growth investments in capacity expansions, higher medical costs and increased variable compensation expenses. I will now turn the call over to Ademir to discuss our financial performance in greater detail. Ademir Sarcevic: Thank you, David, and good morning, everyone. Let's turn to Slide 4, third quarter 2026 summary. On a consolidated basis, total revenue increased approximately 8.1% year-on-year to $224.6 million. This reflected organic growth of 6.5%, 0.2% benefit from acquisitions and 1.4% benefit from foreign currency. Third quarter 2026 adjusted operating margin increased 30 basis points year-on-year to 19.7%. Adjusted earnings per share increased 13.5% year-on-year to $2.21. Net cash provided by operating activities was $9 million in the third quarter of fiscal 2026 compared to $9.6 million a year ago. Capital expenditures were $2.7 million compared to $6.1 million a year ago. As a result, we generated fiscal third quarter free cash flow of $6.3 million compared to $3.5 million a year ago. Now please turn to Slide 5, and I will begin to discuss our segment performance and outlook, beginning with Electronics and Aerospace & Defense. Electronics revenue increased 7.6% year-on-year to a record $119.7 million, driven by organic growth of 6.8% and 0.8% benefit from foreign currency. Organic growth was driven by sales into fast-growth markets and increased new product sales. Adjusted operating margin of 29.3% in fiscal third quarter 2026 decreased 50 basis points year-on-year due to growth investments, partially offset by higher volume, pricing initiatives and product mix. Our book-to-bill in fiscal third quarter was 1.14 with orders of approximately $136 million. This marks the seventh consecutive quarter with book-to-bill near or above 1. This consistent streak of book-to-bill around 1, targeted capacity expansion within grid an acceleration in new product sales adds durability to our growth. In addition, our monthly order for over $50 million in both March and April, further indicating robust demand and a run rate to a strong fiscal 2027 performance as these orders convert into sales. Sequentially, in fiscal fourth quarter 2026, we expect slightly to moderately higher revenue, reflecting higher sales into fast growth end markets and increased new product sales. We expect slightly higher adjusted operating margin, primarily due to higher revenue, partially offset by continued growth investments. On a year-on-year basis, we expect high single-digit organic growth. Aerospace & Defense revenue increased 33.7% to $36.6 million, driven by organic growth of 20.8%, 12.2% benefit from recent McStarlite acquisition and 0.7% benefit from foreign currency. Organic growth was driven by increased project activity in the commercialization of space end market. Adjusted operating margin of 18% decreased 60 basis points year-on-year, primarily due to project mix. Sequentially, we expect slightly to moderately higher revenue due to growth in new product sales and more favorable project timing. We expect slightly to moderately higher adjusted operating margin due to higher volume and realization of productivity initiatives. On a year-on-year basis, we expect double-digit organic growth. Now please turn to Slide 6 for a discussion of the Scientific and Engraving & Hydraulics segment. Scientific revenue decreased 1.7% to $18 million primarily due to organic decline from lower demand from academic and research institutions affected by NIH cuts. Adjusted operating margin of 21.9% decreased 70 basis points year-on-year due to lower sales. Sequentially, we expect slightly higher revenue and similar adjusted operating margin due to product mix. Engraving & Hydraulics revenue increased 2.2% to $44.8 million, driven by 4% benefit from foreign currency, partially offset by organic decline of 1.8%. The organic decline was driven by general market weakness for hydraulic cylinders. Adjusted operating margin of 14.3% in fiscal third quarter 2026 increased 210 basis points year-on-year due to higher sales and realization of previously executed restructuring actions. In our next fiscal quarter, on a sequential basis, we expect slightly lower revenue and similar to slightly higher adjusted operating margin from realization of restructuring actions and productivity initiatives. Next, please turn to Slide 7 for a summary of Standex's liquidity statistics and capitalization structure. Our current available liquidity is approximately $191 million. At the end of the third quarter, Standex had net debt of $369.1 million compared to net debt of $470.4 million at the end of fiscal third quarter 2025. Our net leverage ratio currently stands at 1.9x. We paid down our debt by approximately $62 million during the fiscal third quarter 2026. In fiscal fourth quarter 2026, we expect interest expense between $6.8 million and $7 million. Standex's long-term debt at the end of fiscal third quarter 2026 was $472.8 million. Cash and cash equivalents totaled $103.7 million. We declared our 247th quarterly consecutive cash dividend of $0.34 per share and approximately 6.3% increase year-on-year. In fiscal 2026, we expect capital expenditures between $27 million and $30 million. I will now turn the call over to David for concluding remarks. David Dunbar: Thank you, Ademir. Please turn to Slide 8. To summarize, I'm very pleased to see the continued organic growth in the third quarter with a book-to-bill ratio of 1.05, when adjusted for the Federal divestiture. Organic growth was driven by our Electronics and Aerospace & Defense segments, which grew 6.8% and 20.8%, respectively. We will continue to align our organic and inorganic growth investments around secular end markets and new products that expand our presence and deepen our customer relationships. Our acquisition strategy will continue to focus on businesses with accretive margins, exposure to fast-growth markets and delivery of customer solutions. With the divestiture of Federal Industries, we have realigned our company around four operating segments. We expect fiscal 2026 sales to increase approximately $100 million over fiscal 2025, with margin expansion. While we remain on course, we will provide an update to our long-term targets on the next earnings call, considering the changing portfolio composition with the Federal Industries' divestiture. We will now open the line for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] First, we will hear from Chris Moore with CJS Securities. Christopher Moore: Maybe we could start on the defense opportunity. You talked about providing missile nose cones solutions, include nose cones for interceptors, tactile missiles as well as development hypersonics. Maybe can you just give us a sense for the scale of that opportunity? What kind of orders look like? Is there -- are there long lead times? Just any thoughts there would be really helpful. David Dunbar: Yes. So there, we're talking about within the Engineering Technologies. We have -- we serve defense in the magnetics business in Electronics and in Engineering Technologies. The Engineering Technologies business provides nose cones out of their Wisconsin facility. And about 15% of the Engineering Technologies -- or Aerospace & Defense segment is defense. Most of that is missiles. There is an opportunity to significantly increase that in the coming years. We have had discussions with customers and actually with the Under Secretary of the Department of Defense asking if we are able to ramp and they give us different scenarios. These upper scenarios really kind of depend on the government procurement process, passing orders from multiyear commitments to us. We have received some orders, we expect a nice increase in those sales in 2027, potentially greater if they can unlock the procurement process. Christopher Moore: Got it. I appreciate that. Maybe just switch gears to Amran/Narayan. Just in terms of the Croatian facility, trying to understand where you are in terms of construction? And then just in terms of creating the infrastructure for full market penetration there, what's a reasonable time frame? And are the competitive dynamics much different in Europe than you see in the U.S? David Dunbar: Yes. There's a lot in that question. We had no presence in Croatia with that business before. There was no footprint in Europe. We now have the Croatia site. It is operating. We made our first products a few weeks ago. We have customers visiting this month and next to qualify the site. We have external auditors to achieve various certifications, including ISO certifications that we expect in June. So shipments are beginning at a kind of a slow rate, begin to ramp much more quickly after those June audits are complete. So we're still confident that our longer-term expectation of at least $60 million in 3 to 5 years is reasonable based on the commitments we have from our current European customers. We are also now building a sales -- a commercial organization in Europe so we can understand your third question, which is what about the competitive dynamics there? There is certainly more opportunity than we see. It's a larger market than North America. It's a much larger market than India. And we have -- so we believe once we're on the ground with our sales team with the site there, we will be able to answer that third question for you and figure out what we need to do to take that $60 million expectation higher. Christopher Moore: Just a quick follow up. Probably, we're a couple of years before you're really accelerating in Europe? David Dunbar: We ship into Europe from India now. So some of those shipments will begin to come from Europe. We'll continue to ship from India. So in our FY '27, we think upper single-digit million shipment number is kind of a reasonable expectation. There is upside to that. How it ramps beyond that, I guess we'll have to report in the coming year or so. But there certainly is upside because the market is there, and we have the footprint and are building capacity to grow beyond that. Operator: next question will be from Matt Koranda at ROTH Capital Partners. Matt Koranda: I guess I just want to start with the Electronics segment and the order flow looks like it's up north of 75% year-on-year. Wanted to hear a little bit about the drivers of the strength and order flow between grid and the core magnetics and Sensing Solutions business. David Dunbar: Yes. So the growth, I may have to add, Matt, about the 75%, I don't see the 75% math. We had great book-to-bill, 1.14 on growing sales. We're seeing strong order flow in our core switches business, which for us is a good indication that the general industry, certainly in Asia, is picking up. That in the quarter, we were -- the sales were up over 20%, which is relays are strong. Our sales in the Grid were up about 20% with a book-to-bill of about 1.1 or something. So we see very strong order flow there. And it's kind of a tale of two cities in the industrial world, space, defense, grid, aviation, those businesses are all growing double digits. General industry in North America and Europe is still fairly slow. And as I said before, general industry in Asia looks like it has really picked up. Ademir Sarcevic: Yes. And if I can just add to that, Matt. As we said in our prepared remarks, we had 2 consecutive months of orders over $50 million for Electronics, which has never happened before. Some of that is clearly the strength we have seen and continue to see in the grid space and some of these fast-growth end markets. But also, as to David's point, indication that the general industrial markets are stabilizing, and we are kind of turning the corner. Now it takes us a little time to convert those orders into sales, but it makes us pretty bullish about what we're going to see in FY '27 in terms of top line performance, again, assuming there is no significant macroeconomic or geopolitical challenges. Matt Koranda: Okay, that's helpful, guys. And then I guess for my second question, I wanted to ask a portfolio question. It seems like now that you're under 2 turns of leverage, you got plenty of capacity to deploy incremental dollars to M&A. Just wanted to hear the latest on the funnel and how you guys are thinking about add-ons to kind of the core segments as you sort of add more capacity at this point in time? David Dunbar: Yes. Matt, we like the position we're in now. We are delighted with the integration of the Amran/Narayan of the grid business, and how that continues to perform. And with a leverage under 2 now, but we're building sizable powder. And if you look at the makeup of our business, now 70% of our sales come from Engineered Components in Engineering Technologies and Electronics. And those are the businesses that serve these fast-growing markets with customized products. So that is -- that's the universe where we will explore opportunities. And in our funnel, we always have a number of kind of family-owned businesses that are similar to -- or privately owned businesses, similar to acquisitions we made over the decades at Standex. With the Grid acquisition, that has also opened up opportunities for us to look at related products, to solve bigger problems, to become an even more important partner to our customers. So in the Switchgear, in addition to the instrument transformer, there are other products that support the metering and the electrical quality measures of the Switchgear itself. On the Electronics side, there are a lot of opportunities around components and modules. I think we've mentioned in the past, every time a customer works with us, we have to say for Reed switch-based sensor, a switch or a relay, they are also working with other suppliers and other components for that same product that are customized to some extent, whether it's capacitors or filters or something like this. So that really opens the aperture for us to explore wider opportunities. So for that, we're -- we were in discussion with a number of third parties to help us identify targets. So we have an existing funnel. We're working at expanding the funnel with these new opportunities as we fully explore opportunities to expand these engineered components businesses. Operator: Next question will be from Ross Sparenblek with William Blair. Ross Sparenblek: Maybe just a level side on the top line guide. Are we picking out the first 3 quarters of Federal, kind of $25 million? Or are we leaving that in there just taking in the fourth quarter? Ademir Sarcevic: The Federal is out in the fourth quarter guidance. Ross Sparenblek: So just the fourth, okay. And then you guys said grid was up 20% year-over-year. So that implies what, like a $160 million run rate? Pretty healthy. Ademir Sarcevic: Yes. David Dunbar: Yes, yes. Ross Sparenblek: And so then you guys said a book-to-bill of 1.1. So that means core organic growth, book-to-bill is probably 1.15, up nearly 20%. We're definitely seeing some momentum? Ademir Sarcevic: You've got your math right. Ross Sparenblek: That's what I get paid for. And any updates on India and the progress you've seen with rolling out lean there and driving that capacity? David Dunbar: Well, I tell you, we had -- just a few weeks ago, if Vineet's here with us today. He was in India a few weeks ago with a very large team for a global grid capacity expansion Kaizen. So we have an extensive plan to look at global demand, a roll-up from customers around the world by product family. We have a site in Texas, a site in India, site in Croatia now. We're producing in Mexico and our Mexico site and are looking at our global capacity expansion. So our assumptions -- We do have assumptions that within India simply with Lean, there was another, call it, 15-plus percent capacity expansion from Lean which fuels us in addition to Mexico and Croatia through this year. As you know, we have the Texas site coming on next year. Your question was about India. So we have a good handle on the initial -- there's unexploited Lean opportunities there, 15-plus percent capacity. Ross Sparenblek: Okay. And maybe if I could squeeze one more. Can you just remind us really quick on the growth investments within Electronics, just the size of the cadence? A couple of million dollars in quarter? Ademir Sarcevic: Yes. So if you kind of break it down by part, Ross, most of our growth investments are coming in the grid business. Obviously, there's some investments we put into Croatia. That's probably -- it's about, call it, 30, 40 basis points, if you think about it from kind of a margin standpoint of impact right now because, obviously, we're not shipping products yet out of Croatia. And then as David mentioned, and as you know, we're expanding capacity in Houston and Mexico. So you have to hire some people and get some of the rolling before we can -- before we declare those sites operational. So there's probably another, I would probably tell you 50, 60 basis points of those investments as well, kind of the -- from a run rate basis standpoint. Ross Sparenblek: Okay. So there's Section 232 issues. There was some one-off stipulation regarding Grid. I didn't fully dig into details. It just seems like given the growth in Amran, those margins should have been maybe a little bit higher as stated in Electronics? Ademir Sarcevic: Yes. Look, we think we're going to continue to expand margins in Electronics, especially as you kind of think about where we are growing, is our fast-growth end markets where we are more profitable. So we do expect we're going to clip that 30% in adjusted operating margin in the near future. Operator: Next question will be from Michael Shlisky at D.A. Davidson. Michael Shlisky: Speaking of operating margins, just looking at the results, pretty clear that Engraving & Hydraulics are now kind of the lowest of the four. I guess those are kind of two different businesses. Can you comment on your plans for those businesses? You're always trying to hone it a little bit better and a little bit higher year after year. Is there a potential that those are next to go, I'd say, after Federal? David Dunbar: Well, in there -- as you know, they're strong businesses in their sectors. They're not burning platforms in that sense. It's kind of a question of timing to find the best opportunities for these businesses. Within Engraving, we have some pretty interesting growth initiatives going on. We talked about making these specialized parts, functional textures, those are ramping up. So the businesses themselves are fundamentally sound. We have some profit improvement projects in both of them. And if you look at our history, where we've invested in acquisitions, we love the Engineered Components businesses. You will likely see more of that. And we have some very good businesses that Hydraulics & Engraving, they could be fit somewhere else. And well, we continue to monitor the situation and we'll make a decision at the time. Michael Shlisky: Okay.In Aerospace, given the organic growth you're seeing now and you've got quite a few opportunities ahead of you. Do you see a need to expand capacity there on a greenfield basis? Ademir Sarcevic: In the Aerospace & Defense segment, is that your question, Mike? Michael Shlisky: Yes. Ademir Sarcevic: Yes. Not from a greenfield standpoint, at least not in the near term. We have a bit of a capacity in our sites. But obviously, as the business continues to grow at some point, we might have to look at additional space. But no immediate plans as of right now. We feel we service what's coming our way in the near term. David Dunbar: Yes, I guess the one caveat to that is we mentioned the missile programs. If these missile orders do appear for some of these higher scenarios, then we will expand the footprint. Ademir Sarcevic: That's correct. Michael Shlisky: Okay. Got it. David Dunbar: But we would only do that with the long term -- I'm sorry, but we would only do that with a long-term commitment from the customer, and we'd certainly communicate that in a future quarter. Michael Shlisky: Right. I imagine you have an ROIC hurdle to beat there, and it wouldn't be any different than you would for Amran or anything else. David Dunbar: Right. Right, exactly. Michael Shlisky: Great. And then it sounds like you're not looking to give us too much guidance on fiscal 2027, but can you just comment on the new product menu for 2027. Do you have as many rolling out next year that you had this year? Do you have much in the pipeline? Can you expect a halfway decent year from that part of the growth plan? David Dunbar: Yes. If you just step back and think our general growth model, we think we've got these fast growth markets that continue to grow upper teens, 20% a year, that's 6 points of growth from that. Our new products, we still expect that to add 300 basis points of growth. And then whatever happens with general industries may be a tailwind to that. So just as a high level, I would be thinking -- in that zone for 2027, if the guide is beneath here. So in terms of numbers of products in 2027 got in line with... Ademir Sarcevic: Yes, Definitely, Mike. I think we think the momentum will continue. Actually, it might even increase because as we are adding -- our funnel is increasing internally of new product ideas. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Next, we will hear from Gary Prestopino with Barrington Research. Gary Prestopino: In your new segment breakdown, the other category, is that legacy Federal before the divestiture? What exactly is in there? Ademir Sarcevic: That's Legacy. That's all it is. Gary Prestopino: Okay. That's all it is. Okay. So with the sale of Federal, was the corporate expense associated with Federal, does that come out of the equation? I noticed like your corporate expense was about $8.6 million this quarter, a step down from last quarter, which was abnormally high. But as we're modeling, what kind of number should we be looking at for that corporate expense number? Ademir Sarcevic: Yes, Gary, it's Ademir. I mean we don't really allocate a lot of corporate costs. So there's no corporate costs that would go away with Federal. I mean what's really driving the reduction in the corporate cost for this quarter is we -- we got slightly lower medical costs versus some of the prior quarters. There was some adjustment to the bonus payouts. And that's basically it. But we do assume that going forward, kind of $9 million to $10 million run rate is probably the right number. Gary Prestopino: Okay. And then just in terms of your tax rate because I noticed it was down, I think, this quarter and obviously, a lot of moving parts with the numbers with the sale of Federal. But for Q4, is it looking like it will be about 24%? Ademir Sarcevic: Yes, 24% to 25% is kind of what I would tell you is a good estimate. Gary Prestopino: Okay. And then just last question in terms of what's your growth in Electronics. I mean, can you -- is it all across the board and grid, replacement of grid, data centers? Or where are you starting to see abnormal growth? . David Dunbar: Did you say abnormal growth? Gary Prestopino: Right. Yes. Growth's in excess of what you were thinking in terms of the expectation. David Dunbar: Yes. So the growth driver is certainly a grid, defense. There is a defense component in Electronics. And I mentioned it earlier, our sales of Bare Switches, our Reed Switches, which was up 20% year-on-year. So that -- those go everywhere. So a sign of a general industry strength primarily in Asia. And our relay sales are strong. They're driven by kind of test and measurement equipment, similar drivers to the grid, serving data centers and the equipment that go into data centers. I know we look at it, we have three businesses in there, as you know. We've got what we used to call Magnetics, our Edge business, which is really a North American business. That was down in the quarter year-on-year, largely due to some execution issues. Their book-to-bill was very strong. The Detect, the SST business, which is where the switches and sensors are was upper single digits. That includes the switch business I talked about before. And then grid, of course, which we talked about. So kind of triangulates into your growth question from a couple of different angles. Operator: At this time, Mr. Dunbar, we have no other questions registered. Please proceed, sir. David Dunbar: All right. Thank you. I appreciate everybody connecting today on this call. We always enjoy reporting on our progress at Standex. Thank you also to our employees and shareholders for your continued support and contributions. I look forward to speaking with you again in our fiscal fourth quarter call. Operator: Thank you. Ladies and gentlemen, this does indeed conclude your conference call for today. Once again, thank you for attending. And at this time, we ask that you please disconnect your lines. Have a good weekend.
Operator: Greetings, and welcome to the AMG First Quarter 2026 Earnings Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this conference is being recorded. I'd now like to turn the call over to your host, Patricia Figueroa, Head of Investor Relations for AMG. Thank you. You may begin. Patricia Figueroa: Good morning, and thank you for joining us today to discuss AMG's results for the first quarter of 2026. Before we begin, I'd like to remind you that during this call, we may make a number of forward-looking statements, which could differ from our actual results materially due to a number of factors, including those described in today's earnings press release and our most recent Form 10-K and subsequent filings with the SEC, and AMG assumes no obligation to update these statements. Also, please note that nothing on this call constitutes an offer of any products, investment vehicles or services of any AMG affiliates. A replay of today's call will be available on the Investor Relations section of our website, along with a copy of our earnings release and reconciliations for any non-GAAP financial measures, including any earnings guidance provided. In addition, we have posted an updated investor presentation to our website and encourage investors to consult our site regularly for updated information. With us today to discuss the company's results for the quarter are Jay Horgen, President and Chief Executive Officer; and Dava Ritchea, Chief Financial Officer. With that, I'll turn the call over to Jay. Jay Horgen: Thanks, Patricia, and good morning, everyone. AMG reported record results for the first quarter with adjusted EBITDA of approximately $317 million and economic earnings per share of $8.23, representing year-over-year growth of 39% and 58%, respectively. Rising demand for liquid alternative strategies and ongoing strength in private markets fundraising generated record quarterly net client cash flows of more than $22 billion, bringing net flows over the last 12 months to $52 billion, an organic growth rate of 7% over the period. In the quarter, given our confidence in AMG's business profile and growth prospects, we repurchased shares at an elevated pace, deploying approximately $186 million and bringing share buybacks over the past 12 months to more than $700 million, a reduction of 10% in our shares outstanding. AMG generated these excellent first quarter results against the volatile market backdrop, highlighting the value of AMG's differentiated model and the ongoing strength of our diverse business. As we have seen over AMG's history, our business is resilient and well positioned to navigate periods of uncertainty and dislocation. AMG's highly diversified profile has once again demonstrated that resilience as we ended the first quarter in a position of even greater strength relative to the beginning of the year with record assets under management and record fee-related EBITDA, and we have continued to build on this momentum in April. With 40 affiliates managing a broad range of private markets, liquid alternatives and differentiated long-only strategies, this is the type of environment where we expect AMG to not only weather a volatile environment well, but outperform. Given that we have strategically evolved towards alternative strategies over the last several years, a number of important secular trends are driving our organic growth story today. In private markets, where our affiliates manage $148 billion in assets, we see opportunities for growth across all 11 affiliates, with the strongest momentum coming in 2 areas: infrastructure and real estate, where our affiliates manage more than $60 billion and secondary solutions where our affiliates manage approximately $50 billion. We expect rising demand for infrastructure strategies as infrastructure investment has become a global imperative due to population growth, the need to modernize aging assets and an evolving economy shaped by energy security, supply chain realignment and the rapid growth of digital infrastructure, all against the backdrop of rising inflation. We also expect ongoing demand for secondary solutions across private equity, infrastructure and credit, given the role such strategies play in underlying portfolio management for both GPs and LPs to address liquidity, manage duration and adjust exposures, attributes that are even more important in the environment today given monetization headwinds in private equity. Together, infrastructure and secondary solutions have generated substantial organic growth from both institutional and individual investors over the past 12 months. In liquid alternatives, where our affiliates manage more than $261 billion in assets, we are benefiting most from growth in 2 trends: institutional demand for absolute return strategies and the growing focus on after-tax compounding in the wealth channel. Absolute return strategies, which account for approximately $180 billion in assets include multi-strategy, global macro, relative value fixed income and trend following and are designed to generate returns that have low or no correlation to broader markets. They provide AMG's business with ballast relative to pro-cyclical strategies in private markets and differentiated equities, enhancing the stability of our earnings over time. For the same reasons, clients globally are increasingly attracted to these absolute return strategies, especially as the outlook for the macro environment has become more uncertain. As a result, we had a meaningful uptick in flows in the quarter, driven by institutional demand for absolute return strategies with contributions from nearly all of our affiliates in liquid alternatives, and we expect continued organic growth momentum in these strategies. In addition, within liquid alternatives, we are benefiting from significant client demand for tax-aware long/short strategies. These strategies account for approximately $69 billion of our AUM in liquid alternatives strategies or about 8% of AMG's business. And while tax loss harvesting has been a secular trend for decades, clients and advisers are increasingly attuned to the impact of their portfolio allocation decisions on compounding returns after tax. AMG has benefited from this underlying secular trend through ongoing organic growth, which has been significant over the past year. As I mentioned, these 4 growth areas: infrastructure, secondary solutions, absolute return strategies and beta-sensitive long/short strategies have driven organic growth in the quarter and over the past 12 months. Looking ahead, given the continued tailwinds in these areas and our affiliates' excellent long-term track records, AMG is well positioned for further growth. As demonstrated over the past 5 years, our business is strong, diversified and dynamic. Through our ability to shape AMG's business profile and scale our earnings power by allocating our capital to investments in new and existing affiliates, we will further evolve our business towards areas of growth and return. Our unique approach and track record as a partner are continuing to resonate with the highest quality independent firms. We have had an active start to 2026 in this area. In January, we completed our investment in BBH Credit Partners, a leading taxable fixed income and credit franchise. In February, we announced a new partnership with Highbrook Investors, a private markets manager operating in the real estate sector. And we also announced an incremental minority investment in Garda Capital Partners, an existing highly successful affiliate operating in liquid alternatives. Stepping back from the quarter and to take a longer-term view of our business and our strategy. Over the past 5 years, we have transformed AMG and evolved our business profile in a way that we believe will benefit shareholders for years to come. During this period, our business generated more than $5 billion in capital, all of which through our disciplined capital allocation strategy we have reallocated to both high conviction growth investments and meaningful return of capital to shareholders, demonstrating our commitment to long-term value creation. Together, these strategic actions have resulted in exceptional earnings growth, generating mid-teens compound annual growth rate in economic earnings per share over the past 5 years. And this growth is accelerating. In 2025, economic earnings per share grew by more than 20%, and we expect that growth rate to increase to more than 30% this year. As we look ahead, our capital allocation decision-making will continue to be the most impactful element of our strategy. We anticipate our business will generate significantly higher levels of capital cumulatively over the next 5 years, and we expect the impact of deploying it towards growth investments and capital return will further shape and diversify our business profile and fuel our earnings growth. With our unique partnership-centric cash-generative return-focused model, we will continue to press our advantages, executing the same proven strategy with the same level of discipline that brought us here. Today, AMG's reputation, value proposition and capital flexibility have never been stronger, a powerful combination for our firm and for our shareholders. And with that, I'll turn it over to Dava. Dava Ritchea: Thank you, Jay, and good morning, everyone. AMG entered 2026 with significant momentum, and our first quarter results reinforce that strength, highlighted by record net inflows and significant year-over-year growth in fee-related earnings, adjusted EBITDA and economic earnings per share. Our alternatives business continues to scale, underpinned by strong organic growth from existing affiliates and further enhanced by the addition of several new high-quality partnerships. These results underscore the strength and resilience of our model as a result of the ongoing execution of our strategy to evolve the business towards areas of secular growth while remaining disciplined in our capital allocation decision-making. Starting with our results for the first quarter. AMG's AUM was $882 billion, the highest level in our history, driven by record positive net inflows for our alternative affiliates and the addition of AUM from new investments. Our business reached this record AUM level despite market headwinds from broader macro events. Net client cash inflows of more than $22 billion marked our fourth consecutive quarter of positive and increasing net flows, driven by ongoing strength in alternatives. In liquid alternatives, our affiliates generated $25 billion in net inflows, marking another record quarter with most of our liquid alternative affiliates, including AQR, Capula, Garda, Systematica and Winton, contributing to this strong result. Flows were broad-based. We had net inflows from wealth clients of $15 billion into long/short tax-aware strategies, $6 billion in net inflows into absolute return strategies from institutional clients and $4 billion of inflows into retail products across both beta-sensitive and absolute return strategies. This is consistent with broader industry trends of rising allocations to these strategies as investors value the role they play in portfolios across market cycles. As momentum continues to build across channels, we believe AMG's diversified liquid alternative Affiliates are well positioned to continue to attract new flows over time. Our private market affiliates raised $4 billion in the quarter, primarily driven by Pantheon and secondary strategies, along with infrastructure fundraises at Aura, EIG and Qualitas Energy. On the heels of a record fundraising year in 2025, we continue to see consistent demand given these affiliates' specialized strategies, deep institutional relationships and strong long-term track records. Importantly, with multiple private market affiliates contributing across vintages, products and channels, AMG exhibits a more durable and consistent fundraising pattern, reflecting a structurally diversified model rather than reliance on any single fundraise, differentiating our private markets profile from that of others. To give further color on our private markets profile, we have a distinctive strategic position in the industry. Nearly 90% of AUM managed by our affiliates in private markets is institutional, largely in drawdown-style funds. These drawdown funds form the core offering of our private market affiliates. Additionally, we have experienced growing demand for these strategies from wealth clients, and we are well positioned with our differentiated product offering and capital formation solutions for affiliates to access this long-term trend. Our affiliates' private market strategies are well diversified across strategies, including secondaries, private equity, infrastructure, real estate and private credit. Our private credit exposure is low, representing approximately 3% of AMG's total assets today. Within private credit, we have limited traditional direct lending exposure given the sale of our stake in Comvest's private credit business last year. More broadly, the credit exposure we have is more opportunistic in nature, including secondaries in private credit and structured credit and relative value in liquid alternatives. We believe the current credit market environment is creating compelling long-term opportunities for these strategies. In multi-asset and fixed income, our affiliates generated net inflows of $3 billion, mainly driven by BBH Credit Partners with additional contributions from Baker Street, Artemis, Beutel Goodman and GW&K. Finally, in equities, net outflows of approximately $9 billion in the quarter reflected ongoing industry and performance headwinds. However, we continue to see pockets of strength in our differentiated long-only business, including consistent positive net flows at Artemis based on its excellent long-term track record of investment performance. In aggregate, our first quarter flows highlight the structural advantages of AMG's diversified business model. With a broad group of affiliates spanning strategies, asset classes, geographies and client channels, we were able to navigate shifting market conditions and trends while continuing to capture growth opportunities. As we further evolve our mix towards higher growth alternatives, the resulting incremental diversification enhances the resilience of our cash flows and positions AMG to deliver more consistent, sustainable organic growth across market cycles. Turning to first quarter financial results. We reported adjusted EBITDA of $317 million, which grew 39% year-over-year. Fee-related earnings, which exclude net performance fees, grew 29% year-over-year, driven by positive organic growth, the positive impact of investment performance and margin expansion at some of our largest affiliates. Net performance fee earnings of $49 million in the quarter increased $29 million from the prior year, driven by Capula, Winton, AQR and ValueAct. Economic earnings per share of $8.23 grew 58% year-over-year, driven by these factors and further benefiting from the impact of share repurchases. Now moving to second quarter guidance. We expect adjusted EBITDA to be in the range of $290 million to $305 million based on current AUM levels, reflecting our market blend, which was up 5% quarter-to-date as of April 30 and including seasonably lower net performance fees of up to $10 million. Based on this and assuming an adjusted weighted average share count of 26.7 million, we expect second quarter economic earnings per share to be between $7.60 and $8.01, the midpoint of which represents approximately 45% growth versus Q2 2025. Finally, turning to the balance sheet and capital allocation. Building on an active 2025, we continue to execute our capital allocation strategy in the first quarter of 2026, with the January close of our partnership with BBH Credit Partners and the February announcement of our new investment in Highbrook and follow-on investment in Garda. In January, conversions related to our 2037 junior convertible trust preferred securities were fully settled in cash. The $174 million in conversion premium effectively represented the repurchase of 600,000 adjusted diluted shares and the share dilution associated with these securities has now been fully removed from our capital structure. We repurchased approximately $186 million in shares in the first quarter. And for the full year, we expect to repurchase approximately $500 million, subject to market conditions and capital allocation activity. Our balance sheet remains in a strong position given our long-dated debt, low leverage level and access to our revolver. This is further supported by a healthy underlying business generating recurring annual cash flows that continue to grow. These after-tax cash flows are at record levels, delivering approximately $1 billion annually. With these factors, we are well positioned to execute our growth strategy across all stages of a market cycle. We have ample capacity to both make growth investments and simultaneously return capital to shareholders. Our strong first quarter results reflect the accelerating momentum in our business and the advantages of our highly diversified affiliate model. Looking ahead, we are excited by the breadth of opportunities in front of us as we continue to evolve our business towards higher growth alternatives. We will remain deliberate and disciplined in deploying capital, investing in growth opportunities with new and existing affiliates while also consistently returning capital to shareholders. And we are confident in our ability to generate meaningful incremental value over time. Now we are happy to take your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Bill Katz with TD Cowen. William Katz: Appreciate the update. Jay, maybe I'll just pick up on some of your commentary. I think the investment community in the last few weeks has gotten myopically focused on AQR, just given some of the headlines coming out of Schwab, the [indiscernible], et cetera, it all seems to be noise to us. And it sounds like there's a lot of diversification from your comments today, which we appreciate the expanded discussion. Can you dig in a little bit further into maybe these 4 verticals of opportunity for growth? And then I was intrigued by your comments of April off to a good start. I was wondering if maybe expand on that as well? Jay Horgen: Yes. Great. Thanks for your question, Bill. So I'll start. Dava can help. We're going to talk about our flows and then maybe I'll circle back on AQR. So yes, the answer is our flows were broad-based, and they were along the lines of the 4 trends that I mentioned in our prepared remarks. Just to dimensionalize it, in the quarter, we had $29 billion in Alternative flows. That was a record for us. Over the past year, we generated $90 billion in flows into alternatives. And I know there's a temptation, there always has been to focus on one affiliate or one element of AMG. But AMG is truly a diverse business. These 4 growth drivers that I mentioned: infrastructure, secondary solutions, absolute return and tax-aware strategies, they're all powering the strong organic growth story and the $90 billion of flows into alternatives. Our flows were balanced across each of these 4 areas over the quarter and over the year with none accounting for a majority. So maybe I'll turn it to Dava just to drill down a little bit further contextualize some of this, and then I'll come back and address maybe some of the noise. Dava Ritchea: Thanks, Jay. So just digging in a little bit further here, our flow profile is really an output of our strategy. It aligns our business with areas of secular client demand trends and alternatives, and it continues to evolve our mix through organic growth and new investments. I'll double-click into each of private markets and then liquid alts. Starting with private markets. Our private market affiliates raise capital through multiple strategies, vehicles and channels, which help produce a more consistent fundraising profile than a single flagship-led model. That consistency is supported by durable client demand trends, most notably in infrastructure and real assets, secondaries and specialized allocations through -- such as decarbonization and health care. Our private market flows have been relatively consistent over the past 8 quarters, exhibiting about 18% annualized growth on average. As one of our largest and longest-standing affiliates, Pantheon has been a consistent driver of that fundraising, supported by a scaled multiproduct platform, particularly in secondaries. It's been recurring demand across vintages and has had meaningful contributions from institutional clients as well as within the wealth channel. Alongside of that, many of our other private market affiliates are more specialized and tend to raise capital through more targeted fundraises across their focus areas. Given we have 11 of these private market affiliates, we're less reliant on any single affiliate's capital raising calendar, and this tends to produce a more consistent, durable overall private market flow profile. And based on what we're seeing today, fundraising and client demand are expected to remain robust with multiple funds coming to market across our private market affiliate strategies, including all the affiliates we just recently partnered with over the past 15 months. Now turning over to liquid alternatives. We had $25 billion of flows this quarter, and flows this quarter were broad-based across both beta-sensitive and absolute return strategies, also broad-based across investor channels with institutional wealth and retail flows all coming through. This is consistent with broader industry trends as investors are increasing allocations to these strategies as they've demonstrated a real role that they can play across market cycles, and these allocations have been flowing to the largest managers. And here, we're well positioned with several of our affiliates like AQR, Garda, Capula and Verition. Finally, it's worth mentioning that we've been experiencing positive mix shift over the past year as well, leading to an increase in our management fee rate and margin expansion at some of our largest affiliates, which has had a direct benefit to our EBITDA. By contrast, though, we have continued to see some headwinds alongside of overall industry and equities. We reported about $9 billion in net outflows from equities this quarter, in line with average levels over the last 12 months. But when taken together, with $3 billion in net inflows in multi-asset and fixed income, we're seeing an improvement in our differentiated long-only net flows. Across these affiliates, we see pockets of strength, including at Artemis, where strong performance has led to positive net flows and at BBH Credit Partners, where we see ongoing demand for fixed income strategies. Jay Horgen: Great. Thanks, Dava. So I'm just going to comment on one thing here, which is in addition to the strong alternative flows, as we look out for the next 12 months, we actually think that our Long-Only outflows seem to be getting better. So our flow story just all around for the moment is positive relative to what it's been in the past. We had $52 billion of net flows for the last 12 months, and that trend seems to be getting better as we look forward. Now I'm going to take the second part of your question and just address AQR for a moment. And maybe I'll just start with a bit of a fun statement, which is over the past 15 years, I've answered a lot of questions on AQR, mostly on these earnings calls. Virtually, every time I answer the question, I start and I'll end as well with one observation. AQR is an incredibly innovative business. Their success is rooted in its decade-long reputation and history of this innovation. They deliver strategies and products that meet clients' objectives that can be used in portfolio construction and that can produce alpha. So AQR's reputation and its long-term investment track record across its broad range of strategies today, including absolute return, beta-sensitive, long-only. It's driving demand across all of its client types, institutional, wealth, retail. The firm's primary goal is to deliver institutional caliber pretax alpha to all investors. And for individuals, AQR has a focus on compounding after-tax returns. This is a very large addressable market. It's been around for a long time, and AQR is just one of the participants in the market. We continue to see strong demand for these strategies, including in the second quarter. And we are not aware of anything that changes our positive outlook for the firm or their strategies and underlying trends supporting its ongoing business momentum. These tax-aware strategies, however, they only speak to one aspect of AQR's broad platform and its continued innovation. The firm has generated inflows across a range of strategies, including in this quarter. And we also are very excited about their absolute return strategies and the prospect for additional flows into these strategies, which have excellent performance and are gaining interest from all types of clients, including institutions. Now I'd like to take it back to the AMG level. Long/short strategy in wealth account for just 8% of our assets under management. As I mentioned, our affiliates generated $90 billion in flows into alternatives, a minority of those flows came from tax-aware strategies. AMG is highly diverse. And this one trend is just 1 of the 4 major drivers of our growth. Again, these 4 trends being infrastructure, secondary solutions, absolute return strategies and tax aware strategies. Again, all 4 balanced across -- all 4 are driving our growth and none are accounting for a majority. So then the last question you asked me is April. Interestingly, during the first quarter, we had, as others did, we had to face reasonably significant volatility in the market and Beta was down in the quarter. Yet AMG had record AUM and record cash flow and record earnings in the quarter. In April, we've seen strong beta. And because of the balance in our business, our assets are at another all-time high. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Alex Blostein with Goldman Sachs. Alexander Blostein: I appreciate all the detail and extra discussion on the flow backdrop. I wanted to double-click into the wealth channel. You guys had quite a lot of success with Pantheon's retail product focused on secondaries and co-invest markets. How is the appetite for these kind of products in the channel today given the turbulence we're seeing in the credit part of the business? Obviously, that's not part of your model, but just curious if you're seeing any spillover effects of that into other parts of the wealth channel? And then maybe as part of that hit on the road map of additional products you're likely to launch in the coming 12 to 18 months as we think about further diversifying your flow base? Jay Horgen: Yes. Great. Thanks, Alex. I think that's an excellent question. We'll take it in a few different pieces. We'll talk about the wealth products, and then I'll circle back. I'll let Dava do that. Then -- I'll have Dava do that, and then I'll come back and do Pantheon more broadly and then other products that we're looking at introducing. Dava Ritchea: Great. Thanks for the question, Alex. So we remain constructive on the secular trend. And while we're monitoring the broader industry dynamics, wealth investors and advisers continue to broaden portfolios beyond traditional allocations and evergreen structures are an increasingly important way to access institutional quality alternatives in a more flexible wrapper. AMG is focused on delivering the right strategies in the right structure, meeting clients where they are on liquidity preference, access and portfolio needs. We believe AMG is differentiated in this channel, providing investors access to independent affiliates and their breadth of offerings across private markets and alternative credit. We see the most compelling opportunities today in differentiated strategies, led by credit secondaries. Liquidity needs, duration management and slower exits are driving greater secondary activity, while market noise and headline risk are creating pricing dislocations that can offer seasoned assets at attractive valuations. We also see opportunity in asset-backed credit solutions, where structural protections and collateral quality support capital preservation. Ultimately, the key to long-term success is education and setting expectations while staying disciplined. Education remains a critical enabler of growth for evergreen private market solutions. While these vehicles expand access, their structural features differ meaningfully from traditional private market funds and require deeper understanding. We are committed to providing scalable education that equips advisers to understand these mechanics, assess suitability and thoughtfully integrate evergreen solutions to support clients' long-term investment objectives. We believe these products can be a compelling option for wealth clients seeking diversified access to alternatives over a long time horizon. Let me walk you through the couple -- the main products that we have here on the platform. First, P-BUILD. This is the AMG Pantheon Infrastructure Fund, which we launched last year, and it's still in its seed phase. The portfolio is ramping nicely, and we expect it will benefit from the rising demand for infrastructure strategies as infrastructure investment has become a global imperative. P-BUILD is uniquely positioned to combine the benefits of infrastructure investments, including the potential for capital appreciation, yields, lower volatility and portfolio diversification with the added advantages of secondaries, which can offer greater risk mitigation, shorter investment durations and more immediate distributions compared to traditional infrastructure investments. The next one is P-SECC, the AMG Pantheon Credit Solutions Fund, and it's still relatively new, launched within the last 2 years. The fund's investment approach is first of its kind focused on private credit secondaries. Since inception, it's been among the top performers in its peer set. And given broader market dynamics, we believe the current environment creates a compelling investment opportunity for the fund. While near-term growth may be more muted due to traditional direct lending trends, we believe this is a compelling long-term product for investors and differentiated from peer offerings. In these environments, pricing dislocations and motivated sellers can allow access to high-quality seasoned investment opportunities at potentially attractive valuations. This dynamic enables selective capital deployment with a margin of safety, positioning the fund to benefit from both income generation and potential capital appreciation as markets stabilize. For P-SECC, periods of increased volatility can create particularly attractive entry points for disciplined secondary credit investing. And this growing opportunity set underscores the increasing role credit secondaries are playing in managing liquidity and portfolio exposures in a market characterized by heightened demand for capital flexibility. And finally, P-PEXX, the AMG Pantheon Fund, which has a long operating history since its launch in 2014, with a strong long-term track record of delivering private equity exposure through cycles. Notably, it has a compelling fee structure versus market comparables with a lower management fee, and it does not charge performance fees. It provides a single allocation globally diversified portfolio across co-investments, secondaries and primaries, diversified by manager, vintage, geography and sector, which we view as more sustainable for building long-term compounding of returns. We remain constructive on its outlook, including ongoing progress in expanding its reach to new wealth platforms and intermediaries. Overall, these 3 products represent a small but growing proportion of Pantheon, and when put into context of AMG, represent less than 1% of AUM today. We are confident in the long-term secular trend and the underlying fundamentals of each of these products, but mindful of the impact of current market dynamics in the evergreen space on near-term growth expectations. We continue to focus resources on partnering with affiliates in the U.S. wealth space through robust product development and access to our broad capital formation resources with several products, including the newly registered AMG BBH Fund in development. This fund is expected to be launched into a compelling credit market environment for its opportunistic structure and alternative credit approach. Jay Horgen: Yes. So Alex, Dava covered the landscape. But I think what I would maybe contextualize, maybe even just give some perspective is, look, the market had been painting everything with a single brush. This is actually an opportunity to differentiate. I think we see opportunities here because we think our products are unique, differentiated, certainly on the semi-liquid side. Education, as Dava said, is key. People have to understand what they own. There's suitability questions. But what we like about our products is that they're opportunistic in nature. I'll take the Pantheon Credit Secondaries Fund. It actually has an opportunity to take advantage of what's happening in the market. And that's the same with the newly registered BBH Opportunity Credit Fund. So we -- it's got in its name. So I think we're having -- in some ways, we might come out better through this period as people sort through what products really are differentiated and what products people want to own. So we're long-term constructive. As Dava said, there is a bit of sorting that's going to go through -- we're going to go through here. But on the -- as we come out of it, we have an expectation that we're going to be on our front foot. Maybe just on our wealth strategy more broadly, it is clearly important to us. We collaborate with our affiliates. We offer strategic capabilities to new and existing affiliates. It's part of our brand. It's part of our reputation, the ability to engage with our affiliates and help them meet their goals, exceed their goals and get them into this channel. It's very difficult to get into this channel. It's an area where you need scale. AMG offers our affiliates that scale. We also offer them the ability to package the products and bring them to the market. So it's a growth area for us long term. I think we made it through this period reasonably well, I think partly because we were methodical and careful. But obviously, we have good fortune on our side, too. We're not -- I think we're just trying to do the very best that we can here, and we do think this is a good long-term opportunity. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Dan Fannon with Jefferies. Daniel Fannon: So Jay, I wanted to just talk about the environment for new investment. You guys have obviously been quite active over the last 12 months. But given some of the dislocations we're seeing in certainly the private credit markets or broadly within some of the equity markets, is that creating more of an opportunity for you to deploy capital in this environment? Or any changes kind of in the backdrop as you think about the new investment pipeline? Jay Horgen: Yes. Great, Dan. Thank you. And I apologize it's so early for you on the West Coast. So yes, look, we did have a very active period. The last 18 months has been one of our more active periods of new investments. It's one of the benefits that we have. It's contributing to our earnings this year and our growth rate this year. We're very excited about the businesses that we invested in over this period, largely speaking, in alternatives with a focus on private markets, but more specialty businesses. So coming off of an active period, really even into this first quarter because we were just closing on Highbrook, the second investment in Garda and BBH. When we look at the rest of this year, one of the things that we note is that public market valuations for alternatives are way down. It takes a little while to have that trickle into the M&A market, but I think we have an expectation that it will. We're mindful that some of the key competitors in that market are the ones who have lower valuations today. So maybe they're not offering their stock. So competition just may have gotten better for AMG. As you know, we've been an active participant, maybe, I would say, the most active participant for independent firms over the past 30 years. We are open for business. We like to partner with outstanding independent firms and maybe the competitive environment and pricing has gotten better for us as we look forward. So we're excited about that. Thanks for your question. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Brian Bedell with Deutsche Bank. Brian Bedell: Good to see the really strong flows across the franchise and diversified contribution as well. We, of course, are getting more questions on the tax aware strategy. So I just want to zone in on that a little bit. Just your view maybe of -- obviously, really strong growth in 1Q. Maybe if you could talk a little bit about the contribution in 1Q from tax aware. And I think you mentioned it's 8% of AUM, but just I was curious if there's a way to frame like what percentage of EBITDA that is or I think you -- last time you spoke about AQR as a percentage of EBITDA was about 20%. I don't know if there's updated comments on that. And then just the -- as this is getting added to more platforms, given really strong retail demand, if you can talk about the pipeline of doing that because I know, of course, Fidelity had constrained it, and I think Schwab had put some guardrails around it. Of course, they're continuing to sell it. They just had some constraints around it. So just some comments around the growth outlook for that product as it pertains to adding it to more wirehouse and brokerage and private bank platforms? Jay Horgen: Okay. Yes. Thanks, Brian. Well, I'm not going to go back through my conversation or my response on AQR specifically. But I will maybe just broaden it and talk about the environment for these products. And I'm sure I'll weave in a few of those data points that you're looking for. Tax aware businesses and tax loss harvesting, it's been around since -- as far as I can tell, since 1993. So just for everyone who may think this is a new business, it's a 3-decade old business. I think what's happened in the market is that advisers realize that investors, individual investors, they pay tax. And institutional investors, they don't pay tax. And so when you think about your portfolio, you just have to think about it in general on an after-tax basis. It might change what -- where you allocate your capital. It might change the type of asset or the type of strategy you allocate to. So I think everyone should be aware the fact that taxes interrupt compounding. So if you're aware of that fact, then you need to at least consider it when you decide that you're going to create a portfolio. These products that have been around many people, many big firms that you all cover have these products. AQR is just one participant in the market. So I just want to make sure that everyone understands that. And then the other thing I would just say is we gave you the number on an AUM basis which is less than 8%, I rounded it up. It actually has contributed to less than 8% of our EBITDA last year in the first quarter. It just isn't that big. But it has grown significantly. It's not -- it has been less than a majority of our flows. So just like I said in my prepared remarks and then in the answer to the last question, the 4 major trends that are driving our business, they're balanced over that $90 billion of inflows that we had. No one of those trends made up a majority. And even in the most recent quarter, $29 billion, the same statement holds. So very balanced. I don't want to go through that all again, but we feel pretty good about that trend as well as the other 3 trends in our business. So I think in terms of sizing, it's important, but it's not a major factor. And when you zoom way out at AMG, and I think this is probably the most important thing that I haven't said yet is we have record cash flow. Our business AUM is at an all-time high. We had record EBITDA in the quarter. As Dava said, our EBITDA guidance that we gave you at the midpoint would be up -- or at least it would be up with significant growth and cash earnings per share would be up 45% at the midpoint. With that record cash flow, if you think about that annualized out at over $1 billion a year, it is that cash flow that we have to reinvest. And so as we reinvest, we diversify the business, we add new sources of earnings. Our business grows because of it. So if you're thinking about AMG today, you need to think about what AMG is going to look like in 12 months and then 3 years and then in 5 years. Because we generated $5 billion of cash flow over the last 5 years, we're expected to generate much more than $5 billion over the next 5 years. So the biggest impact to our business is what we do with those cash flows. And I think you know this, we have a very disciplined capital allocation philosophy. And as we continue to invest in growth areas and return capital through share repurchases, this record level of free cash flow is going to shape AMG. We are looking forward to doing that. And when you think about where we are today at these record levels, we are trading -- our shares are trading at less than 10x after-tax earnings on a backward-looking basis, not a forward but a backward-looking basis and less than 8x EBITDA on a backward-looking basis. It is an excellent opportunity for us to continue to buy back at an elevated pace. So we're excited about our capital opportunity. Dava mentioned in her script that we look forward to estimated share repurchases this year of $500 million. That's not all the capital that we have. If you think about the numbers I just gave you, $1 billion of after-tax earnings, $500 million is only half of that. And with a little bit of leverage because we'd like to lever it up to 2x, and right now, we're underleveraged at that point, we can do more than $1 billion. So in the next 12 months, more than $1 billion of capital will be the single biggest impact on our business for '27 and '28 and beyond. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, that concludes our question-and-answer session and will conclude our call today. We thank you for your interest and participation. You may now disconnect your lines.
Operator: Thank you for standing by. This is the conference operator. Welcome to the Eldorado Gold Corporation First Quarter 2026 Results Conference Call. As a reminder, all participants are in listen-only mode and the conference is being recorded. After the presentation, there will be an opportunity to ask questions. I would now like to turn the conference over to Lynette Gould, Vice President, Investor Relations, Communications and External Affairs. Please go ahead, Ms. Gould. Lynette Gould: Thank you, operator, and good morning, everyone. I would like to welcome you to our conference call to discuss our first quarter 2026 results. Before we begin, I would like to remind you that we will be making forward-looking statements and referring to non-IFRS measures during the call. Please refer to the cautionary statements included in the presentation and the disclosure on non-IFRS measures and risk factors in our Management’s Discussion and Analysis. Joining me on the call today, we have George Burns, Chief Executive Officer; Christian Milau, President; Paul Ferneyhough, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer; and Simon Hille, Executive Vice President and Chief Operating Officer. Our release yesterday details our first quarter 2026 financial and operating results. The release should be read in conjunction with our Q1 2026 financial statements and Management’s Discussion and Analysis, both of which are available on our website. They have also both been filed on SEDAR+ and EDGAR. All dollar figures discussed today are U.S. dollars unless otherwise stated. We will be speaking to the slides that accompany this webcast, which can be downloaded from our website. After the prepared remarks, we will open the call for Q&A, at which time we will invite analysts to queue. I will now turn the call over to George. George Burns: Thank you, Lynette, and good morning, everyone. I will begin with an overview of our first quarter and provide brief updates on McIlvenna Bay and Skouries. I will then hand the call over to Paul to review the financials, and then to Simon with an update on our operations. Following that, Christian will make some concluding remarks before opening up the call for questions. We have had a very busy and solid start to 2026, with performance in the quarter tracking in line with our expectations and full-year guidance. This year, production is back-half weighted as two mines come into production and several other operations deliver stronger results later in the year. 2026 is an important year for Eldorado Gold Corporation as we continue to advance two high-quality growth projects, Skouries in Greece and McIlvenna Bay in Saskatchewan. MacBay is nearing first concentrate production, followed by first concentrate at Skouries in Q3. Once in operation, both assets will meaningfully enhance our production profile and cash flow generation. Starting in 2026, to provide greater transparency as these polymetallic assets come online, we plan to enhance our disclosure by reporting copper assets on a dollar-per-pound co-product basis for Skouries and MacBay. Before getting into the project updates, I want to note that, as previously announced, I plan to retire as CEO later this year as we ramp up Skouries towards commercial production. Christian, who joined us last September, has been deeply involved across the business and is set up to seamlessly step into the role at that time. I am pleased to remain on the Board to support continuity, and Dan Myerson has joined the Board as Deputy Chair, providing important continuity from the Foran side. I want to take a moment to recognize the achievement of our colleagues at Lamaque. In March, they received the TSM Gold Leadership Award, a special recognition for mining operations who achieved Level AAA, the highest possible rating across all applicable TSM performance indicators. This recognition reflects the dedication of our employees and our unwavering commitment to responsible mining in Quebec and across our global operations, where TSM protocols are applied as a matter of practice under Eldorado Gold Corporation’s Sustainability Integrated Management System. Well done, Lamaque team. The Foran transaction represents a significant milestone for Eldorado Gold Corporation. At MacBay, we have now begun integration activities and are working closely with the existing team as the project nears first concentrate production. Following the close, members of our management team visited Saskatchewan and the MacBay project to welcome the team to Eldorado Gold Corporation, see progress firsthand, and engage with our stakeholders in Saskatchewan. What stood out was the enthusiasm of our new team, the capability supporting the operation, and the clear focus on safety, collaboration, and responsible execution. Now that MacBay is part of our portfolio, expect us to provide the following with our second quarter results: MacBay production and cost outlook for 2026, timing for an expansion study, and progress on a study for a potential lead-silver circuit. Following the close of the transaction, we have already approved approximately $17 million to spend on exploration for the remainder of 2026, reflecting the target-rich environment and our view that continued exploration success has the potential to drive meaningful long-term value. The quality of MacBay and its exploration potential reinforce our confidence that it will become a long-term cornerstone asset within our portfolio, delivering near-term growth while adding copper exposure in a stable, top-three global mining-friendly jurisdiction. Turning to Skouries in Greece on slide six, construction activities continue to progress well across all major areas. The team remains focused on disciplined, safe execution as we move through the final construction phase. At the end of the quarter, overall project progress was approximately 94%, steadily advancing towards first concentrate production. As execution activities have progressed and the project advances towards construction completion on schedule, we have updated our forecast to complete and revised our total project capital to $1.315 billion, an increase of approximately $155 million from the prior estimate. The primary driver was the increase related to construction workforce levels to support sustained final construction momentum. Total workforce has increased from 2,350 in mid-Q1 to approximately 3,200, which includes about 490 in operations. Advancing Skouries into safe production in the current metal environment is a key driver of value creation. This incremental capital reflects our continued focus on maintaining momentum towards first concentrate production. Accelerated operational capital at Skouries is now expected to be approximately $260 million, reflecting an incremental $82 million to expand pre-commercial mining and site works. This supports open-pit mining and advancing underground development ahead of first production. We are well positioned for startup with more than 2.8 million tons of ore stockpiled, which provides the entire planned mill tonnage for 2026. Overall, this investment supports a smoother ramp-up into production. On the process plant, work remains focused on final mechanical installations, piping, cable tray, and cabling as we prepare for first ore. With respect to the damaged cyclone feed pump variable-speed drives, temporary replacement equipment is expected to be installed in Q2. High- and medium-voltage electrical distribution for multiple stations is progressing. The process control building structure is complete, and electrical rooms are being progressively handed over to commissioning. On the power line and substations, the 150 kV power line and primary substation continued to advance to startup in Q3. Ahead of grinding area ore commissioning, final electrical regulatory authority approval will require completion of inspection and energization protocols. Powerline construction is progressing with the transmission tower assembly complete and pilot wire pulling now underway along the transmission line. The primary substation is advancing through ongoing assembly of the substation structures and control building structural completion. Pre-commissioning is now underway starting with the substations that feed the process plant, filter plant, and primary crusher, while commissioning continues across fire, utility, and process water systems. In parallel, we have begun pre-commissioning in flotation focused on air and instrumentation, as well as the SAG and ball milling instrumentation, electrical and control systems, and we started wet commissioning in the process water pumps and tailings thickeners. Together, Skouries and McIlvenna Bay represent a step change for Eldorado Gold Corporation in scale and portfolio diversification across jurisdictions and metals. With that, I will turn it over to Paul to review the financial results. Paul Ferneyhough: Thank you, George, and good morning. I will start on slide seven. In Q1 2026, we produced 100,358 ounces of gold, a 13% decrease year over year, primarily reflecting lower tons at stack grades at Kisladag and lower grades at Efemcukuru, partially offset by higher grades and improved recoveries at Olympias and Lamaque. Gold sales totaled 100,119 ounces at an average realized gold price of $4,891 per ounce, generating total revenue in excess of $532 million, a 50% increase from $355 million in the comparable quarter last year, driven by significantly higher gold prices. Production costs were $188 million, up from just over $148 million, driven primarily by royalty expense in Turkey and Greece, which accounted for approximately 70% of the increase, with the balance largely attributable to labor inflation in Turkey and incremental labor and contractor costs associated with continued development of the Lamaque Complex. Royalty expense increased to $50 million from $22 million last year, reflecting higher realized gold prices and higher royalty rates, partially offset by lower sales volumes. On a unit basis, total cash costs across the portfolio averaged $14.70 per ounce sold, up from $11.53, while AISC averaged $1,942 per ounce sold compared to $15.59 in the prior-year period, mainly reflecting higher royalty expense driven by the higher gold price environment, lower production, and labor cost impacts. Below the line, net earnings attributable to shareholders from continuing operations were $136 million, or $0.69 per share, compared to $72 million, or $0.35 per share, last year, primarily due to higher realized gold prices, partially offset by lower sales volumes, higher production costs, and higher income taxes. Adjusted net earnings were $188 million, or $0.95 per share, compared to $56 million, or $0.28 per share, last year. The adjustments this quarter included an $18 million foreign exchange translation loss on deferred tax balances, a $20 million unrealized loss on derivative instruments, and $8 million of acquisition costs related to the Foran Mining transaction. Turning to slide eight, we ended the quarter with cash and cash equivalents of approximately $630 million, maintaining a strong balance sheet and significant financial flexibility to fund our growth initiatives. Cash declined in Q1 relative to Q4 2025 primarily due to capital investment, share repurchases, dividend payments, and income taxes paid, partially offset by cash generated from operating activities. As we prepare the company for the significant cash flow that will come following ramp-up of production at Skouries and McIlvenna Bay, it is worth reflecting on our developing capital allocation policy, which is based on a framework built around five key priorities. First, we continue to allocate funds towards the highest-return opportunities within our global portfolio, including potential expansion projects at Lamaque and McIlvenna Bay, advancement at Perama Hill, ongoing optimization and expansion of Olympias, and continued investment for our stable, cash-generating mines in Turkey. Second, we have meaningfully increased our exploration investment focused on mine life extensions and the discovery of new resources. Third, we remain committed to maintaining balance sheet strength with a focus on reducing leverage over time, including the prudent management of our $500 million high-yield bond maturing in 2029, while preserving the flexibility to execute our pipeline of development projects. Fourth, we have established a sustainable base dividend policy of $0.075 per share per quarter. Finally, we continued in Q1 to opportunistically repurchase shares, reflecting our conviction in the company’s intrinsic value, particularly given the potential for an estimated double-digit free cash flow yield based on our current valuation, compared to industry-leading peers who currently trade at a lower yield. Overall, we believe our capital allocation framework appropriately balances growth, financial strength, and shareholder returns. With that, I will turn it over to Simon for an operational update. Simon Hille: Thank you, Paul. Starting on slide nine, at Lamaque we produced 42,306 ounces in Q1, up 5% year over year. The outperformance was primarily grade driven, and we also saw the initial contribution from Ormaque following the receipt of our operating authorization. All-in sustaining costs were $13.70 per ounce sold, modestly lower year over year, reflecting higher production volumes and continued cost focus, partially offset by the impact of deeper mining and timing of sustaining capital spend. Total capital spend was $48 million, including $20 million of sustaining capital, primarily for underground development, drilling, and equipment. Growth capital totaled $28 million, largely related to development of Ormaque and ramp development at the Triangle Mine and supporting infrastructure. Continuing to slide 10, at Kisladag, we produced 28,339 ounces as planned. As we have previously disclosed, 2026 is a cutback year for Phase 6 of the open pit, where the average grade is lower than the life of mine. All-in sustaining cost was $2,060 per ounce sold, primarily reflecting lower volumes sold on a higher cost base. Sustaining capital spend included $4 million, while growth capital included $51 million, including a one-time $24 million purchase of strategic land to support the North Heap Leach pad and North Rock waste dump expansions. The remaining planned $27 million was largely waste stripping and continued construction of Phase 3 at the heap leach in 2026. At Efemcukuru, on slide 11, we produced 15,394 payable ounces in Q1 relative to 19,307 payable in 2025. Lower output is primarily due to lower grade, partially offset by higher throughput. All-in sustaining costs increased to $2,528 per ounce sold, primarily reflecting the lower volumes sold and the higher cost base, as expected, with the higher sustaining capital tied to increased development meters. Sustaining capital spend included $5 million, primarily for underground development, and $2 million of growth capital related to the new portal development at Kokarpinar along with the development costs for the new Bati Zone. Finally, to slide 12, at Olympias, we produced 14,319 payable ounces of gold in Q1, up 21% from 11,829 ounces in 2025. This improvement reflects a stable ore blend and flotation performance that drove higher metal recoveries. Revenue increased to $88 million from $46 million, primarily on the higher realized gold price, higher sales volumes for gold and base metals, and with the base metals also benefiting from higher grades and recoveries. All-in sustaining cost was $2,031 per ounce sold, reduced from $2,842, primarily reflecting improved metal recovery and stable mill performance that resulted in lower cash cost per ounce sold as a result of higher volumes sold. Sustaining capital was $5 million, while growth capital was $8 million, driven by the mill expansion project, with sequential area completion commencing at the end of Q3 and ramp-up through 2026. Across all sites, safety remains core to our operations, and we continue to reinforce a culture of safe, responsible production. I will now turn it over to Christian for closing remarks. Christian Milau: Thank you, Simon, and good morning, everyone. Overall, the first quarter reflects a solid start to what is a defining year for Eldorado Gold Corporation. We are delivering solid operational and financial performance while continuing to make meaningful progress on our key growth projects as they march towards the finish line. In addition, we initiated our dividend and bought back over $80 million worth of Eldorado Gold Corporation shares in Q1. Importantly, we have continued to strengthen our leadership team over recent months, including the well-deserved promotion of Simon to Chief Operating Officer and the appointment of Gordana Viseptievich, who will be joining us shortly as Senior Vice President of Projects. Gordana has significant experience leading projects of a large and small scale globally, as well as experience working with G Mining Services, which will be a key partner on a number of future projects. Additionally, we would like to recognize Sylvain Lehoux, who has been promoted to Senior Vice President, Operations for Canada, taking on responsibility for Eldorado Gold Corporation’s growing Canadian portfolio. The deliberate steps we have taken to enhance our bench strength—particularly in project execution and operational leadership—are already contributing to improved alignment and stronger integration across the business. Complementing these efforts in 2026, we entered into a project alliance with G Mining Services to support project development and execution, reinforcing our technical capacity and ability to deliver projects safely, efficiently, and on schedule. As I have spent time across our sites and corporate offices, I have seen strong alignment with our values, particularly in how our teams are approaching collaboration and execution. These behaviors will be critical as we move through the remainder of the year. With Skouries and McIlvenna Bay advancing towards key milestones and first production, and with the strength of the team we have in place, we are entering a period of meaningful transformation for the company that we believe will enhance our scale, diversify our portfolio, and strengthen our long-term value proposition. Looking ahead, while Eldorado Gold Corporation remains predominantly a gold producer, the addition of meaningful copper production from Canada and Europe represents an exciting extension of our portfolio. At McIlvenna Bay, we are building exposure to copper in a top-tier mining jurisdiction with dependable infrastructure and access to a skilled workforce, and we appreciate the Major Projects Office support of the Strategic Projects for Canada and Eldorado Gold Corporation. Further, the district-scale exploration potential and work being done by the team in Saskatchewan is extremely exciting, with excellent targets to be followed up, as evidenced by our increased investment in exploration. Expect us to aggressively explore the Deposit and wider land package starting this year. This potential and the already long mine life will enhance our peer-leading average mine life and exciting exploration portfolio across all jurisdictions. At Skouries, we expect to deliver a long-life copper-gold asset within Europe, where demand for responsibly produced metals continues to grow. Northern Greece is highly prospective and will continue to grow as a core part of our portfolio. These two near-production mines provide substantial exposure to copper and its key role in electrification and the energy transition, while also enhancing the resilience of our portfolio through greater commodity and geographic diversification, and extending our average years of mine life into the mid-teens with excellent potential to extend further. I am excited about Eldorado Gold Corporation’s future and the strong culture and teams across the company. As we reach the significant cash flow inflection point later in 2026, I have a high level of confidence in our team, our strategy, and our ability to surface significant value from execution of peer-leading near-term growth. Thank you to our employees, partners, and you, shareholders, for your continued support. I will now turn the call back to the operator for questions from our analysts. Thank you. Operator: We will now open the call for questions. The first question comes from Don DeMarco with National Bank. Please go ahead. Don DeMarco: Thank you, operator, and good afternoon, George and team. First question, looking at Skouries, given that labor cost pressures contributed to the CapEx increase, is there a read-through to potentially cost pressures on operating costs going forward? George Burns: Hi, Don, thanks for the question. No read-through there. What drove this capital increase as we get to the final stage of construction was completing electrical and instrumentation in the plant, so we brought in three EU contractors just recently to help ensure we can maintain the early Q3 startup of the plant. It is essentially some extra labor to complete that electrical and instrumentation. No read-through in terms of our operating cost. Our operating manpower levels are going to come in as expected, and we have only had normal inflationary pressure on labor costs. If you look at our cost guidance for the fourth quarter as we bring it into operation, we continue to maintain a very low cost profile once we are into production. Don DeMarco: Okay. And so then, looking at the next couple of quarters before first concentrate, are there any risks on the horizon—maybe lingering cost pressures, whether related to labor, contractors, etc.—that might require additional capital that might be unforeseen at this time? George Burns: No, Don, we do not see that at this point. Again, from a construction perspective, we should have the construction complete at the midyear point, and we have said Q3 as first concentrate. Really, the variable for us remaining is how efficiently we can get the energy connected to be able to put first ore through the grinding mills and through the plant. There we are collaborating with the Greek power authority. If we get our construction completed in July, our expectation is final checks with us and them on that main substation can happen together in parallel, and that would result in an early Q3 startup. If we cannot get that collaboration and they do their checks subsequent to ours, it could slip to mid-Q3. But really that is not a cost impact. We will be ramping down construction workforce rapidly as we get this construction completed around midyear. Don DeMarco: Okay, great. And then for a final question, just shifting over to MacBay. I see that you have approved an exploration budget. Can you share the split between infill and expansion, and some of the targets that you might be focusing on with that budget? Simon Hille: Thanks, Don. Simon here. I can give you some color on our plans around the exploration portion of the budget. The Foran team had around a $4 million exploration budget for the year, to which we are adding $17 million for the remainder of the year, and the team is quite excited to mainly focus on three key targets: the Tesla copper-rich feeder zone, Bigstone expansion, and then adding some more geoscience to the existing land package around some airborne geophysical surveys and expanded LIBS on the whole-body characterization. These things should set us up for good success moving forward. In our exploration budget, we typically do not have infill. Infills are part of an operational budget. Don DeMarco: Okay, that is very helpful. That is all for me. Good luck with the rest of the development. Paul Ferneyhough: Thanks, Don. Operator: The next question comes from Analyst with Scotiabank. Please go ahead. Analyst: Hey, good morning, everyone. Thank you for taking my questions. Just a couple more questions on Skouries. We were quite surprised by the increase in capital costs, and you mentioned it was related mainly to the workforce at the electric plant. But what else happened? What else changed since the previous increase in Q4? George Burns: Again, really, 60% of that cost increase is the additional contractor workforce completing the electrical and instrumentation, and then the balance is split between materials, FX, and owner support costs. Bottom line, it is taking us a couple of months of additional full workforce to get the final construction complete. If you go back to our last guidance on Skouries capital, at that point the view was we would be waiting to get the power connected in the power lines and doing final things in the tailings filtration plant. Bottom line, this increase is us spending some additional dollars bringing in some additional EU contractors to ensure we are ready to run once that power is connected, hopefully early Q3. Analyst: Great, thank you. And then, you said 60% was the contract work with the balance being materials, FX, etc. Could you give a little bit more of a breakdown between what the materials were and the split of that remaining 40%? George Burns: Yes. There were about $15 million in materials across four key items. In the dry stack filter plant, our insurers have requested—and we have agreed—to put in additional fire protection; that is about $5 million. We have added about $4 million in additional spares to ensure a smooth ramp-up and balance of the year. We have added about $3 million in additional gensets that are helping us with pre-commissioning as we wait for power connection. There was about $1.5 million in freight. Then there was about $15 million in foreign exchange impacts, and the balance is really the indirect costs to support that couple of months of high labor intensity to finish the construction. Analyst: Thank you. Last question for me: What are the remaining risks in your opinion—whether that be capital or operating—to startup, and what contingencies do you have in place to make sure we hit this Q3 timeframe? George Burns: The key risk for the year remaining on Skouries is to get that power connected, and the timing of that will really determine whether we are closer to the bottom end of our production guidance or the top end. If we can get that power connected in July as we expect, we would expect to be higher in production guidance. In terms of cost risk, that is not a worry for me now. We have got a couple of months of maintaining these high workforce levels to complete the construction. The only remaining risk beyond that is just the normal commissioning risk. Once power is connected, we start moving ore through the circuit, and as always in every construction you have adjustments that need to be made. At this point, I think we have a 20-year mine life plus here, fantastic infrastructure that has been constructed, and I am pretty confident about the ramp-up. Analyst: Thank you for the color and best of luck with these two projects. Lynette Gould: Thank you. Operator: The next question comes from Analyst with RBC Capital Markets. Please go ahead. Analyst: Yes, thank you very much. Just going back to this labor conversation on Skouries. I understand the need for the additional contractors to meet the timelines, but was there some difference in thinking versus the prior plan in terms of labor productivity being challenged, or what really is prompting this change? George Burns: It is really taking more hours of electrical and instrumentation to get this finished. We have not hit the numbers we expected and, again, brought in three European contractors to button this up and get it running. Analyst: Got it. Thank you. And I understand it has only been a short amount of time since the Foran acquisition closed. I noted the second quarter will have a more comprehensive update. Is there anything you could provide in terms of what is required ahead of first production, or what milestones we should be looking at there? Simon Hille: It is Simon here. We are pretty excited. We were on the ground a couple of weeks ago and are in close contact with the team. The team is right in the thrust of what we call hot commissioning right now, which is where we start to add ore into various parts of the process to test the components and simulate what we will see as we run into full production, and we link those things together on a sequential basis. We are pretty excited that things are moving to plan, and we expect to see this running this month. Analyst: Great. Thank you very much. Operator: That is all the questions we have for today. This concludes the question-and-answer session and today’s conference call. You may disconnect your lines. Thank you for participating and have a pleasant day.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to NatWest Group's Q1 2026 Results Management Presentation. Today's presentation will be hosted by CEO, Paul Thwaite; and CFO, Katie Murray. After the presentation, we will take questions. Paul Thwaite: Good morning, and thank you for joining us today. As usual, I'm here with Katie. I'll start with a brief introduction before Katie takes you through the numbers, and we'll then open it up for questions. We started the year with strong momentum across our 3 businesses and made good progress against each of our 3 strategic priorities. First, we continue to pursue disciplined growth. In Retail Banking, we increased our share of the mortgage market as we expand our offering and announced new partnerships such as becoming the exclusive mortgage provider for Rightmove. In Private Banking & Wealth Management, our acquisition of Evelyn Partners makes a strong addition to the group. The transaction is progressing well, and we expect it to complete in the second quarter, subject to the usual regulatory approval. In Commercial & Institutional, we are the leading bank for U.K. start-ups, and we grew our share this quarter as we onboarded 24,000 new start-ups, a 25% uplift on the same period last year, supported by easier agentic onboarding. Second, we are leveraging our investments in simplification and have delivered over GBP 100 million of additional cost savings in the first quarter. We employ over 12,000 software engineers, and we are complementing that talent with artificial intelligence. So over 40% of our code is now written by AI, and we are scaling agentic software development. Typically, our development process for new customer propositions requires 12 engineers and takes 6 weeks. But in some scenarios, with a team of 3 engineers and 7 agents, we can deliver in just 6 hours, making us more productive and delivering faster for our customers. Third, we continue to manage our balance sheet actively, helping to free up capacity for further growth and allocate capital dynamically in this fast-changing environment. So let's turn now to the financial headlines. Customer lending grew 6.6% year-on-year to GBP 400 billion, whilst customer deposits grew 2.6% to GBP 445 billion. Lending growth of GBP 7.3 billion in the first quarter was well balanced across our businesses, including GBP 3.3 billion in mortgages and GBP 3.8 billion in Commercial & Institutional. We also provided over GBP 10 billion of climate and transition finance, taking the total to GBP 29 billion since last July, making good progress towards our GBP 200 billion 2030 target. Deposits increased by GBP 3.1 billion in the first quarter with growth in Corporate & Institutional, partly offset by an expected decrease in Retail and Private Banking as customers use their savings to make annual tax payments. Assets under management and administration grew 16.9% year-on-year to GBP 57 billion. 23,000 people invested with us for the first time during the quarter, with net inflows to assets under management of GBP 900 million. Taken together, client assets and liabilities have increased to just over GBP 900 billion, up 5.2% year-on-year, in line with our 2028 annual growth rate target of more than 4%. Income grew 6.9% to GBP 4.2 billion, and costs were up 4.8% to GBP 2 billion as we increased our operating leverage and reduced our cost/income ratio by 2.1 percentage points to 46.5%. Our return on tangible equity was 18.2%, driving strong capital generation of 65 basis points in the first quarter. Earnings per share grew 15.5% year-on-year to 17.9p. Tangible net asset value per share was up 15.1% to GBP 4, and we continue to maintain a strong balance sheet with a CET1 ratio of 14.3%. Since we announced our full year results in February, conflict in the Middle East has clearly increased geopolitical uncertainty. While sentiment is now more considered, we have yet to see any material impact on our customers. Both households and corporates remain resilient with historically high levels of savings and low levels of debt and arrears. In light of this uncertainty, we have revised our economic scenarios and now expect higher inflation with interest rates remaining at 3.75% for the rest of the year, resulting in slower economic growth and a modest increase in unemployment. This means we have taken an additional provision in the first quarter of GBP 140 million, which reflects our macroeconomic assumptions, not our credit performance, which remains strong. With rates staying higher for longer, we now expect full year income to be at the top end of the GBP 17.2 billion to GBP 17.6 billion range we set out in February. So we remain confident about the outlook and our 2026 guidance. That confidence is underpinned by the knowledge that we have built a resilient business, which is well positioned for a broad range of macro environments. We have a clear strategic focus on growth that delivers good returns with a prime lending portfolio that's well diversified and largely secured. We have invested and simplified so that we are now the most efficient large U.K. bank with a cost-to-income ratio that continues to improve, and we are actively managing our balance sheet. For example, we have taken the opportunity of a sharp move upwards in the yield curve to accelerate the increase in our structural hedge, supporting income growth in the years ahead. We have also increased our capital efficiency significantly in recent years, driving high levels of capital generation. All these factors have contributed to our strong performance in the Bank of England stress tests, giving us confidence in our outlook and guidance not just this year, but over the medium term. With that, I'll hand over to Katie to take you through the numbers in more detail. Katie Murray: Thank you, Paul. My comments for the first quarter use the fourth quarter as a comparator. Income, excluding notable items, reduced 1.1% to GBP 4.2 billion, and total operating costs were 9.2% lower at GBP 2 billion, delivering 11.6% growth in operating profit before impairment to GBP 2.3 billion. The impairment charge was GBP 283 million, equivalent to 26 basis points of loans, including the charge for our updated economic scenarios that Paul mentioned. This resulted in operating profit of GBP 2 billion, with profit attributable to ordinary shareholders of GBP 1.4 billion, and return on tangible equity was 18.2%. Turning now to income. Income, excluding notable items, was GBP 4.2 billion. Excluding the impact of 2 fewer days in the quarter, income across the 3 businesses continued to grow, supported by both volumes and margin. Net interest margin was 247 basis points, up 2 basis points due to deposit margin expansion and a small benefit from funding and other, with lending margin declining by 2 basis points, mainly driven by mortgages. As you heard from Paul, our 2026 guidance now assumes that the Bank of England base rate remains at 3.75% this year rather than coming down to 3.25%. Together with our revised economic scenarios, this means we now expect income, excluding notable items, to be at the top end of our GBP 17.2 billion to GBP 17.6 billion range, excluding the impact of Evelyn Partners. Turning now to customer assets and liabilities, or CAL. You will recall we introduced our 2028 growth target for CAL in February. I am pleased we are entering another year with strong growth, continuing our track record. Our CAL increased by GBP 8.4 billion or 0.9% in the quarter to GBP 900 billion. This includes lending growth of GBP 7.3 billion, deposit growth of GBP 3.1 billion and a reduction in assets under management and administration of GBP 1.8 billion as strong AUM inflows were offset by market movements. I'll touch on each of these elements in turn. We are reporting another quarter of strong broad-based loan growth across the group with gross loans to customers up by GBP 7.3 billion. Retail Banking and Private Banking & Wealth Management balances grew GBP 3.5 billion or 1.5%. This comprises GBP 3.3 billion in mortgage lending and GBP 200 million in unsecured lending. Mortgage stock share increased marginally to 12.6%, and we have a robust pipeline following record applications in March. Commercial & Institutional lending increased by GBP 3.8 billion or 2.4%. This includes growth in corporate and institutions, driven by good demand across a broad range of sectors, including project finance, renewables and utilities and funds lending, together with increased lending in commercial mid-market, notably in commercial real estate and the housing sector. You will also see we have provided a detailed breakdown of our financial institution exposures, including private credit in the appendix of our presentation. Turning now to deposits. Customer deposits increased by GBP 3.1 billion despite the expected higher seasonal tax outflows. Commercial & Institutional deposits increased by GBP 5.1 billion. This was partly offset by a slight decline in Retail Banking and Private Banking & Wealth Management deposits as a result of higher customer tax payments of GBP 10.3 billion. Retail Banking outflows were partly offset by growth in current account and ISA balances. Overall, our deposit mix remained broadly stable. Turning now to assets under management. Assets under management and administration closed the quarter at GBP 56.7 billion. We are pleased with positive AUM net inflows of GBP 0.9 billion, which equates to 8.2% of opening AUM, demonstrating continued client confidence and strong momentum. There was a reduction in assets under administration of GBP 1.4 billion, driven by gilt redemptions to support client tax payments. Overall, balances were impacted by negative market movements of GBP 1.7 billion. However, these were reversed during April. Turning now to costs. Other operating expenses were GBP 2 billion, an increase of 4.8% year-on-year and a decrease of 8.3% compared with the fourth quarter. Our cost/income ratio in the quarter was 46.5%. We are pleased with the progress we've made on our transformation, and we made decisions to accelerate investment spend and incur higher restructuring costs in the first quarter, which drove the overall cost growth year-on-year. The reduction from the fourth quarter is mainly due to ongoing cost savings as well as lower bank levies. We remain confident in the delivery of our full year 2026 cost guidance of around GBP 8.2 billion, though our cost profile will be uneven throughout the year. Turning now to our updated macroeconomic assumptions. Following a period of global macro uncertainty, we have revised our economic assumptions. In our revised base case, we assumed inflation now means CPI will peak at 3.5% in 2026 rather than fall to 2% by the end of the year. This means interest rates stay higher for longer, and we assume the bank rate remains at 3.75% throughout the year. We expect lower GDP growth of 0.4% and a modest increase in unemployment to a peak of 5.7%, above our previous assumptions of 5.4%. This remains at levels we are comfortable with in terms of lending risk appetite and credit quality. We will continue to review our assumptions as the situation progresses. Our balance sheet remains well provisioned with an expected credit loss of GBP 3.7 billion and ECL coverage ratio of 84 basis points. Our latest scenarios also show that even if we were to give 100% weight to our new moderate downside scenario, this would increase Stage 1 and 2 ECL by GBP 99 million or 2 basis points. Turning now to the impairment charge. The impairment charge for the quarter was GBP 283 million, equivalent to 26 basis points of loans. This includes a charge of GBP 140 million as a result of changes in economic scenarios and total post-model adjustment releases of GBP 34 million as elements were effectively consumed by changes in our economic scenarios. Excluding these, our underlying impairment charge was 16 basis points. There were no new signs of stress across our 3 businesses, and the current credit performance of our book remains strong. We continue to expect a loan impairment rate below 25 basis points for 2026. So our guidance is unchanged. Turning now to capital. We ended the quarter with a common equity Tier 1 ratio of 14.3%, up 30 basis points since the end of the year. Capital generation before distributions was strong at 65 basis points. This includes 69 basis points from earnings. Other regulatory capital movements added 16 basis points. Growth in risk-weighted assets consumed 21 basis points of capital, and our usual accrual for ordinary dividend payments reduced capital by a further 37 basis points. Risk-weighted assets increased by GBP 2.7 billion. GBP 4.3 billion of business movements broadly reflects our lending growth and increased market risk. This was partly offset by a reduction of GBP 2.2 billion as a result of actively managing our RWAs to create capacity for further growth. Other movements included FX and immaterial CRD IV model updates. We remain confident in our ability to continue generating strong capital from earnings and to manage risk-weighted assets and expect around 200 basis points of capital generation before distributions this year, whilst operating at a CET1 ratio of around 13%. Turning now to guidance. We now expect income, excluding notable items, to be at the top end of our range of GBP 17.2 billion to GBP 17.6 billion, excluding the impact of the Evelyn Partners acquisition. All our other guidance and targets remain unchanged. And with that, I'll hand back to the operator for Q&A. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We'll take our first question from Andrew Coombs of Citi. Andrew Coombs: If I could just have one on loan and deposit growth and then I guess the second on average interest-earning assets. On the loan and deposit growth, again, it's a strong performance Q-on-Q, again, led by C&I. If I speak to any investor, particularly those outside the U.K., they always struggle to link the economic performance in the U.K. with the strong loan growth and loan demand that you're seeing. So perhaps you can just touch upon what drove the loan and deposit growth, particularly in C&I, where is that demand coming from? How sustainable do you think it is throughout the remainder of the year and into next year? And then the second question, I mentioned that loans are up Q-on-Q, deposits up Q-on-Q, but your average interest-earning assets are down 0.2% Q-on-Q. And it seems to be due to a reduction in the liquid asset buffer. So perhaps you could just touch upon that as well and what's driving the disconnect between the average interest-earning assets and the movement in the loan balances. Paul Thwaite: Thanks, Andy. Okay. Katie, why don't I take lending and deposits and then you come back on AIEA. Katie Murray: Okay. Paul Thwaite: Good stuff. So Andy, as you say, good, strong growth on both sides of the balance sheet, pleased on lending and deposits, especially as you know the context of quarter 1 deposits is always higher outflows because of tax payments. Why don't I give an overview, and then I'll drop down into C&I because I'm conscious you wanted some specific color there. So lending overall, I'd say it's pretty broad-based. You can see growth in mortgages. You can see growth in C&I. You can see growth in unsecured within Retail as well. And within C&I, you can see it through different business lines. I'd also add that the pipeline remains pretty strong as well in both businesses. So we're encouraged by that. So not only is the activity good, the pipeline -- I was going through it yesterday and -- Wednesday actually, the pipeline of activity looks strong looking ahead into quarter 2 and quarter 3. And as you know, we've consistently grown above market, growth on the lending side. I'll come back to some of the reasons why I think that's true. On deposits, 2 sides to this. As I said, we've got the tax outflows in Retail and Private Banking. They were up 28% year-on-year. So it's a big number, GBP 10 billion of deposits. And that was offset by growth in C&I, which was from a combination of things. Some of that was operational deposits, some of that was interest-bearing deposits. I think there, when you think about the size of our corporate and commercial franchise, the reality is we benefit as deposits flow onto corporate balance sheets. If you look into Retail, actually, personal current accounts were up, which is good. That's obviously healthy from a number of factors. And we are starting to see the impact of our -- what we call our Boxed proposition where we're providing savings products to companies like AA, Saga at Sainsbury's, et cetera. So that's also supporting Retail deposits. So that hopefully gives you a kind of big picture view. On C&I specifically, demand has been strong. I think we're very well positioned on what I'd call some of the structural drivers. So project finance, infrastructure, transition finance, utilities, funds lending, energy transition, et cetera. And I think what you can see is the growth in those parts of the market is bigger than, let's call it, the U.K. systems growth. So I think that helps to explain why our C&I franchise captures the opportunities there, but also outperforms the market. As I said, the pipelines are strong. So to your point on sustainability, I think those trends are -- they're structural trends, not kind of short-term opportunistic trends. So I think the lending growth and the lending pipelines will continue to support sustainable growth. So net-net, good balance sheet performance. C&I, yes, but also on the Retail side of the business as well. So hopefully, that gives you a bit of color. Katie? Katie Murray: Sure. Thanks very much, Andy. So you're absolutely right. When you look at AIEAs, they were sort of stable in the quarter. They were down kind of 0.2%. A couple of things within there. So reduction reflects the optimization of our surplus liquidity. We repaid around GBP 4 billion of TFSME at the end of Q4, and we deployed surplus liquidity to meet our customer loan demand, which we've just been talking about, in a quarter of seasonally lower deposit growth. If you look at the kind of the Q1 loan growth of GBP 7.3 billion versus the GBP 3.1 billion of deposit growth, there's a natural kind of mismatch within there. What I would say is we're 3% higher than AIEAs a year ago, and we do expect them to grow from here going forward as our customer lending increases. Operator: Our next question comes from Alvaro Serrano of Morgan Stanley. Alvaro de Tejada: Hopefully, you can hear me okay. Paul Thwaite: We can hear you clearly. Alvaro de Tejada: I actually had 2 questions related to spreads. And the first one is on mortgages. At least I had the expectation of a step down in spread on mortgages in Q1, given the roll-off of the COVID ones. But actually, the spread has held up reasonably well versus my expectations, at least. I think they contributed [ 324 ]. Can you -- maybe this one is for Katie, but can you maybe talk to if there's still sort of headwinds ahead and talk to the mortgage front book spreads? And then similarly on commercial, the spreads there, compared to base rates, have been increasing steadily the last 8 quarters or so as you grow the book. What kind of business are you underwriting there? And what do you think it can -- should it continue to improve? Or how do you see the outlook on pricing on corporates as well, commercial? Paul Thwaite: Okay. Great, Alvaro. Katie, do you want to start with mortgage? Katie Murray: Yes, absolutely. Thanks very much. Alvaro, so if we look at Q1, we continue to write mortgages at front book spreads that were below the back book as we did through last year, which we talked about a lot, very much in line with our strategy of delivering steady growth at attractive returns. So I'd say our year-to-date margins are in line with expectations. We did see a bit of volatility in March. We repriced every 2 days, so that's 11 kind of changes in 22 days, which I think is a great testament to the flexibility we've built into the system. And we can even see that ability to handle that increased mortgage demand as a result of that investment in the platform and digitization, which has meant we've been able to execute new business at margins which are ahead of the back book in April, which is great to see. You're absolutely right to mention the COVID mortgages. We are seeing a little bit of the book margins being impacted by that churn of the 5-year COVID era mortgages, and they're rolling off at spreads that are higher than we're currently writing. I would expect that to have worked its way through during the rest of this year. So we expect a little bit of pressure from this on the book margin over the coming quarters. But I guess as I go to where we are today, where we're writing the mortgages at front book spreads, which are below the back book, what we're seeing is it's starting to bring that back book margin down. We're kind of writing now, you've heard me talk a lot about this kind of below 70 basis points over the last number of quarters. That's kind of continued. And as I look at that number, I think that we will see the book margin to reprice to around 60 basis points over the course of this year. Interestingly, April margins have been above the back book, and we're pleased we were able to capture that. So I talked to you, remember at the year-end, Alvaro, around 1 to 2 basis points impact on our NIM walk per quarter throughout this year. You absolutely saw that already in our walk. This quarter, you should expect to see that. What I'd also really encourage you is don't forget to see that you have the deposit margin expansion that's going to more than offset that negative. Hopefully, Alvaro, that gives you what you need. Paul, are you going to do the commercial spread or shall I... Paul Thwaite: Yes, happy to. Katie Murray: Okay. Perfect. Paul Thwaite: Thanks, Katie, and thanks, Alvaro. On commercial spreads, a couple of general points first. I would say, Alvaro, actually, commercial lending margins, I would see them as fairly stable on a product-by-product basis. So that's how I'd think about it. There's obviously always a mix effect depending on where you write the business. But there's been no material deltas, changes over the recent past nor would we expect it going forward. So that's, I guess, one positioning piece. Secondly, in our commercial book, a significant proportion of customers are paying variable rates. So you will see that -- you will see kind of rates reprice in line with short-term rates and how that changes. So hopefully, those 2 points just contextualize what you'll be looking at in terms of the commercial lending book. If you drop down into the individual businesses or asset classes within the commercial and institutional bank, there's different dynamics. Obviously, at the very small end, margins are much higher, but the total value of lending there is small relative to the overall commercial book. So whilst we're growing that business, and it's higher-margin business, from a weighted average perspective, the impacts are relatively limited. In the commercial mid-market, that's a competitive space across the field. But depending upon the asset class, the margins can vary quite a lot. So if it's social housing, lower margins, but very high risk-adjusted returns; commercial real estate, thinner margins, more of a commoditized product. And then at the large corporate side, obviously, you've got the kind of revolver aspect to that, but also where you've got kind of project financing and infrastructure finance, a bit of the same dynamics as my example on social housing. At a spread level, margins are relatively tight. But given the capital treatment, the risk-adjusted returns are very attractive. So they're all very good areas to deploy capital at good returns. So nothing major to call out, I'd say, on commercial spreads, but that hopefully gives you a bit of the contours of how that business works. Thanks, Alvaro. Operator: Our next question today comes from Benjamin Toms of RBC. Benjamin Toms: The first one is on your income guidance, which you've upgraded to the top end of your previously provided range. Just wanted to kind of get some color, your thoughts on whether you'd characterize this guidance as being conservative. I'm just noting that consensus is kind of still quite a way above that guidance and whether you're comfortable with that gap? And then secondly, there's been some pretty fairly intense competition in the ISA -- cash ISA deposit market, and NatWest Group competing but one of your large peers is not. Can you just talk a little bit about how you weigh up collecting deposit volumes versus margins at a group level at the moment? Paul Thwaite: Great. Thanks, Ben. I'll take the guidance and income, Katie, and then you can talk a little bit around Retail savings and ISAs. Okay. So yes, as you said, Ben, we've strengthened the income guidance. We're guiding to the top end of the range, of the GBP 17.2 billion to GBP 17.6 billion. We're doing that for a couple of reasons. One, you can see the momentum in quarter 1. So the underlying performance has been good, which is great. And then you've got the kind of net effect of the change in economics. Obviously, we've changed our rate assumptions. You've seen that from 2 cuts. Assumed 2 cuts now to 0. But we've also assumed -- you have to follow the logic through. You would assume if you have -- if you don't have rate reductions, it would be reasonable to expect some small softening in demand. So we've assumed that. But net-net, we see that as positive to income. So that's kind of how we're positioning at the top end. We haven't changed the guidance for RoTE. We're maintaining the greater than 17% there, but we're increasingly confident on that. As I said in February, and I'll say again, it's always a greater -- that's always been a greater than guidance, and we always aim to beat our target. So we haven't changed that, but we're increasingly confident because obviously, the conditions for that are supportive. I should point out, I think, it's obvious, but that all excludes Evelyn. But net-net, Ben, I would say it's a good start. We're confident around '26, hence, the nudge up in guidance. We haven't changed '28. But obviously, you can see from the trends that it's -- the conditions are supportive towards the medium term as well. Katie Murray: Thanks very much. Ben, so I guess if I look at our ISAs and the kind of recent activity, I think the first thing I would really say is we see really strong relationship value in our fixed term deposits. We have high retention rates, greater than 80%, and some of those are retained in the higher-margin instant-access products as well as us also having an opportunity in the future to engage with these customers on investment products, and we've seen good growth there as well this quarter with a lot of new investors coming in, but we also expect that ambition to kind of grow and that's supported by the acquisition of Evelyn Partners, obviously, in this last quarter. During Q1, with the volatility that we saw in the swap markets, we actively managed our hedging across both our assets and liabilities, which enabled us to really price effectively on the fixed rate deposits. Overall, you can see our deposit mix has been stable, both at the group level and in Retail. When I look at fixed rate ISA specifically, the balances are small in the context of the group, low single-digit percentages of deposits. And in terms of overall deposit dynamics and margins, really very happy with the progress, particularly around things like current account growth, and we expect to see ongoing group deposit margin expansion in the coming quarters. So overall, a real comment on balance across the portfolio. Thanks. Paul Thwaite: I'd add one small thing on that, actually, Ben, because I've got the pricing tables in front of me. It's quite interesting when you look through. And as Katie said, we've been very thoughtful about how we manage the volatility in swap rates and how we play that back into pricing to maintain margins. And you can see you've got 3 or 4 of the larger banks ahead of us on pricing. But as Katie alluded to, the volumes have been encouraging. So I think we've been very thoughtful in how we're playing in that market. Operator: Our next question comes from Guy Stebbings of BNP Paribas. Guy Stebbings: I think, I just have one sort of broad question on the income guidance for this year and the assumptions sort of underpinning it. It's clear in terms of what you're doing on policy rate. But in terms of the long end of the curve, when you're thinking about the hedge reinvestment, could you confirm what the assumption is there? Then in terms of volumes, I'm just trying to work out whether you're assuming slightly more sort of conservative macroeconomic assumptions as per the ECL models, but that would be going against sort of the positive comments you're saying in terms of what you're actually seeing on lending volumes, et cetera. So can you clarify what sort of expectations are on volumes? And then on mortgage spreads, just in light of the comment you made there, I'm just trying to understand whether anything has changed. So you've talked about the stock of the back book trending down towards 60. I presume that's kind of entirely consistent with what you were expecting a few months back. And actually, your comment on April being above the back book is slightly encouraging. So could you just confirm if those mortgage spread trends are sort of in line, better or worse than what you were thinking a month or 2 ago? Paul Thwaite: Great. Thanks, Guy. Very clear. Katie, you got any preference on order? We've got hedge, volume... Katie Murray: I'll start off with spreads and hedge, and then why don't you jump back in on volume, yes? Paul Thwaite: Yes. Katie Murray: Perfect. Thanks so much. If I look at the hedge, first of all, a few things just to kind of share with you on that. So first of all, when we talked about the hedge at the year-end, we said that we would increase our structural hedge this year above GBP 200 billion as -- and then you've seen it, as deposit balances have grown and equity base will increase given the business growth. What we did earlier in Q1 was as we saw those yield curves move really sharply higher in the quarter, we did take a decision to accelerate the increase of our product hedge. So we added about GBP 5 billion additional in Q1. So that means that we've locked in income for the outer years and, of course, modestly reduced our rate sensitivity as a result of that. When I look at the kind of first 3 months of the year overall, we're reinvesting our product hedge at about 3.8%. That's against guidance I've given you at the year-end of 3.5%. I would now expect that reinvestment rate on average for the whole year and given what we've seen also in April to be around 3.9% on the product hedge and 4.7% on the equity hedge, which is up from 4.5% as we go through there. So as I look at those kind of current assumptions of rates, the growth that we've seen, I do continue to expect total hedge income will grow annually through to 2030 as you see the improved levels that we spoke about in February. If I then look to your mortgage spreads, you've got it completely right. Mortgage margin is very much in line with our expectations. They are currently a little bit better. I would encourage you not to bank that forever, but we're very happy with how the team are managing the book at the moment. We can see the reduction in book margins absolutely being driven by refinancing. If you think a little bit of our mix, 30% of the book will reprice this year and the roll-off is a little over 90 basis points on a blended basis. So that really drives the stock margin lower over the course of the year, completely in line with our expectations and very much in line with the income guidance that we've given you throughout this year and upgrading this morning. Paul Thwaite: On volumes, Guy, so this -- as you say, this kind of tried to thread the needle a little bit between, I guess, the logic of the kind of mechanistic logic of the economic assumptions versus activity year-to-date and pipelines. And I think that's what we're trying to balance. If you take the logic of the economic assumptions through, i.e., higher for longer, slight tick up in unemployment and slower growth, then the logic of that would be, you would see some softening in, for example, the mortgage market vis-a-vis our original predictions and likewise, some softening in business lending. So that's what the economic assumptions drive. Then when you look at the activity, as you rightly point out, what we've said is quarter 1 has been very strong on the kind of lending side. The pipelines in the respective businesses look strong. So the activity is there. I guess what we're trying to do is strike the right balance between optimism on that side, but also, I guess, the reality of how the economics play out over the course of the next 9 months might impact demand. And we factored that into how we've guided toward the changed guidance to the top end of the range. So hopefully, that just unpacks a little bit how we're thinking about it. Operator: Our next question comes from Jonathan Pierce of Jefferies. Jonathan Richard Pierce: Good. I've got 2 questions, please. The first, the other C&I noninterest income, it's been running at about GBP 230 million to GBP 240 million a quarter for the last 6 quarters, dropped down to GBP 170 million in the first quarter. It does feel like there was a bit of a one-off in there. I don't know if you can quantify how big that was and whether you've seen anything else coming through since the end of March? Secondly, more broadly on this impairment sensitivity, just trying to get a feel as to how much confidence you have of -- I've asked you this before, Katie, actually, in the IFRS 9 ECL models. I mean you're telling us today that the weighted average assumption for GDP growth is about 0.3%, 0.4% a year next couple of years. The downside is minus 0.4% this year and minus 1.6% next year. It's also got unemployment going up to 6.2% next year, I think. But you're telling us your ECL in that scenario would only increase by about GBP 99 million. Now I get that that's a general provision measure. But by definition, the ECL on those Stage 1 and 2 is reflective of losses you expect in the future on the performing book. So are you genuinely confident? And if so, why more qualitatively in this idea that even if we saw a recession, even if we saw unemployment moving into the 6s, your impairment charge ex any initial ECL build would not move up very significantly at all? Paul Thwaite: Good. Thanks, Jonathan. I'll take the first one. Katie, you can take the second one. Katie Murray: Sure. Paul Thwaite: So Jonathan, your characterization is right. So actually pretty stable income line in the last 6 quarters, dropped off -- the C&I noninterest income dropped off in quarter 1 '26. If you look at that compared to '25, it's, I think, GBP 20 million versus GBP 64 million. Not exclusively, but almost exclusively, it's explained by sterling rates, as you say, so kind of one-off. You've seen that across lots of desks and lots of banks. So we have a relatively small rates business. It's obviously -- it's indexed to sterling, given what we are as NatWest. So that really explains the delta that you're seeing there. And you'll see yes, GBP 64 million in quarter 1 '25 and GBP 20 million in quarter 1 '26. That's a big part of the difference versus the previous quarters. A couple of things I'd say, it's obviously very small in the context of the overall revenue line. And also given the more subdued volatility, we'd expect improvements as we go through quarter 2 onwards, not just in that line, but overall on C&I noninterest income. So I think you're seeing it and reading it pretty accurately there. Okay, Katie? Katie Murray: Sure. On impairments, thanks, Jonathan. But as I look at it, I mean, these are models that we test extensively. They go through both our own verification and independent verification, and they're also kind of reviewed very closely by kind of external parties. So I am comfortable in them. And I think that the thing that I do like with IFRS 9 is this concept, which is in and around the kind of PMA. So that kind of enables me where there are moments of discomfort. And you can see that we sometimes have them when you can see in different classifications, it's wider than just the kind of the sort of economic uncertainty. So when you see other numbers in there, you can go actually, that's a bit of the model they're kind of working on. So completely comfortable on the models is what I would say first. And you're right, if I look to the ECL on kind of Stage 1 and 2, if I went 100% kind of to the downside, it suggests an extra GBP 99 million. But I would remind you that Stage 1 and Stage 2, so there would be some Stage 3 losses. They are impossible for us to quantify as to what they would be. So we don't seek to attempt that. So I would probably suggest to you that the actual charge could be a bit higher if that was the case. Obviously, that's not our base case just now. In terms of what we're looking at. We -- at this stage, we are happy with the base case. We're happy with the guidance that we've done. We've obviously added a bit on the mezz, 110 net, a little bit out of PMA. That's just kind of mechanics of the calculation, which has taken us to the 26 basis point charge this quarter. But if I take out that mezz, we've overlaid, it's kind of 16 basis points. So what we can see is a good, well-diversified, well-performing book to date. We've given you a good estimate if we were to move. But at the moment, obviously, we're comfortable and happy to have that little bit of extra buffer as we enter a little bit of greater uncertainty than we've seen recently. So comfortable at this stage, Jonathan. Thank you. Operator: Our next question comes from Benjamin Caven-Roberts of Goldman Sachs. Benjamin Caven-Roberts: Just 2 for me, please. First, a follow-up on the cost of risk. I see you mentioned about 60% of mortgage balances now with customer rates above 4%. How are you thinking about the refinancing profile for that remaining portion and the extent to which those customers are moving on to rates a fair bit higher than what they had expected when entering those mortgages? I know you do stress rate assumptions as well when issuing the mortgage originally, but clearly, a lot of volatility in swaps and rate expectations right now. So just keen to hear your thoughts on that. And then secondly, thanks a lot for the extra disclosure on the financial institutions. If we look at that business and private credit altogether, how are you thinking about the growth of that book? Is it something you expect to grow more quickly or more slowly relative to the recent past? And have you changed your strategy at all in terms of the underwriting there? Paul Thwaite: Great. Thank you, Ben. Katie, you go for first question. Katie Murray: Yes. In terms of cost of risk, Ben, so you're absolutely right. There's -- and you've obviously -- you've got far in the pack this morning. So Slide 32 kind of lays it out really nicely. So I guess a couple of things I would talk about as we look at our prime mortgage book. So obviously, the level of security gives us a lot of comfort. Our sort of greater than 3-month arrears are below the sector average and quite significantly so. So it's well underwritten. And I guess the guide on the financing of the remaining 40% that aren't on customer rates over 4%, we do kind of use what's happened in the last couple of years to kind of help guide us on that. So what you've seen in that time, obviously, there has been wage growth across the different areas. People who are coming up are very aware that they're coming up. They are -- what we see has been really interesting over the last couple of months is our kind of a greater increase on the use of the 2-year versus the 1 year. If you look at our -- sorry, versus the 5-year, forgive me, if we look at our kind of 5-year fixed as a percentage of our fixed book, it's about 66% 5-year. But actually, if I look just at what's even been happening in the last little while, that's kind of flipped almost completely to that we're writing about 77% 2-year at the moment. So customers, they understand what they're doing. They are understanding what they need to do in terms of managing their exposure. We do see them looking to lock in refinancing early so that they can get the benefit of the rate, and they've certainly been preparing for this. And as we talk to them as they go through those transitions. Obviously, it's a big change when you go from your COVID rate to the new rate, but it's something people have definitely been looking for, and we've seen them managing it really, really quite well, I would say. And Paul, on the... Paul Thwaite: Yes, yes. So Ben, so yes, so I'm glad you liked and have seen the new disclosure. We hope that's helpful to everybody. In terms of the kind of outlook for the -- obviously, it's a very broad business when you look at the breakdown there. But in terms of the areas that you referenced, we have been growing the business, I guess, over a number of years, but it's been in a very disciplined way. If you look at limits there, they haven't really moved since this time last year, so quarter 2 '25. Likewise, we haven't materially changed our risk appetite. We're always very focused on being senior lender, good protection from first loss, making sure that the risk-adjusted returns are supported. So our strategy really has been not around growing limits, but prioritizing risk-adjusted returns versus volume-driven growth. As you know, we haven't been involved in any of the recent public names. Looking forward, what I would expect actually is to see some of the spreads to widen, so i.e., the same business, the same risk, but actually better risk-adjusted returns. That would be my assumption because as you know, a lot of that business is relatively short term in nature, so you get to reprice. So that's how we're seeing. Hopefully, that gives you a sense of it in terms of limits, but also, I guess, business strategy, which is returns led rather than volume-led. Operator: Our next question comes from Chris Cant of Autonomous. Christopher Cant: Two, please. On corporate banking, commercial banking, in the context of what we've got going on in the Middle East, are there any areas of your book that you'd be more nervous on, please? And I'm not thinking specifically just about oil price as an input here. I guess there is the potential for product shortages or oil-related product shortages regardless of price if this persists. So are there any sectors that you're nervous on when you're speaking to your corporate customers, what are they worried about? And on the comment around refi of the mortgage book, my understanding there is that customers essentially have sort of a bit of a free option to lock in, but then change products if rates shift after they've preemptively locked in. Are there any risks to you and to kind of NII later in the year given swap volatility. Just conscious, I guess, the value of that option being given to customers is arguably higher right now. So any comments on how you manage that, how we should think about that would be appreciated. Paul Thwaite: Thanks, Chris. I'll take the first. Katie, you take the second. On the -- I guess, the kind of core mid-market commercial bank, Chris, obviously, we're staying very close to all the various sectors and also the different regions there. It's very consciously a very diversified book. We gave you quite a lot of breakdowns on the relative sectors and segments. In terms of -- to your specifics around sectors or subsectors that might see greater impacts. Probably similar to some of the previous kind of challenges, I would say, sectors like agriculture, aspects of hospitality and leisure. So where you see some of the -- not just what you call pure energy input prices, but you have fuel, fertilizer, food, et cetera, where you see exposure there would be areas that we are -- we will pay more attention to. And as we've done in the past, we work closely with those sectors if support packages are needed. We're not at that stage yet, and we're seeing no deterioration. I think generally, what I'd say, if you think back through what we're seeing in the Middle East, what we saw through the tariff period, a similar time last year through Ukraine and even through the pandemic, customers are -- I'd say business customers are a lot more adaptable and resilient than maybe they were prior to the pandemic. Their ability to change their cost base and/or pass on costs, the kind of the way in which they've engineered their business models over time have given them more flexibility. So what we see is a faster response, but also greater adaptability, which ironically, I think is down to the fact that a lot of these businesses and sectors have had to face a lot over the course of the last 4 or 5 years. So that's how we see it. But there are probably 2 sectors that are kind of on our minds. Katie? Katie Murray: Sure. Thanks very much. And then your great question, Chris, we've kind of watched this happen historically, we've seen other peaks. But look, it's something that we manage incredibly tightly on this. We've got very sophisticated modeling that we have in play. We based on it looking very much at the kind of individual kind of customer behavior, looking at what happened in other periods of interest rate volatility, who would move, who would kind of stick. You heard me mention earlier today as well that what we've done and the investment that we've done within our mortgage system has allowed us to kind of be able to react really, really quickly. I mentioned that we repriced 11x over the course of 22 days during March. I mean that is a significant change from where we were a number of years ago. So very comfortable with the dynamic overall. What I would kind of add is that we do see that most people who do refinance with us do ultimately kind of stick with us as well. So there's that good kind of customer engagement, which is just -- is really, really critical. We're also kind of largely locked in already for our forthcoming roll-offs. But I would say all of these things are embedded in the guidance that I've talked about today about the book actively kind of repricing to 60 bps over the course of the year. And so while we manage it actively, but I don't see it will be something that would change what I've said to you this morning already on that number. Operator: Our next question comes from Sheel Shah of JPMorgan. Sheel Shah: First question on corporate deposits, please, because this is a line item that has remained under GBP 200 billion or so for the last 2 years, and we're finally seeing a lot of growth come through the business. And not only the growth, but also the rates that you're paying on these corporate deposits, looking at your other disclosure looks to be declining as well. So I'd be interested to get some insight as to what's happening there? And then secondly, on the cost base, I know the first quarter had some increased investment in restructuring costs, but you also mentioned on the call earlier that the cost profile will be uneven through the year. So just wondering how you're thinking about that across the remainder of the quarters? Paul Thwaite: Thanks, Sheel. I'll take deposits. Katie, cost, yes? So I'm pleased you've noticed the trajectory there, Sheel. Deposits in the commercial bank is a big area of strategic focus for the team and has been, I would say, increasingly over the course of the last 18 months. So part of the performance momentum there is around focus. Given also the growth we've seen in lending, there's been a natural need to increase deposits in the commercial bank. So focus has played a part. But we've also broadened the product range. We've also digitized parts of the product range as well. So we've got business focus. We've got enhanced proposition for different segments within the commercial and corporate bank. And as you'd expect us to have, we also have a much broader focus on transaction banking, which obviously brings high-value operational deposits. And to your point, depending on the nature of those deposits, high liquidity value, but also in relative terms versus interest-bearing deposits, good cost of funding. So it's a strategic focus supported by a number of operational and tactical activities that support our client base but also help the LDR. Katie? Katie Murray: Costs, sure, absolutely. So you're absolutely right. Q1 is a little bit higher than normal, reflecting some of our decisions to front-load investments and restructuring costs alongside staff and inflation-related increases from 2025. But you'd expect me to say this, it's our history. It's what we deliver every single year. We are really confident in hitting our cost guidance of around GBP 8.2 billion. That excludes the impact of Evelyn. I'm just going to take the opportunity just to talk a little bit about Evelyn costs. We'll share more about that as well when we kind of -- once we've kind of finished the acquisition and things like that, which is going well. But there are a few things that you need to be thinking about that will impact some of those Evelyn costs as they come through. Obviously, first, we've got day 1 transaction costs. That was included in our guidance of the 130 basis points of capital. We've obviously got the operating costs that will come through from the point of consolidation in terms of Evelyn's own costs. We're then familiar, we talked a lot about the cost to achieve in terms of the GBP 150 million total cost to achieve to drive the GBP 100 million of cost synergies. And finally, we are going to have ongoing amortization of the intangibles that will be created upon completion. That doesn't impact our capital generation going forward as we've incurred that as part of the capital impact of the 130 basis points. Obviously, I'll give you more detail when we get to the point of completion. But when you think of lumpiness, think of -- they're absolutely rock solid on their 8.2. That's where they'll land because they always do. But there will be a little bit as Evelyn comes in. So think about that in your models of those 4 different kind of categories. Hopefully, that's helpful to you, Sheel, as well. Operator: Our next question comes from Aman Rakkar of Barclays. Aman Rakkar: Hopefully you can hear me okay, sorry. Paul Thwaite: We can. Yes. Aman Rakkar: I had 2 questions then. So could I just trouble you on the deposit margin, please? I think that 2 bps deposit margin Q-on-Q contribution, I think it's the softest uplift Q-on-Q. And obviously, you've got multiple moving parts in that, notably a massive structural hedge tailwind, but presumably offset by compression on kind of actual deposit spreads in the quarter. So I was interested in your sense of the deposit margin contribution on a sequential basis in coming quarters, please? And to what extent do you think this kind of intense deposit competition dynamic, particularly for term deposits, I mean, lots of people writing term deposits at negative spread kind of feeds into that would be really helpful. And then the second question was a broader question just around actually the income dynamic beyond this year because it feels like there's a building confidence around the income profile beyond this year, principally because of the interest rate environment. It's not really materially moving the needle on this year's guide as much as it perhaps will do on the forward look, not least because of the structural hedge. But I'm thinking about the cadence for net interest income through the course of this year is presumably going to be quite robust, right, in terms of what it means for next year. So is that the right characterization? And kind of what do you as a management team do with that, the kind of building confidence on the income outlook in the medium term versus what is quite an uncertain near-term dynamic in the Middle East? Katie Murray: Perfect. So deposit margin, 2 basis points in this quarter. I think you need to just think a little bit about the overall movement in balances in the quarter. So you've got tax outflows, GBP 10.3 billion. They are predominantly in January. Some do dribble into February, but they are predominantly there. We're confident around the deposit margin expansion will be greater in the coming months as we move forward from here. If we then look at kind of income beyond 2026, we expect annual income growth through 2026 to 2028. We're confident in that growth trajectory. Obviously, disciplined growth across lending, deposits and AUMAs continue in line with our CAL target of greater than 4%. That will obviously be boosted by the Evelyn Partners acquisition when it comes online. The higher for longer interest rate environment, we've got -- now got the terminal bank rate of 3.75% alongside the actions that we took in -- already taken in Q1 to move higher in the yield curve, meaning that we are increasingly confident on the income tailwind from the structural hedge, supporting income all the way through to 2030. You've got other variables like customer behavior, competitor behavior around pricing and macroeconomics. We'll see how these develop. But again, you can see what we've got in terms of our economics in there. And given that kind of interest rate sensitivity that we have, we do see that as a net positive for income beyond 2026. So overall, confident and building on our confidence that we had when we spoke to you in February as well. Thanks very much, Aman. Paul Thwaite: Yes. And as to your final point, Aman, how do management characterize that? I think as Katie finished there, net-net, it feels like we're in a stronger position on income and returns, both '26, but also looking out to '28. Operator: Our next question comes from Amit Goel of Mediobanca. Amit Goel: Hopefully, you can hear me okay. Paul Thwaite: Yes, we've got you crystal clear. Amit Goel: So one, just kind of following up. I suppose just on Slide 30, just on that deposit margin and contribution, just trying to reconcile on each of the divisions, it seems like the cost is coming down, but on the group, it's flattish. So I just wanted to check what's driving that? And then secondly, just on Evelyn, just curious how the business -- I mean, if you've got any color in terms of how the business has been developing since the acquisition announcement and I guess, during the first quarter and beyond in terms of AUA. So just anything on that would be helpful. Paul Thwaite: You go first. Katie Murray: The first one, absolutely. So if you look at the businesses, what that is, is that's representing the customer rate on deposits or loans, whereas if I look at the group number, it's the overall cost, including hedging. So it's not perfectly like-for-like as you look across those 2 lines. Paul, Evelyn? Paul Thwaite: Yes. So Amit, obviously, I can't comment on a business that we don't yet own. So that wouldn't be appropriate. What I would say is in terms of the planning to closure is going very well. We're moving at pace. We hope to announce that in the coming months. The work on -- the appropriate work on integration is progressing really well. You can see from our AUMA performance as in NatWest, the AUM performance, the strength, net new money above 8%, again, despite the market movements, top quartile investment performance. The -- going back to the AUM, kind of 10% up on year-on-year, which is great. So there's a limit. There's obvious limits to what I can say. But in the work that we're doing so far, we're very encouraged. I've spoken at length around the scale and the capabilities that Evelyn will bring. I think if you look at the success we're starting to have around retail investments and premier investment in the NatWest space, the acquisition of Evelyn is only going to accelerate that. So to me, the demand signals and the performance signals are good. Once we've closed, as Katie alluded to earlier in relation to the cost question, once we've closed, we'll obviously share a lot more detail in terms of the overall numbers and the plans, and we are eager to do that as soon as we can. Thanks, Amit. Operator: Our final questions come from Ed Firth of KBW. Edward Hugo Firth: I just have 2. The first one is just on detail. I think at the time of Evelyn, we were talking about GBP 300 million of revenue and GBP 300 million of costs in the first year. Is that still the right number we should be getting? So that was just my first question. Paul Thwaite: Yes, nothing has changed since the original disclosures, Ed. That's the best way to think about it. Edward Hugo Firth: Perfect. Okay. And then the second question was related to Jonathan's question really about risk because I've just struck that in your sort of worst-case scenario, you're talking about a low few hundred millions of credit losses, I guess, something like that. I know it's more than GBP 99 million, but it's not huge. And that's on a GBP 30 billion tangible equity invest, and you're making pre-provision profits of GBP 10 billion a year. And so I'm just wondering, how do you think about appetite to risk? I mean, do you really feel confident that you're taking enough risk? Because it feels to me that potentially there's quite a gap there for you to be doing quite a lot more and growing revenue quite a lot faster than you are. And I guess related to that, can I just ask about Slide 33 again? I mean it's a great slide, and thank you very much indeed for giving it to us. And I wish all the other banks would as well. But it does strike me that particularly your funds lending looks quite a lot bigger than I would ever have imagined. And is that -- I mean, I don't know the market that well, but I guess you do. You're a market leader in that space. Is that -- would you imagine that you are sort of bigger than most people? Or would you think that you're just a player and that's pretty standing? Because unfortunately, other people don't give us that type of a disclosure. Paul Thwaite: Great. Okay. Thanks, Ed. Good to hear from you. Quite a few different questions there. So we've got the kind of the extreme downside kind of credit piece. Katie, why don't you have a shot at that. I'll cover funds. And then there's a bit, I guess, linked to the -- just on lending risk appetite as well. Katie Murray: Yes, I'll crack on impairment, and you can jump in after that. So Ed, what I'd probably do is guide you a little bit. If you go after the call, on Page 27 of our IMS today, we gave you, I think, helpfully as a nonstandard Q1 disclosure, the -- what the -- our new change in our scenarios would be. And you can see that on the downside scenario for Stage 1 and Stage 2, it's GBP 99 million additional. But if you went to the extreme downside, that's a GBP 1.7 billion hit. So really very different in terms of numbers. And you can also see that, that's obviously greater than the hit we would have had at the year-end in that space. So I would just -- I'd probably just rebalance your numbers a little bit on that. That's obviously just Stage 1 and Stage 2. We would -- I would kind of point out that, that extreme downside is really quite far away from our base case. But obviously, it's blended into the number. I think we gave about 14% probability kind of weighting. So quite far out there, but it is something to kind of consider as you look at the numbers. And Paul, shall I come to you for the other? Paul Thwaite: Yes, yes, fine. Thank you, Katie. So on funds lending, I'm glad you liked the disclosure, right, I would say. On funds lending, that's a really long-standing business for us in excess of 20 years. A large part of that business is in our RBSI, which is our Channel Islands business, been in our disclosures for all that period of time. Probably worth diving in into a little bit of the detail. I wouldn't say we were a leader in that business. I'd say we're a strong player where we choose to participate. It's worth bearing in mind of that funds lending business, 80% of it is, I guess, what you know as subscription lines or capital call facilities. So that's where you kind of got exposure to LPs, and we take security charge over the LPs. Typically, that's pretty short dated as well, just to give you a bit more context, 1 to 3 years. So when you look at that line, the best part of GBP 17 billion is sublines. The other part is NAV, which is a smaller part, kind of GBP 3 billion, GBP 4 billion. And that's where you're seeing it, in effect, in a senior creditor when you're lending on to a particular asset. Average LTVs, again, just to help you there, around 30%, and you've got an institutional investor base. So very long-standing business. It's been predominantly led out of our Channel Islands business, no historical losses. So a good business, but there'll be -- as you look across European U.S. banks, you'll see different levels of exposure. I'd say we're strong, but certainly not a leader. Katie Murray: And in terms of risk, do we feel we've got the balance very much we're taking to get to his last question? Paul Thwaite: Yes. I think I hear both -- I guess, Ed, I hear both sides of the story. From some investors, I hear they really value the low-risk business model, well-diversified credit base, high risk-adjusted returns that you see. And then you hear the other side is, could you take more risk. I think the way we've approached our different asset portfolios, both in retail and commercial, has stood us in good stead. It allows us to perform well with a low cost of risk. We generate a high cost -- a high amount of capital. Our RoTEs are obviously sector-leading. So it feels like that -- we've got the balance right. We do at times, increase our risk appetite. You go back over the course of the last couple of years, you can see some of the moves we've made in retail. We've broadened our addressable markets in mortgages and credit cards. But I kind of feel that a U.K.-centric low-risk business model, high capital generation serves us well. So it feels like we're in the right space. Hopefully, that gives you a bit of insight into how management think about it, Ed. Thanks. Operator: Thank you for all your questions today. I will now hand over to Paul for closing comments. Paul Thwaite: Yes. Thanks, Oliver. So I just want to close with, I think, a couple of key points, which I think are particularly important given the context we're in and I think demonstrate why we think we're very well positioned as a bank. The first one is our deposit franchise and the gearing that gives us to rates. Obviously, that's driven by our corporate franchise. It supports our revenue growth, especially in a higher for longer environment. The second thing I would point to is the growth track record that we've built and continue to build and the targets that we've put out there. We think we've got a good track record and further opportunities across our 3 businesses. You can see also the progress we're making around cost management and our cost/income ratio and continuing benefits of operating leverage. And then to link it to Ed's question, if you look at the loan book and you look at the Bank of England stress tests, we are the most resilient bank under stress. I think that's as a consequence of our diversified business mix. So the lowest stress drawdown of any U.K. bank. So you add all that up together, superior returns, high capital generation, which can drive stronger distributions. So from my perspective, we feel very well placed as we look into the circumstances that face us. Thanks for your time. I hope you have a good weekend. Cheers. Katie Murray: Thank you. Operator: That concludes today's presentation. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for standing by. My name is Krista, and I'll be your conference operator today. At this time, I would like to welcome everyone to Magna International First Quarter 2026 Results Webcast and Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to turn the conference over to Louis Tonelli, Vice President of Investor Relations. Louis, please go ahead. Louis Tonelli: Thanks, operator. Hello, everyone, and welcome to our conference call covering our Q1 2026 results. Joining me today are Swamy Kotagiri and Phil Fracassa. Yesterday, our Board of Directors met and approved our financial results for the first quarter of '26 and our updated outlook. We issued a press release this morning outlining both of these. You'll find today's press release, the conference call webcast, the slide presentation to go along with the call and our updated quarterly financial review all in the Investor Relations section of our website at magna.com. Before we get started, just as a reminder, the discussion today may contain forward-looking information or forward-looking statements within the meaning of applicable securities legislation. Such statements involve certain risks, assumptions and uncertainties, which may cause the company's actual or future results and performance to be materially different from those expressed or implied in these statements. Please refer to today's press release for a complete description of our safe harbor disclaimer. Please also refer to the reminder slide included in our presentation that relates to our commentary today. With that, I'll pass it over to Swamy. Seetarama Kotagiri: Thank you, Louis. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us today. We appreciate your time and interest. Let's get started. Overall, I was very pleased with our strong Q1 2026 results, where we drove margin expansion with disciplined execution. In the quarter, sales were up 3% with weighted growth over market of 3%. Adjusted EBIT was up 58% with adjusted EBIT margin expanding 190 basis points to 5.4%, and adjusted EPS rose 77% to $1.38. We continue to demonstrate traction from our operational excellence initiatives across the company. Our robust cash flow reflects improved operating performance. We generated $677 million in operating cash flow and $372 million in free cash flow. In addition to strong earnings growth, our team did a great job securing additional commercial recoveries related to previous EV investments. Moody's recently reaffirmed its A3 credit rating for Magna and improved the outlook to Stable. We ended the quarter with a 1.5x rating agency leverage ratio, ahead of our expectations with $1.6 billion in cash on hand. Our 2026 outlook reinforces our confidence in our margin, EPS and cash flow trajectory. We continue to expect weighted sales growth over market of about 1.5% at the midpoint. We are reaffirming our prior outlook ranges for adjusted EBIT margin, adjusted EPS and free cash flow. While the situation in the Middle East introduces some uncertainty, we have a track record of navigating external disruptions, and we are confident in our ability to execute on what's within our control. Importantly, we expect to mitigate most cost headwinds over time. We remain focused on executing our proven capital allocation framework. We continue to invest in our business to support further profitable organic growth while returning $575 million in capital, including $440 million in stock repurchases to shareholders in the quarter. At the end of March, we had about 17 million shares remaining and available for repurchase under our NCIB. We plan to repurchase the remaining shares during 2026. We recently announced the margin accretive dispositions of our lighting and rooftop systems businesses. The transactions are consistent with our long-standing principles around portfolio management. We have highlighted in the past that we manage our portfolio using an objective set of criteria and regularly assess our product lines based on their addressable markets, market positions and returns. Specifically, we want to participate in meaningful or growing markets with stable or growing profit pools, strong or a clear path to strong market positions, profitable growth and sustainable competitive advantage. This has long been a key principle that ensures that we manage Magna for long-term success. The dispositions allow us to streamline the portfolio and focus on businesses that advance our long-term growth, margin and return objectives. The transactions are expected to close in the second half of the year. In our outlook, we have removed about $350 million of sales with minimal earnings and free cash flow impact. One example of our team's execution and innovation is the recent expansion of our hybrid driveline portfolio with the introduction of a dedicated hybrid drive for range-extended electric vehicles. The new system offers several advantages, including reduced size, weight and system cost, multiple operating modes and applicability across a broad range of vehicle segments. It underscores our commitment to providing OEMs with adaptable driveline solutions that support a wide range of vehicle performance and market expectations. Our team continues to partner closely with our OEM customers to deliver solutions that support Magna's growth. With that in mind, I would like to highlight a couple of recent complete vehicle EV program launches in Austria for China-based OEMs. This past quarter, we launched a second complete vehicle program for GAC. We also recently launched a third model, the P7+ for XPENG. Since September of 2025, we have now launched 5 vehicle models for these 2 China-based OEMs. More recently, we were awarded a fourth program with XPENG, which will launch later this year. This reinforces Magna's strong position in vehicle manufacturing and highlights the value of our flexible state-of-the-art production process, enabling fast-to-market, high-quality vehicles for any customer in the European market. Recently, Magna was once again recognized by Ethisphere as one of the world's most ethical companies marking our fifth consecutive year of recognition. This reflects our ongoing commitment to integrity, ethical decision-making and doing what's right, something we are very proud of. With that, I'll turn the call over to Phil. Philip Fracassa: Thank you, Swamy, and good morning, everyone. I will begin on Slide 19 with a summary of our strong first quarter results. Sales were $10.4 billion in the first quarter, up 3% from last year. Adjusted EBIT margin improved 190 basis points to 5.4%. Adjusted earnings were $1.38 per share, up 77%. And free cash flow was very strong at $372 million, up $685 million from last year. Each of these metrics came in ahead of our expectations. Now I'll take you through some of the details. Let's start with sales on Slide 20. First quarter sales were up 3% overall compared to last year. Excluding foreign currency translation, sales were down about 2%. Global light vehicle production declined 7% in the quarter. On a Magna-weighted basis, we estimate light vehicle production was down about 5%. This translates to 3% growth over market for Magna consolidated and 5% growth over market, excluding Complete Vehicles. Looking at the sales walk, foreign currency translation was positive $520 million or about 5%, driven by a weaker U.S. dollar compared to last year. Volumes, launches and other was relatively flat as lower light vehicle production, the end of production on certain programs, including the Ford Escape and normal course customer price concessions were largely offset by the launch of new programs, including the Ford Expedition Navigator, Mercedes-Benz CLA and Jeep Cherokee Recon and net favorable program sales mix. Sales in Complete Vehicles, excluding foreign currency, declined $172 million despite higher unit volumes. The higher unit volumes reflected new assembly programs and grants, including with XPENG and GAC, where sales are recognized on a value-added basis. Volumes with other customers where sales are generally recognized on a full cost basis, declined year-over-year collectively. This resulted in net lower assembly sales dollars. Engineering revenue was also lower, in line with our expectations. Now let's move to EBIT on Slide 21. First quarter adjusted EBIT was $558 million, an increase of $204 million or 58% from last year. Adjusted EBIT margin was 5.4%, up 190 basis points. Looking at the pluses and minuses, our largest benefit came from operational performance, volume and other items, about 80 basis points. This reflects continued momentum from operational excellence and other cost reduction initiatives. We also benefited from prior restructuring actions and favorable net foreign exchange gains. These positives more than offset the impact of lower organic sales and unfavorable mix. Equity income contributed around 70 basis points in the quarter, reflecting a favorable commercial settlement at one of our Power & Vision joint ventures that was originally planned for the second quarter. Margins were also supported by higher sales, favorable mix as well as productivity and efficiency improvements. Discrete items added around 55 basis points, driven mainly by lower warranty costs as we had a large expense accrual last year in seating. We also benefited from net favorable commercial items year-over-year in the quarter. And finally, tariff costs net of recoveries, reduced margins by about 15 basis points. While recovery mechanisms are in place with some customers, discussions with most OEMs for 2026 are ongoing, and we are following the frameworks we established last year. We remain confident that our net tariff impact for 2026 will be similar to 2025. In other words, a roughly neutral impact to EBIT margin for the full year. Looking below the EBIT line on Slide 22. Interest expense was $13 million lower than last year due mainly to our strong first quarter free cash flow. This led to lower short-term borrowings and higher cash balances, resulting in lower net interest expense for the quarter. Our first quarter adjusted tax rate was 23.8%, an improvement of 190 basis points versus last year. For the full year, we continue to forecast an adjusted tax rate of approximately 23%. Adjusted net income was $386 million, up $167 million or 76% from last year, driven mostly by the higher EBIT. And first quarter adjusted EPS was $1.38, up 77% from last year, mainly reflecting the higher net income as well as a slightly lower share count. Next, let's take a brief look at our business segment performance, which is summarized on Slide 23. Three of our four segments posted higher sales year-over-year and growth above market in the quarter with a notable 6% year-over-year increase in Power & Vision. The exception on the sales line was complete vehicles, where sales declined 4% as net lower volumes on full cost programs and lower engineering revenue were only partially offset by favorable foreign currency translation and the benefit of recent value-added program launches with China-based OEMs. Turning to EBIT. Body Exteriors & Structures, Power & Vision and Seating all posted notable year-over-year improvements in adjusted EBIT dollars and margins, reflecting strong operational execution. Power & Vision also benefited from a favorable commercial settlement in equity income, while Seating benefited from lower warranty costs. Complete Vehicles margin was lower than last year, but in line with our expectations, reflecting the impact of lower engineering revenue, offset partially by productivity and efficiency improvements. Now let's look at cash flow on Slide 24. In the first quarter, we generated $677 million in cash from operations, an increase of $600 million from last year. Operating cash flow in the current period includes over $450 million in balance sheet-related customer recoveries for certain EV programs in North America. We had originally expected to receive most of these recoveries later in 2026. Investment activities in the quarter included $219 million in CapEx, representing 2.1% of sales and $168 million for investments, other assets and intangibles, offset partially by proceeds from normal course asset dispositions. Netting everything out, we generated free cash flow of $372 million in the quarter, above our expectations and the most cash we have ever generated in the first 3 months of the year. We continue to return capital to shareholders in the first quarter with $135 million in dividends, along with $440 million in share buybacks. We repurchased 7.6 million shares during the quarter under our NCIB authorization, which left us with close to 17 million shares remaining at the end of March. We're planning to repurchase those shares before the NCIB expires in early November. Turning to Slide 25. Our balance sheet and capital structure remain strong. At the end of March, we had almost $5 billion in total liquidity including $1.6 billion of cash on hand. Our rating agency leverage ratio was 1.5x on March 31, better than we anticipated 3 months ago. This puts Magna in great position to continue our share repurchase strategy in 2026 and beyond. And we're pleased to note that Moody's recently affirmed Magna’s A3 investment-grade credit rating with an improved outlook of Stable. Next, let me cover our current outlook on Slide 26. Compared to our February outlook, we've reduced our North American production forecast by around 100,000 units to $14.9 million, and we reduced Europe by 200,000 units to $16.6 million, both reflecting current market conditions. Our China production assumptions remain unchanged. We've also updated our currency assumptions to reflect recent exchange rates. We're now expecting a slightly stronger euro, Canadian dollar and Chinese yuan in 2026 as compared to our February outlook. We continue to actively manage input costs and other volatility through commercial recoveries and cost actions. Our outlook reflects our current visibility into the balance of the year, and does not assume a prolonged geopolitical conflict in the Middle East. Moving to Slide 27. We are reaffirming our prior outlook ranges across key metrics including adjusted EBIT margin, adjusted EPS and free cash flow. We have slightly lowered our sales outlook range for the updated light vehicle production estimate provisions we covered earlier along with the expected second half closings of the lighting and rooftop systems divestitures within Power & Vision, offset partially by the benefit of foreign currency translation from a weaker U.S. dollar. We're also forecasting lower interest expense, reflecting the favorable timing of commercial recoveries, which should result in less borrowings throughout the year. All other outlook metrics from February are unchanged. Note that we continue to expect strong margin expansion with adjusted EBIT margin between 6% and 6.6%, despite slightly lower sales. Adjusted EPS between $6.25 and $7.25 per share and free cash flow between $1.6 billion and $1.8 billion. And while we don't provide a quarterly outlook, I would like to offer a framework for how we're thinking about EBIT and margin cadence for the rest of 2026. We expect 2026 adjusted EBIT to be back half weighted with first half EBIT just under 45% of full year EBIT. We're taking a measured approach to the second quarter, given the ongoing geopolitical dynamics and the potential for near-term volatility with adjusted EBIT margins expected to be relatively flat with the second quarter of last year. That's it for the financial review. Now I'll turn it back to Swamy to wrap things up. Swamy? Seetarama Kotagiri: Thank you, Phil. Before we take your questions, let me recap a couple of key points. We had a strong start to 2026 with adjusted EBIT margin expansion, cash generation and solid weighted sales growth over market. We are positioned for continued margin expansion and shareholder returns, supported by a solid 2026 outlook that is largely unchanged from February, reflecting our confidence in our operating performance. We are executing a disciplined capital allocation strategy, including significant return of capital and portfolio actions aligned with long-term value creation. Most importantly, we remain highly confident in Magna's future. We hope to see many of you in November at our investor event in New York City, where we will go into detail on our strategy, key initiatives and long-term financial outlook. Thank you for your attention. Now operator, let's open it up for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And your first question comes from Alex Perry with Bank of America. Alexander Perry: Congrats on all the progress. I guess just first, I wanted to ask, can you give us an update on your raw material exposure. I guess, particularly on the resin side, what is the impact expected to have on the margins. Were there any other offsets that allowed you to keep your EBIT margin guide? And how should we think about sort of the flow-through there? Philip Fracassa: Sure, Alex. This is Phil. I'll start and then Swamy can chime in. Relative to raws, if we take a step back, if we look at exposures like steel and aluminum, as an example, we're largely protected through OEM resale programs and other pass-through mechanisms. The vast majority of our exposure there is covered. On resins, it would be a little bit less. A meaningful portion would be covered by pass-throughs as well or not resale, but more pass-throughs. But think of it as sub-50%, so a little bit exposed there. But as resins move, we would do what we normally do, which is kind of work with customers to recover the higher input costs. Looking at the first quarter, I'd say we saw minimal impact on all of that. We saw a little bit of higher freight costs in the quarter, but minimal impact across other input costs. And as we've talked about kind of many times, as we see input costs move, we typically recover on a lag basis to the extent if oil stays high, resins stay high, we would work with our customers to recover that over time and frankly, would expect to recover the bulk of any swings over the course of the rest of the year. Last comment I would make on, we get a lot of questions on energy, particularly in Europe, but we're in a much better position now than we were, say, in 2022. We're hedged about 2/3 of our both electricity and natural gas spend in Europe for this year and about 50% hedged for next year. So swings in costs, near term, we're pretty well protected there as well. Swamy, anything else? Seetarama Kotagiri: No, I think you covered it well, Phil. The one thing that you might look at is the logistics and the freight costs. But that's the reason why we talk in terms of ranges. We feel pretty confident based on everything that you said, we would be able to contain it. Alexander Perry: Really helpful. And then I guess just my follow-up question. So the production outlook came down a bit, but you kept sort of all the segments the same other than Power & Vision, which came down a bit. Maybe walk us through why that is and sort of how you're thinking about production in the various segments? Philip Fracassa: Sure, Alex. So what happened there was we had 3 things that happened in the outlook. First, we took the production estimates down, as you referenced, which was a slight downward revision in the revenue, if you will. We took foreign currency up as we're modeling a slightly weaker U.S. dollar than before. And that sort of offset one another as compared to February across most of the segments. And the one exception was P&V, where we also layered in the anticipated closing of lighting and rooftop systems and kind of in the second half, call it, near the end of the third quarter sort of what we modeled. And that kind of had the effect of bringing P&V revenue down about $400 million or so if you look at the outlook. But it was really kind of FX and vehicle production offsetting one another in the other segments. And honestly, the fact that we held the margins despite that because oftentimes when foreign currency improves, we don't get the same incremental that we do when volume goes up or down. So we were able to kind of offset that, hold the margin range where it was, hold the EPS range where it was, just given the -- given how well the business was performing, particularly in the first quarter of the year. Alexander Perry: That's incredibly helpful. Best of luck going forward. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of James Picariello with BNP Paribas. James Picariello: Can you just speak to the favorable commercial item? Can you just provide more color on what actually took place? Was it unexpected for the full year? Or was it more of a timing shift within the year in terms of the ability to get that recovery, which showed up in equity income, right? Philip Fracassa: Yes, exactly, James. So 2 things there. It was a recovery in the first quarter in equity income, it hit P&V. We had initially planned for it in the second quarter. So it wasn't a variance for the full year. It was a timing shift between Q2 and Q1, and it really related to recoveries for past investments in EV programs. And just to kind of give you an order of magnitude, it was the bulk of the equity income improvement in margins year-over-year was probably 60 basis points of that improvement was that item. And again, hitting in P&V, you'll note that P&V had really strong performance in the quarter, revenue up strong incremental margin on the revenue. But even excluding that item, the incrementals in P&V would have been quite strong on the order of 30% even without that item. So P&V performed really well, good growth across several different launches, good growth in some of our camera businesses, et cetera. But to answer the question, it was a onetime item, but it was timing between Q2 and Q1. James Picariello: Okay. That's crystal clear. Appreciate that. My apologies if I missed this in the prepared remarks. But for the lighting and rooftop divestiture, should we expect any proceeds from that? Or is it more of a partnership handoff type of arrangement because it's zero -- has neutral EBIT? Seetarama Kotagiri: James, as I said in the remarks, the transactions will be closing later this year, obviously, subject to approvals. They are margin accretive because they were below the Magna average, I would say. But it is a -- going back to the guiding principles, if you look at it from a strategic perspective in terms of market position, in terms of returns, we did not feel it was the right home and not the right path with us. That was the reason why the divestiture was done. We'll continue to look at portfolio just like we've always said with an objective lens. Philip Fracassa: Yes. And maybe just to round that out, James, I would want to point out that on our GAAP results, we did have -- we did book a loss related to those divestitures in the first quarter, just given where they were in terms of negotiations at the end of the quarter. So that was over a $400 million impairment that we took in the first quarter, which would be in the GAAP results excluded from adjusted. Seetarama Kotagiri: And there are some modest proceeds that will be used in the normal course, James, right, in terms of the cash flow looking at the balance sheet and how it will be used for share repurchases. James Picariello: Is this the beginning of a like ongoing pruning of the portfolio of smaller businesses? Or is this mainly a one-off? I'm just curious if there's anything strategic and sustained behind this type of sale for you guys? Seetarama Kotagiri: Yes. I don't think it is a onetime or it's -- if you go back into the last 10 years, you would have seen few pressure controls, you would have seen in the years. Honestly, James, this is an ongoing process. We continue to look at it every year. Can't speculate or won't comment on future actions, but I can tell you this is really a very rigorous ongoing process. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Dan Levy with Barclays. Dan Levy: So your guide assumes 35 to 40 basis points of operational excellence. And you just did in the first quarter, I think it's 80 basis points. I know there's other stuff in that category in your earnings bridge. But maybe you can just give us a sense within the quarter, why you were out punching on that 35 to 40 basis points? And what changes in subsequent quarters? Or is there potential upside on that 35 to 40 basis points? Seetarama Kotagiri: Dan.The 35 to 40 basis points that we talked about obviously encompasses a lot of things that go on. The specific larger operational excellence initiatives that I mentioned in the past are really specific, for example, enterprise-wide digital architecture, data backbone, real-time performance management through data streaming dashboards and scalable automation of material handling and so on and so forth. But beyond that, there are thousands of initiatives that every division looks at in terms of material savings, in terms of OEE improvements. You can't really put an exact cadence. Definitely, with some of the programs in place and feel comfortable, the proliferation is a little bit accelerated. And it also depends on the cadence of how many ideas or VA/VE initiatives are in place in the fourth quarter and how they can materialize in Q1, right? But all in all, I would say we feel pretty good about the 35 basis points, 40 basis points. And if the macros hold good, yes, we feel pretty good that we'll keep that and continue the path. Philip Fracassa: Yes, Dan, just 2 things I might add there. We did accelerate really well last year with the operational excellence initiative. So probably a bit of an easier comp in the first quarter than maybe the comps we'll have as we move through the year. That would be one. But I would say, stepping back, a stronger than we expected performance on the operational excellence front in Q1. So to your point about if we can keep that going, I would agree with you that, that would present some upside for us. Seetarama Kotagiri: And that's why I keep saying, as we look at the proliferation, we are still in the early innings of the factory of the future. Dan Levy: Great. Okay. And then I just wanted to follow up on James' question on the divestitures here. So I get, there's constantly a portfolio review process to make sure that the products that you're in, that you have a strong market position, that's a relevant market and these businesses didn't clear that threshold. I guess I would just ask more broadly, the broader Magna portfolio, what percent of that would you deem to be in a market position that is not where it should be and where it's a tougher path to sort of getting to an appropriate market position? And how would you characterize Seating as it relates to your market position and path to improving the market position? Seetarama Kotagiri: Yes. It's a long question, Dan, and, you know, it's a complex one. As you look at most of the products, right, we're not really saying we have to be #1, but you need to have meaningful market position, but along with it also good returns and good profitability. And it's not at any one point in time. You have to look at it, you invest, you go through cycles. And if you see a good path and if you see good progress, we continue to stay on it. Specifically to seating position, we -- again, it's not just looking at it broadly as a global market. In North America, we have a good position. We have good position in Europe. We have really good position now in China. And more importantly, we have some really good innovation in terms of not just the product, but how we assemble the seat and how we take it forward. And as part of this operational excellence or Factory of the Future initiatives, you'll start seeing that. Hopefully, we can talk to you a little bit more when we see you in November for the Investor Day. But we feel pretty good, and you'll continue to see the traction on the profitability and the returns in that segment. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Chris McNally with Evercore ISI. Chris McNally: Swamy, a little bit of a broader question around some of the risks in the second half of the year. And I know this is high-arching question that, you know, I think everyone is getting asked. But I'm curious your perspective, if you're more worried about sort of the known, unknowns in the second half or the unknown, unknowns. So when I think about known unknowns, raw materials transport, second half volumes sort of the typical that you're curious duration of the issue of the conflict. But the unknown unknowns is the one that we are having the hardest time grappling with as investors in the self, and things like memory availability, chip availability or just other disruptions. Just maybe you could opine on those 2 buckets for what you're seeing sitting here in April? Seetarama Kotagiri: Yes, Chris, I'm going to use your terminology, known unknowns and unknown unknowns. Honestly, I think if it's a known entity or variable, right, for example, things that you just mentioned, we at least have a scenario analysis and a playbook to say how we are going to address it. And that's the reason why we talk about outlook and ranges and not specific numbers. The bigger question is the unknown unknowns, right? Because you haven't thought about it. You might have some scenario planning, but it's not as granular. So those are the bigger questions. If you look at the DRAM, we are focused on it. We are tracking it. We are monitoring it. We're working with our customers. Continuity is the most important in terms of supply. We are doing that. We're managing costs through sourcing actions and customer alignment. That we believe, if the world doesn't flip upside down, we can manage it within our outlook ranges. That's an example of something that is a scenario planning and we can address. Things that we don't know in terms of complete volatility, big macro issues, lack of certainty and volatility are the 2 things that you have to constantly worry about. Chris McNally: That's great. And if we could just double click, Swamy, on the one on memory because we obviously get this question a lot. We see obviously everything going on with AI and the hyperscalers. But -- is it fair to summarize that the industry's view because I think that many companies have been asked this, that right now on memory, there's more of an issue around price, meaning you may have had some contracts and basically memory providers are coming back and asking for closer to spot as opposed to contract, and that's some of the risk as opposed to literally pulling the volume, which would not allow for cars to be made. Is that a fair summary of where the industry kind of view is right now that there's a little bit more of this price discussion, I want to be paid for spot as opposed to pulling volumes? Seetarama Kotagiri: The short answer, Chris, I would say your summary is correct in the short term, right? It's more a pricing and how do we manage that in terms of demand and keeping capacity and so on and so forth. In the long term, you've got to look at design options and so on. In short, your summary is correct. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Joe Spak with UBS. Joseph Spak: Phil, just -- I'm sorry to go back to this. I just want to make sure I understand some of your comments on recoveries because it sounded like maybe it was, I don't know, $60 million, $70 million in EBIT. I'm trying to just sort of figure out how that relates to -- in the report, it said the recovery for your investments in the quarter was like $475 million in cash flow. So I just want to make sure those numbers are correct, that part of that recovery in the cash flow was not in the operating income. And then on that recovery in the cash flow, I just want to make sure that is what you sort of expected? And is that mostly done? Or do you still expect more cash recovery to come down the pike? Philip Fracassa: Yes. Thanks, Joe. Great question. So I think you've got it right. So first of all, the 60 basis points or call it, $60-ish million, the equity income item was did run through the P&L, but it's the $475 million that we called out in our MD&A was really balance sheet only. So the vast majority of that recovery was a balance sheet recovery. So getting sort of reimbursed for prior investments that we made that were sort of sitting on the balance sheet. So very little P&L impact from that. And we did largely expect that in 2026, but just later in the year, maybe a little bit overall for the full year, maybe a little bit higher than we previously anticipated. But -- so is there any more to come? There's a little bit more we would expect between now and the end of the year, not of that same order of magnitude. It's reflected in the full year outlook as we continue to work with customers on other negotiations that are ongoing. But the -- beyond that $60 million that ran through equity income, we had very little running through the P&L for the other recoveries. It was really just cash only. Joseph Spak: Okay. Really appreciate that clarification because I was having trouble connecting those 2. Second question, Swamy, and I apologize in advance because I don't want to put you in the middle of a geopolitical storm, but there have been reports of Chinese OEMs looking to maybe build vehicles in Canada. And I was wondering if you were able to comment on any conversations you might have or even more broadly, how you would view that potential opportunity? Because obviously, you mentioned some of the wins with the domestic Chinese, whether it's Complete Vehicles or others. So you have that good relationship there. And I was wondering how that could sort of spill over to this region. Seetarama Kotagiri: Yes, Joe, for the exact reason that you mentioned, I would like to remain a businessman and a capital allocator and not a policy commentator. So I won't comment on speculation. I can say that Magna's model is to be neutral global partner to all OEMs. And we are not -- as you've heard me talk about it, we continue to win business in Europe with our Complete Vehicle assembly with all OEMs. Today, it happens to be the Chinese OEMs. And we continue to win business in China with Chinese OEMs. Any OEM that continues to grow in the ecosystem, we have an opportunity to supply Magna systems and components and also do vehicle assembly where possible. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Tom Narayan with RBC Capital Markets. Thomas Ito: This is Thomas Ito on for Tom. It looks like your guidance implies some pretty substantial margin uplift in BES and Seating for the remainder of 2026. Just wondering, is this sort of just the timing of customer recoveries or are there other factors going on in these segments? Philip Fracassa: No. I mean, I would say it's really continued progress on the operational excellence initiatives and then obviously getting really strong pull-through revenue. The P&V was a -- we're expecting strong growth in P&V for the full year. We didn't have the item in the first quarter. For the full year, the margins will be on the implied guide would be pretty close to the first quarter performance, but still really solid growth year-over-year. And the BES and Seating over the course of the rest of the year would expect the operational excellence really being the biggest item that's kind of sticking out relative to the improvement from Q1 through to Q4. I don't know, Louis, anything else you'd add. Thomas Ito: Okay. Got it. And I guess as a quick follow-up, we saw another supplier announce some revenue impacts related to the IEEPA tariff adjustments. Could you just comment on whether any such adjustments are incorporated in that '26 guidance? Philip Fracassa: Yes. I mean it's a great question and I figured we would get it. So on tariffs, let's just take a step back. We came into the year based on last year's rates, if you will. We had about $160 million gross impact last year. The run rate would have put us at around $200 million this year. Again, looking to recover that from our customers. We had a lot of development. IEEPA came out, 122 came in. We had some changes in 232. Net-net, our gross exposure has come down. So from $200 million, now we're thinking it's closer to last year's number actually, right around $160 million. Our net exposure relatively unchanged and we still expect maybe a little bit better, but relatively unchanged. We still expect a margin headwind of less than 10 basis points, but year-over-year would be neutral in that scenario. And then relative to the last element would be the refunds, I would say we are working to file those refund claims sort of as we speak. We're in the midst of filing them as we speak. And it's a good sized number. We talked about it was probably over half of our tariff exposure, roughly half of our tariff exposure was IEEPA. So as those refunds are filed, as those refunds come in, we didn't book any of those refunds in the first quarter. As those refunds come in, we'll obviously work with our customers on that given that they funded -- they covered about 80% of our tariff costs last year. So we'll work with them as those refunds come in to make sure that they're allocated appropriately. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Emmanuel Rosner with Wolfe Research. Emmanuel Rosner: I was hoping to follow up on the comments you made in the prepared remarks about the expected cadence of earnings this year. And in particular, I think you said Q2 margins would be broadly stable year-over-year. Can you just give us a few of the puts and takes in there? Is there some timing of things that shifted from Q2 into Q1? Or I guess, how should we think about the stable margin year-over-year this quarter? Philip Fracassa: Yes. I think it's -- well, relative to expectations, we had that equity income item that kind of moved from Q2 to Q1. But as we sort of set up the cadence for the rest of the year, we did, I would say, deliberately take a little bit more measured view on the second quarter, a little bit more cautious view, if you will. And so as you look at year-over-year at sort of the midpoint of the guide, we'd probably see a little bit of increase in revenue year-over-year with kind of a proportionate incremental margin kind of keeping margins relatively flat. We've got foreign currency as a positive in there, which kind of come through as with a little bit lower margin and then the volumes kind of coming down a little bit with a little bit bigger impact. So really nothing more than that. The operational excellence continues, but it was really more just trying to be a little bit more measured in how we were thinking about the second quarter as kind of we're sitting here in time and space. But as we look out to the rest of the year, still very confident in the full year guide and very confident in the margins and earnings, et cetera. And if you remember in February, we talked about first half EBIT being kind of slightly above 40%. This time around, we're probably seeing a little bit more one half weighting on the EBIT, maybe sub 45%. So think 43-ish kind of percent first half, second half, and that should kind of get you in the ballpark. Emmanuel Rosner: Okay. That's helpful. And then I was hoping to ask about your growth over market, which I think you said you measured it as like 3 points for this quarter, I guess, for Q1 or 5x Complete Vehicle, still good conviction in, I think, 0% to 3% for the full year. Can you talk about some of the upcoming big launches that you have that will drive this growth of the market and potentially serve like any sort of cadence within that? Seetarama Kotagiri: Emmanuel, I think like you said, it's really a reflection of the launch activity. It's a bit of good program mix and also content growth across all our core segments. So net-net, if you look at the end of production programs and compare it to the new production launches that we have, which is many across these different geographic regions, different customers, different programs. And if you take the content, so that's positive net-net, right? So that's the reason why we are seeing that. And the Complete Vehicles, you heard me talk about the specific program launches with GAC, with XPENG and the discussions continue. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Colin Langan with Wells Fargo. Colin Langan: I just want to follow up again on the recovery impact. You mentioned the 60 basis points from JV. If I look at the slides in discrete items, it looks like half of the discrete items are also recoveries. So is there another $25 million, $30 million outside of the JV recoveries? And then I thought last quarter, you had said that recoveries for the year were neutral, and yet we have a big help in Q1. So does that mean as we go into the second half, that there's headwinds as those recoveries are down year-over-year? Philip Fracassa: So on the first part of the question, yes, in the discrete items, we did see the favorable warranty costs, which was a big item. And we also had the net impact of -- we did have favorable commercial items as well, which sort of spans the gamut of not just EV-related recoveries, but recoveries for other commercial matters as well. And as you know, that can sort of vary quarter-to-quarter. I think we did talk about coming into the year thinking we'd be largely neutral for the full year on the P&L with respect to recoveries. But on the cash, we did get a fair amount of cash for EV-related recoveries last year. If you remember, in the fourth quarter, we had a big cash inflow in the fourth quarter. So we did expect recoveries as it related to the EVs to be a fair bit comparable. So we do expect to be that way for the full year. So we -- it was more front-loaded this year. It was a little bit more backloaded last year. But our guide of free cash flow of kind of $1.7 billion at the midpoint sort of implies about $1.3 billion for the rest of the year, and that will be, as always, is kind of back half weighted. Louis Tonelli: On the recoveries, the recovery related to equity income was kind of in the equity income in the roll between '25 and '26. So I guess it's just bucketing. We had that in equity income is part of the reason why we had higher margin this year, not in this kind of recoveries. Recoveries we're talking about here are more on a consolidated basis. Colin Langan: You still expect recoveries to be neutral for the year. The initial guide did incorporate the JV help from recoveries. Seetarama Kotagiri: It did, yes. Colin Langan: And then just broadly, if I go into the second, I mean, Q2 is supposed to be flat. Organic sales are -- I think the guide implies are fairly slightly down actually. You have $100 million sort of implied EBIT improvement. I kind of feel of like we're out of some of the puts and takes outside of warranty. JV incomes are, I think, kind of most of that good news in the initial guide is done. So is it all just operational efficiencies or other items that are kind of going to add some help to kind of offset the -- at least at the midpoint, weaker sales? Seetarama Kotagiri: Yes. I would say some of it is as you talked about operational excellence, but as new programs come in, they have different economic terms, and there is a mix of, as I said, launches, right, that are happening towards the second half of the year. So I would say it's a combination of the 2 columns. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Andrew Percoco with Morgan Stanley. Andrew Percoco: I wanted to start out on your disposing of your lighting and rooftop systems business. But I kind of want to get a sense for is there anything -- as we think about the evolving landscape, particularly around ADAS and AVs, are there any areas where you might want to grow your portfolio or add to the offerings that you currently have around that ecosystem? Seetarama Kotagiri: Yes. Andrew, I think I've said that the last couple of quarters, and we feel pretty good where we stand with our portfolio right now. I think the focus is really on organic growth and trying to get the efficiencies up, get the traction that we have in operational excellence continue, focus on the cash flow and continue the journey right now. But if there is some really good opportunity in terms of small tuck-ins that add value here and there, obviously, we'd be open to it. But our focus really is on continuing to keep the roadmap that we have in front of us for cash flow and good value. Andrew Percoco: Okay. That makes sense. And then maybe just around these recoveries. I'm curious like if you -- if you or the industry in general, are planning to adjust how you maybe strike these contracts with your OEM partners going forward. I know there's been a big kind of rightsizing exercise in the industry around EV manufacturing capacity, but the OEMs are still very much committed to exploring new vehicle platforms. So I'm just curious, as you kind of think about that next cycle, how you might evolve that contracting structure to maybe avoid some of the overinvestment that we've seen in prior cycles? Seetarama Kotagiri: Yes. I don't know if we can change the decision of the OEMs, but we definitely can bring our opinion to the table. And there are cases where we have looked at different terms, right, there is sharing of capital deployment, let's say, looking at volumes and how we band them and how we look at the step function of cadence as you go into the program rather than putting all the capacity upfront. There are several of those discussions. We are fortunate to have those strategic discussions with the customers. And as an industry, I think the big elephant in the room is like how do you become good stewards of the capital, right? How do you extrapolate what's there, what's capacity that's existing, how do you use it more efficiently rather than just adding more. But like you said, it's a 2-way traffic, and we have many of those discussions. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Jonathan Goldman with Scotiabank. Jonathan Goldman: Most of them have been asked already. I guess just one on the guidance. I think you talked about the rooftop and lighting business being below the Magna consolidated margin levels, but you maintained the margin guidance for the year. I would have thought the divestiture may have been margin accretive. So I just want to know what are the offsets there? Seetarama Kotagiri: So I think, Jonathan, good question. But we are looking at the broad picture of Magna, given the uncertainty in the market that we have. And what we're looking at, that's the range we are talking about. Philip Fracassa: Yes. The only -- yes, that's exactly right. The only thing I would add, Jonathan, is it was really -- we're talking about, call it, 3 to 4 months of the year, so not a big number in the current year. And the other point to keep in mind, too, is we took revenue up for currency, which comes through at an EBIT margin, if you will. We took revenue down a little bit for volume, which sort of comes out at an incremental or a decremental as the case may be. So there's a little bit of that going on there, too. But there's no question to both P&V and to Magna as a whole, that the divestitures would be modestly accretive to margins just given where they were operating. Jonathan Goldman: Okay. That's good color. And then maybe just circling back on that one, Phil, the revenue guidance, maybe switching to mix, maybe more currency in the sales this year. Is the offset the lower production volumes that you've updated the guide for? Philip Fracassa: Yes. I would say when you think about -- so we're kind of holding the EBIT -- we're holding the EPS guide, we did see a little bit of a benefit on the interest line below EBIT as, you know, the free cash flow in the first quarter was much sooner than we anticipated that cash coming in. So it will result in lower borrowings throughout the year, a little bit of interest benefit. So while revenue is down a little bit, with holding margins would bring EBIT down a little bit, a little bit of offset in interest expense, which kind of enables us to hold the range where it was before. And again, kind of holding the range despite the strong Q1 was really as much just being a little bit prudent on the rest of the year at this point. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Mark Delaney with Goldman Sachs. Mark Delaney: One on margins. When considering the efficiency efforts that the company has underway for this year, the expectation of 35 bps to 40 bps as well as the portfolio optimization you announced relative to lighting and the rooftop part of the business. Maybe put that into the context of where Magna thinks its EBIT margins can go over the medium to longer term. And in the past, the company has spoken about the potential to get to a 7% plus type range. I'm curious where you think you are on that journey, especially in light of some of the decisions and progress you reported today. Seetarama Kotagiri: I think I can tell you we are in a good path to the roadmap that we laid out. Right now, we are focused on executing like we did in Q1 over the last 2 or 3 quarters, and we see a good path into '26. That's why we were able to reaffirm the outlook of 2026. Now regarding the midterm and long term, I would say the best time to get through that without confusing anything is the November Investor Day. We will be able to lay out the next 3 to 5 years. Mark Delaney: Looking forward to that. And my last question was around the production environment. You already described your view on overall production volumes by region, but we're hoping you can share a bit more around mix. And curious if you're seeing any changes in the kinds of vehicles your OEM customers are looking to manufacture? And perhaps is there some increase in the number of EVs and hybrids that they're planning to make in light of the recent increase in gasoline prices? Seetarama Kotagiri: Not really a significant shift in what's been talked about. Obviously, there's an increased interest in hybrids, and it's very regional. In China, we continue to see the EV proliferation. In Europe, it's a little bit more hybrids and EVs continue there at a slower pace maybe. In the North America, we see renewed interest in hybrids. But in terms of vehicle segments, no, not really, we are not seeing a material shift in anything else. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Michael Glen with Raymond James. Michael Glen: Swamy, with the wins happening in Europe with the Chinese OEMs, are you at all supplying any parts to those vehicles yet? Or is it strictly assembly? Is there an opportunity to expand and supply parts? Seetarama Kotagiri: Yes. I think, Michael, right now, it is just assembly. Obviously, the conversations as this expands into volume, there is a localization discussion, and that's where we see the opportunity for other system and component supply. Michael Glen: Okay. And then just following on that, maybe just broadly with Europe. I know you don't break Europe out separately as a segment. But how do we sort of think about gains with new entrant OEMs into Europe and then what appears to be the lagging legacy OEMs. As a whole, is this a net negative to Magna? Or are the gains being made with the new entrants offsetting a difficult legacy business? Seetarama Kotagiri: Yes. Difficult to break down at that granularity for sure, Michael. I think I would say with the presence of Magna in China and as we continue to build that relationships, we believe that they come to different parts of the world, we will have a seat at the table. At this point of time, it's very difficult to talk at that level to say how much and how it's offsetting and so on. But overall, we still continue to grow our business in Europe. Operator: That concludes our question-and-answer session. I will now turn it back to Louis Tonelli for closing comments. Louis Tonelli: All right. Thanks, everyone, for listening in today. If you have any follow-up questions, please don't hesitate to reach out to me. Thanks, and have a great day. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, this does conclude today's conference call. Thank you all for joining, and you may now disconnect.
Operator: Thank you for standing by. My name is Amy, and I will be the conference operator for today. At this time, I would like to welcome everyone to the FIBRA Prologis First Quarter 2026 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] It is now my pleasure to turn the call over to Alexandra Violante, Head of Investor Relations. You may begin. Alexandra Violante: Thank you, Amy, and good morning, everyone. Welcome to our first quarter 2026 earnings conference call. Before we begin our prepared remarks, please note that all information disclosed during this call is proprietary and all rights are reserved. This material is provided for informational purposes only and is not a solicitation of an offer to buy or sell any securities. Forward-looking statements made during this call are based on information available as of today. Our actual results, performance, prospects or opportunities may differ materially from those expressed in or implied by the forward-looking statements. Additionally, during this call, we may refer to certain nonaccounting financial measures. The company does not assume any obligations to update or revise any of these forward-looking statements in the future, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by law. As is our practice, we have prepared supplementary materials that we may reference during the call as well. If you have not already done so, I will encourage you to visit our website at fibraprologis.com and download this material. On today's call, we will hear from Hector Ibarzábal, our CEO, who will discuss our strategy and market conditions; and from Jorge Girault, our CFO, who will review results and guidance. Also joining us today is Federico Cantú, our Head of Operations. With that, it is my pleasure to hand the call over to Hector. Hector Ibarzabal: Thank you, Ale, and good morning, everyone. As you know, we launched the tender offer for FIBRA Macquarie fully aligned with our long-term strategy. Our proven track record executing similar transactions gives us confidence in our ability to unlock value through our operating platform. We ended the first quarter of 2026 with solid operational results, supported by the quality and resilience of our portfolio as well as exceptional service to customers provided through the strength of Prologis platform. As the environment becomes more balanced, our outlook remains constructive. On the market side, in the context of ongoing uncertainty around trade and USMCA, selective but important customer activity continues to move forward, driven by operational needs. New leasing activity continues in line with 2025 quarterly levels with improved performance in border markets, particularly in nonautomotive manufacturing. Mexico City moderated from last year's peak due to softer e-commerce demand, although we expect a near-term recovery. Net absorption totaled 4.3 million square feet, well below 2025 average levels, primarily reflecting tenant consolidations in Mexico City and some tariff-related impacts in Tijuana. We do not expect these matters to become a trend in upcoming quarters. Market rents continue to grow modestly, led by consumption markets, while most border markets have stabilized. On the supply side, deliveries of 9 million square feet were 24% lower than the 2025 average. Vacancy in our 6 markets increased 70 basis points to 6.8%, mainly driven by move-outs in the consumption markets. However, we expect to see a stabilization in national vacancy in the following quarters, considering that the development pipeline has already declined to half of the peak levels seen in 2023. Furthermore, our portfolio continues to demonstrate outperformance, supported not only by the quality and location of our assets, but also by the execution of our teams on the ground and our close relationship with customers. Our strategy remains centered on Mexico's key industrial markets where we see the strongest long-term fundamentals. In addition, our sponsor Prologis provides meaningful advantages, including deep customer relations, market intelligence, clean energy and access to low cost of capital. On the disposition front, we will continue executing our strategy by exiting non-core markets. In the meantime, we have been creating value through operating and re-leasing them with excellence. I need to be clear, we are selling good assets in good markets. We have the balance to hold them as they are generating value, and we will wait until the most adequate buyer appears. In summary, despite external noise, our business remains resilient. Our strategy is clear, and we are well positioned for long-term growth. Before I turn it over to Jorge, allow me to close on a more personal note. This marks my final earnings call after more than a decade with FIBRA Prologis and since our IPO in June of 2014. It has been a privilege to be part of this journey from the beginning and to participate in every earnings call along the way. I also had the opportunity to help start the business in Mexico in the early 2000s, making this journey especially meaningful to me. I'm particularly proud that FIBRA Prologis is today the largest FIBRA in Mexico by market capitalization. And among the most successful in total return since our IPO, reflecting the quality of our assets and the discipline and long-term vision behind our strategy. Looking ahead, the company is in very capable hands. Jorge will assume the role of CEO. We have worked together for more than 30 years, sharing a strong alignment of values and a deep understanding of the business. I can think of no one better to lead the company going forward. Alexandra will step into the CFO role. She has done an outstanding job leading Investor Relations, building a strong market [ conditions ] and demonstrating deep financial discipline. This is a well-deserved opportunity, and I'm confident she will do great. I'm deeply grateful to our investors for the trust, our customers for their partnership and especially to our team for their permanent commitment and excellence. We have built a platform defined by quality, discipline and long-term vision, one that I'm confident will continue to perform. I step down at the end of June, closing a great cycle with great pride in what we have accomplished and full confidence in FIBRA Prologis' future. With that, I'll turn it over to Jorge. Jorge Girault: Thank you, Hector, and good morning, everyone. Despite regional and global uncertainties in the context of USMCA and Middle East tensions, we started the year with a strong note. With the integration of Terrafina into FIBRA Prologis balance sheet, we are harvesting the synergies of the strength of our platform by lowering cost of capital through our investment-grade rating and lowering expenses for 2026. All this in line with our goal of value creation for our investors and our focus on growing in a diligent and prudent manner. Before reviewing our financial results, I'd like to note that starting this year, we will report exclusively in U.S. dollars, our functional currency. We will no longer present figures in pesos in our financial information. We believe this change simplifies the valuation of our performance. Moving to financial results. FFO was $99.6 million for the quarter or $0.06 per certificate, basically flat year-over-year. AFFO totaled approximately $80 million for the quarter, in line with our expectations. Let me go to our operational fundamentals. Leasing activity was 3.6 million square feet during the quarter. Our period end and average occupancy were around 97%. Same-store cash and GAAP NOI growth was 9.9% and 10.7%, respectively. Net effective rent change for the quarter and 12 months was close to 60%. As you can see, we keep on harvesting the mark-to-market in our portfolio, which stands today above 30%. What this means is that we can grow revenues without additional investment. This is a result of our strategy, people on the ground focused on delivering value and obviously, market dynamics. Turning to the balance sheet. We continue to operate with a conservative financial profile. We're maintaining a healthy loan-to-value and we'll keep on extending our debt maturities. We will use our financial flexibility to our investors' advantage with a focus on delivering superior quality returns. Moving to guidance. We're keeping our guidance unchanged, which you can see on Page 8 of our financial supplemental information. In terms of our tender offer for 100% of FIBRA Macquarie CBFI's, launched on April 7, which will close by May 12, I would like to remind you that we have all required approvals in place. Also, following law of regulation, we will not further comment on the progress of this transaction. Like Hector said, FIBRA Prologis is the largest FIBRA in Mexico by market capitalization and ranks among the top 20 publicly traded companies in the Mexican Stock Exchange. It's also among Prologis' largest vehicles globally by AUM and GLA. Mexico as a stand-alone market is Prologis' second largest in terms of area, underscoring Mexico as a key market out of 20 contracts Prologis invest in. Since our IPO, we have delivered approximately 490% total return or 16% annually, outperforming our peers. This reflects our ability to leverage Prologis global platform and execute a disciplined strategy. I want to thank our people on the ground for their commitment and support on achieving these outstanding results. Before I finish, I want to thank Hector for your guidance, support, friendship and for putting your faith in me 32 years ago. You're a great leader and an exceptional human being. I am grateful for the trust and opportunity from Prologis leadership. I follow the path of remarkable leaders, Antonio Gutiérrez Cortina, who founded Caxion; Luis Gutiérrez, who took the company into the institutional arena and Hector Ibarzábal, who brought it all together and built the company we know today with passion and dedication that have carried across generations. Hector, you are one of my closest friends and someone I deeply admire. Thank you for everything. I will miss you. I will miss our daily interactions. I wish you the best in the years ahead, which knowing you have yet to come. I also want to thank and welcome and congratulate Alexandra Violante, who has led Investor Relations for the past 5 years with excellence and Montserrat Chávez, who after 15 years leading SG&A will now take the IR role. I am very proud that these promotions came from within our team, ensuring continuity while positioning us for what's ahead. To our stakeholders, my commitment is clear to leverage our unmatched platform, portfolio and balance sheet to continue creating value in the years to come. With that, let me turn it to [indiscernible]. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first call comes from the line of Pablo Monsivais with Barclays. Pablo Monsivais: First of all, Hector, we're going to miss you. Thank you for everything. And Jorge, Ale and Montse, congratulations on your new appointments. If I can ask to what extent the dynamics that you're seeing on softer trends in the consumption market could support medium-term rent increases? Are we seeing the peak of the cycle for rent increments? Hector Ibarzabal: Thank you, Pablo, for your words and for having been with us all this long way. I think consumption markets are evolving. It is a fact that consumption is slowing the pace a little bit. But as I have mentioned in previous occasions, when consumption gets tighter, e-commerce has even a greater opportunity. E-commerce is the best instrument that people have to make sure that their buying power is getting the most for the money. So probably the 2-digit growth on market rents in Mexico City were peak, as you mentioned. But eventually, I'm confident that in the short term, they will recover. Jorge Girault: Pablo, again, thanks for your words. This is Jorge. Regarding the portfolio itself, as I mentioned, the mark-to-market today is about 30%. So as we roll, we keep on harvesting that mark-to-market. So market rents as we have seen, especially in the border has softened. So the space between where our markets are, our rent markets, our portfolio rents are and the market is still pretty substantial, and we are harvesting that business. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Gordon Lee with BTG. Gordon Lee: I'd just like to echo Pablo's gratitude to Hector. My best wishes for whatever comes next. I'm sure it will be exciting and also my best wishes for Jorge, Ale and Montserrat. Just very quickly, it seems -- generally, it seems from your comments and I guess from the decision to launch new projects by PLD, together with other comments from companies that are involved in the development side of things, both public companies and private companies that it seems like there's a little bit more activity or more appetite from potential new clients for new space. So I was wondering what -- if there's a common theme to that or what you would attribute it to? Is it just the passage of time and that passage of time forcing decisions? Is it the view that whatever happens with USMCA in relative terms, Mexico will, for certain products, be better off than other locations? Or what is it that you're seeing, if you're seeing that's prompting that sort of increased appetite at the margin for space? Jorge Girault: Thank you, Gordon, and thank you for your words. Again, it's a little bit of everything you said. As Hector mentioned in his opening remarks, supply has come down, which is something good from occupancy levels and from market dynamics. Some markets are requiring this new development. Mexico City and Guadalajara are requiring bigger footprints, if you may. And we see some clients that are taking decisions regardless of the indecision on USMCA. So it's a little bit of both, and some markets are getting this type of traction. I don't know, Hector, if you want to add anything. Hector Ibarzabal: Yes. I think that leading companies, they do understand that this uncertainty will be or is already the new normal. And they have operational needs. So they are commencing to move forward important projects, I would say, understanding that this condition will not necessarily be defined automatically by the execution of the USMCA whenever it happens. So I think that the leading trends from important customers are going to be itself a confident sign to the remainder companies to keep on moving. Mexico fundamentals are strong, location, supply chain, availability of labor, and that's going nowhere. So we're confident about the future, even though we need to surpass these volatility times that we're currently living. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Alejandra Obregon with Morgan Stanley. Alejandra Obregon: Hector, thank you for all the learnings and collaboration over the years. And I guess my very best wishes to all the entire team for what's coming next. So my question is a little bit perhaps a follow-up on the prior 2 questions. If you can perhaps elaborate on these leasing spreads and incremental demand on the margin, whether it's more visible in any particular market, especially on the manufacturing ones, whether you're growing more constructive in any of these markets on a given particular driver? So that would be my first question. And if I can double-click on that same question, but for the non-core portfolio, whether you're seeing any, I'm going to say, upside or downside risks for the assets that you have inside of the non-core portfolio? Federico Cantú: Thank you, Alejandra, for your question. This is Federico Cantú. So as far as leasing spreads, we don't break them out per market, but we have very healthy spreads across all our markets and especially in our consumption markets, Mexico City being a standout. So as Jorge mentioned, we expect to continue to harvest that -- our mark-to-market at 33% over the coming quarters. And even without any rent growth, we still have that opportunity. As our teams continue to leverage our customer experience, our locations, top quality product, that is something that our teams are very good at doing. And as it relates to the non-core portfolio, as was mentioned, we have had very good activity. Our teams are close to our customers. We had good leasing activity. We had good retention as well as we -- our mark-to-market is still also positive in those markets where there is activity. And so again, we feel good about that portfolio as well to continue to add value over time. Hector Ibarzabal: Let me highlight, Ale, what is happening in the non-core portfolio. Somehow, I mentioned it in my opening remarks. We have been able to increase in renewing contracts on the Terra portfolio 45.2% rents. There is no way that, that portfolio is not creating value when you have this type of re-leasing activity. So we are confident that the differentiation that Prologis has on making the right attention to the customer, providing the service and doing the right CapEx in the facility, plus all the other initiatives like clean energy that we're providing represents a real differentiator that allow us to be always on top of competitors regarding our leasing conditions. Our portfolio is gaining value. Development cost is not decreasing. So we are very confident and we understand well how much value we have created through Terrafina. And this is the main reason for us to have approached the following M&A transaction. We are confident that we will be able to replicate what we are doing and what we have done with Terrafina. Jorge Girault: And Ale, I don't want to make the answer more longer still, but to your question on the border markets and consumption markets. I mean if you look at the Page 12 of the supplemental financial information, you will see that market like Tijuana, which is a border market and has been softer, had almost a 72% increase in rent change and other market -- and Mexico City has almost 76%. So you can see how -- yes, the border markets are maybe softer, but the rent change depends on the venue of the -- the tenure of the lease agreement when you leased it at what levels and so on. So it's a mix of things, and we feel can harvest that. Operator: Thank you. The next question comes from the line of Piero Trotta with Citibank. Piero Trotta: Hector, wish you all the best for new phase and wish you luck and congratulations to Jorge as well. My question is regarding the better occupancy on the non-core portfolio, which improved to around 97%. I would like to understand what is driving this or was driven by disposition? And a question related to that as well is if tenants are becoming more price sensitive and migrating towards assets with lower rental rates? Or does the flight to quality trend remain intact? That's it. Federico Cantú: Thank you, Piero, for your question. So yes, we've had very good occupancy in our non-core portfolio. As I mentioned, our teams continue to stay close to our customers. We've had new leasing activity mostly in the Bajío region, and we've renewed important customers. So we feel good about our prospects, as we've mentioned, to continue to maintain and increase value in this portfolio. And as it relates to price, I want to highlight here the great quality of our buildings, as Hector mentioned, our investment in the properties, our top locations. We -- there is some of that flight to quality, as you mentioned, but also I would like to highlight the great job and the outstanding job our teams do on the ground to leverage our position and get to market rents and these lease spreads, which are phenomenal. So I'd like to again highlight that. And we do that across all our markets, leveraging our brand, our position and the great quality of the buildings that we have. Jorge Girault: And Piero, let me just -- this is Jorge, level-set on the question regarding the price on rent. Since IPO back in June 2014, we have lost maybe 9 tenants because of price increases. Rent is not the highest component of cost of our clients. Some have to take the decision because of M&A or other -- or they need more space or less space, whatever and we cannot deliver that. So that's an important fact. And again, the portfolio core or not non-core, it's a good portfolio. It's a good market. We treat everyone the same. But obviously, we will keep to our strategy. And this is one of the reasons that we have been keeping a good occupancy. It's not nuclear science. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next call comes from the line of [indiscernible] with Goldman Sachs. Unknown Analyst: Here. So first off, I want to thank Hector. Thank you for the partnership over the last few years. It's been very insightful for our franchise. And I wish you well in whatever the future brings to you. And for the rest of the team, Jorge and Ale, I wish success in your new roles. So I wanted to follow up on the non-core portfolio. I know that there's been a couple of questions, but just wanted to understand a few items about it. So today, it accounts about for 24% of your GLA, 20% of NOI. You mentioned that there's been numerous investments done, upside has been delivered. But as I recall previously, you mentioned that you intended to divest part, if not all of this portfolio. So is the intention now to retain it and continue to grow it? And if so, could we see meaningful upside considering that occupancy has already reached around 97%. Those are my questions. Jorge Girault: Thank you, Gerardo. This is Jorge. To answer your question in a summary manner is we will keep to our strategy of investing in 6 markets, [indiscernible] 3 border markets and 3 consumption markets that we have always had. We will eventually sell our non-core portfolio. That's what we have said. It will take some time, and we've been harvesting the quality of those assets in the good markets and increasing the rents. We have -- I mean, like Hector said, on the Terrafina portfolio, we grew the rents 45%. In the part that we want to sell, the number has been close to 40% on rent increase. So we have been creating value in this portfolio. It has been, at the end of the day, in hindsight, a good thing not to sell it for now. That doesn't mean that we won't. We will keep to our strategy. But we want to do it in time. And like Hector said in his commentary at the beginning, at the right time and to the right buyer. And this is why we are not guiding on disposition. That doesn't mean we won't sell. It will take us some time. There has been, as you know, a lot of noise in the market, and we will take our time to sell and bring value to our investors, but that's the plan. Operator: At this time, there are no further questions. Mr. Ibarzábal, I would like to turn the call back over to you. Hector Ibarzabal: Thank you very much. I really appreciate your attention. Your time is very valuable. For me, it has been an impressive journey. And the most outstanding thing that I have done in the past besides the results that we have commented is all the close relations and all the many friends that I have been able to gather along the way. I'm not going anywhere far. So I wish you all the best, and I'm pretty confident that the new team will do it even better than what I was able to do. Thank you very much, and see you soon, guys. Operator: Thank you. That concludes today's conference call. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning, ladies and gentlemen, and thank you for standing by. Welcome to Liberty Global's First Quarter 2026 Investor Call. This call and the associated webcast are the property of Liberty Global, and any redistribution, retransmission or rebroadcast of this call or webcast in any form without the express written consent of Liberty Global is strictly prohibited. [Operator Instructions] Today's formal presentation materials can be found under the Investor Relations section of Liberty Global's website at libertyglobal.com. [Operator Instructions] Page 2 of the slides details the company's safe harbor statement regarding forward-looking statements. Today's presentation may include forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, including the company's expectations with respect to its outlook and future growth prospects and other information and statements that are not historical facts. These forward-looking statements involve certain risks that could cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed or implied by these statements. These risks include those detailed in Liberty Global's filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission, including its most recently filed Forms 10-Q and 10-K as amended. Liberty Global disclaims any obligation to update any of these forward-looking statements to reflect any change in its expectation or in the conditions on which any such statement is based. I would now like to turn the call over to Mr. Mike Fries. Michael Fries: All right. Thanks, operator. Hello, everyone. I appreciate you joining the call today. As usual, Charlie and I will handle the prepared remarks and the presentation, and then I have my core leadership team on the call with me and on standby for Q&A as needed. We've got a lot of ground to cover, so I'm just going to jump right in on the first slide, which provides some key takeaways from the quarter. To begin with, we delivered strong operational performance, and we'll go through it all in a moment. But one big headline here, this was our fourth straight quarter of steady broadband improvement across each of our big 3 markets with fixed and mobile ARPUs remaining largely stable. Now Charlie will walk through how this translates into our financial results, but the punchline is, we will be confirming all of our 2026 guidance today. There are lots of reasons for this commercial momentum, including our multi-brand strategies, our network investments, AI implementations around personalization and churn and call centers. And we'll talk about all that a bit today. But really, what we'll do in our second quarter call is do a deeper dive on our AI initiatives. So stay tuned for that. Equally important for this audience is the fact that we are making real progress on the value unlock initiatives announced this past February. The acquisition of Vodafone's 50% stake in our Dutch JV is on track to close this summer, and we see no obstacles to getting that deal done on time. And that, of course, is just one of the main building blocks underlying our strategy to spin off our Benelux assets in the second half of next year. And I'll walk you through each of those building blocks in just a moment as well as the value we could and should create for you all by spinning off the Ziggo Group. Now quickly on Netomnia, that transaction in the U.K. is now officially in the regulatory process. And while the noise from 1 or 2 competitors has escalated recently, we're pretty confident this deal will be approved. It's a very positive development for the U.K. fiber market, which is in desperate need of rationalization, as you all know. And it's a great outcome for VMO2 for all the reasons we reviewed on the last call. And finally, you won't be surprised to hear that we are highly focused on capital allocation at the corporate level. Over the last 2 years, we brought our net corporate costs down by 75%. We talked about that on the last call. And we've articulated what we believe is a clear investment strategy around telecom and growth, and we strengthened our balance sheet. After funding the $1.2 billion needed to close the Vodafone transaction and executing on around $700 million of asset sales from our growth portfolio, we should end the year with around $1.5 billion of corporate cash. And as noted here on the slide, through April, we've generated around $300 million in proceeds. So we're sort of on our way. And then finally, just one quick remark on the broader telecom environment in Europe. As you would know, the sector has performed well in the last 12 months or so. That's driven in part by improved operational performance, reduced CapEx and a general rotation out of software and into industrials. You're all familiar with those trends. I would add to the list what appears to be an improving regulatory climate in Europe when it comes to telecom broadly and more specifically when it comes to consolidation. Now we await the formal release of the EU merger guidelines, for example, but these changes are expected to redefine the rules, and that's going to be a big positive together with an increasing commitment to sovereignty to our sector and the broader telecom industry. So I'm sure you're aware of that, but important to note. Now moving on to the next slide, let me start by saying that there will come a point in time when I don't need to put this chart in the deck. But for now, I think it's helpful to summarize our operating structure, specifically our 3 core pillars of value creation, Liberty Telecom, Liberty Growth and in the center Liberty Global itself and to highlight the strategies we're executing to create and deliver that value. Liberty Growth on the far right houses our portfolio of media, infra and tech investments totaling $3.4 billion today. And here, we're focused on rotating capital, investing in high-growth sectors with scale and tailwinds. We'll try to spotlight a few of those in each quarter. And today, we'll lay out the thesis for the experienced economy. In the center sits Liberty Global itself with $1.9 billion of cash and a team with decades of experience operating and investing in these businesses. And as we reported last quarter, we've restructured our operating model and reduced net corporate costs by 75% since 2024 to around $50 million this year. And these 2 asset pools alone, by the way, our cash and the market value of our growth investments, exceed the current price of our stock by around 30%, which means, of course, that everything in our core Liberty Telecom business on the left, nearly $22 billion of revenue, $8 billion of EBITDA and 4 incredible converged telecom champions are receiving no value at all on our stock. In fact, negative value, if you give us credit for our substantial reduction in corporate costs. Now as we said over and over and over, our primary goal here in Telecom to drive commercial momentum and importantly, to unlock value for shareholders. And that was the impetus behind our Sunrise spin-off, which you all know about and which we believe has worked extremely well for investors. And that's why in the last call, we described the formation of the Ziggo Group, a combination of our Benelux assets in Holland and Belgium and our intention to spin off our interest tax-free to shareholders in the second half of 2027. So where are we on that specific initiative? I referenced earlier the building blocks that form the foundation of our expected value unlock for the Ziggo Group. And you can see the most significant ones outlined on the left-hand side of the next slide. Let me just say that each of these steps, each of these blocks, if you will, are centered around strategic catalysts, free cash flow growth and deleveraging. And they each represent a foundational element of the value creation plan here. This is the primary blueprint we've been executing, of course, with dozens of overlays and work streams, but it should give you greater confidence and awareness of our plans here. Let's start with Belgium. The first step was, of course, separating Telenet from its fixed network, which is now a 2/3, 1/3 JV called Wyre. This restructuring accomplishes or has accomplished 4 key things. First, it isolates a significant fiber CapEx and debt capital needed to upgrade the HFC network in Flanders into an off-balance sheet vehicle. Second, it precipitated a comprehensive network cooperation agreement between Wyre and Telenet on one hand and Proximus and its fiber asset, Fiberklaar on the other hand, which I'm pleased to say was just signed yesterday and will result in a single network ours or theirs in about 75% of Flanders. That's a great, great outcome. Third, it creates a cleaner, more consumer and B2B focused Telenet, ServCo, with a significant free cash flow turnaround story supported by declining mobile CapEx and mostly AI-driven OpEx reductions. And then fourth, it facilitates a reduction in Telenet's leverage from both the rebalancing of debt between Wyre and Telenet and the sale of a portion of our stake in Wyre at a premium, by the way, which will be used to repay debt at Telenet. So really critical steps to getting where we want to be. Moving to the Netherlands. For me, the first strategic catalyst here was bringing in a new management team, one that could set the tone for a return to growth and for winning results in the Dutch market, and Stephen and his team have delivered exactly that. And the second strategic catalyst was, of course, reaching an agreement with Vodafone to buy their 50% stake in our Dutch JV. This deal, as I just said, is scheduled to close in less than 3 months. Now -- not only is that deal accretive from a financial point of view, but it strategically unlocks about EUR 1 billion in synergies we referenced and it provides the structural elements necessary to complete a tax-free spin-off next year. Each of these steps accelerates our commitment to reducing leverage at VodafoneZiggo, which we'll accomplish through asset sales, a return to EBITDA and free cash flow growth and synergies. Now on the top right of this slide, you can see a side-by-side of Sunrise and the combined Ziggo Group. If you look at 2025, the Ziggo Group is bigger. It's about 2 to 2.5x larger in revenue and EBITDA and a bit more profitable. But importantly, you'll see that in 2028, we're estimating free cash flow of around EUR 500 million and leverage of 4.5x, which presents a comparable financial profile to Sunrise when we spun it off in Q4 '24. The chart on the bottom right provides an illustrative bridge to the EUR 500 million of free cash flow, which is estimated to be EUR 120 million this year. And the biggest components of that, as you can see, are the nonrecurring nature of some costs this year in Holland, combined synergies, Telenet's mobile CapEx reduction and organic EBITDA growth. We think the Ziggo Group represents a compelling equity story and it's anchored around 4 selling points. Number one, this is a strong regional business with 2 of Europe's most rational telecom markets that are best-in-class brands. Number two, we have clear network strategies here with declining CapEx as 5G investments subside and fiber costs are moved off balance sheet in Belgium and a cost-efficient DOCSIS 4 rollout in Holland. So declining CapEx and great visibility to the network strategies. Number three, rising free cash flow and declining leverage, and that's supported by organic growth, synergies and EUR 1.2 billion to EUR 1.4 billion of local asset sales I've already described, towers, property, et cetera. And then number four, our commitment to pay dividends from free cash flow as we've done with Sunrise. So we have lots of work to do, but this plan and this path forward is clear for us, and we look forward to updating you each quarter on our progress. Now what does it all add up to? I'm sure many of you are wondering what sort of value creation do we think is achievable here. The chart on the next slide is actually simpler than it looks, but it moves left to right, and it demonstrates how we have and how we intend to create value through this unlocked strategy. Let's start on the far left. The day we announced our intention to spin off Sunrise in February 2024, our stock closed at $18. Of course, 9 months later, we completed the spin-off and using Sunrise's current stock price, we feel we delivered a tax-free dividend that's valued today at $13 per Liberty share. So together with our $12 stock, you get to $25 or about a 40% value appreciation in the last 14 months or so. So far, so good. About 2 months ago, we announced the second step in our value unlock strategy with our intention to consolidate Benelux and spin off the Ziggo Group in the second half of next year. So what might that be worth? And these numbers are illustrative. Lawyers, maybe, say that, of course. But if we -- if you move to the right and the third column, I think you'll see the answer. We believe a publicly listed Ziggo Group, if it were to trade at, let's say, the same implicit valuation of Sunrise today and essentially an 11.5% free cash flow yield could be worth up to $14 per Liberty share based upon the 2028 free cash flow estimate of EUR 500 million that we just discussed. And without debating the point, we believe this could be conservative. As you would know, many of our peers, KPN, Swisscom, Orange, Zegona, they trade at free cash flow yields of 5% to 7%, albeit with different leverage profiles. So let's stick with the 11.5% free cash flow yield. The primary question then is where will Liberty itself trade post spin. Remember, we believe that the entire Liberty Telecom Group has negative value on our stock today. We're around $4 per share despite our announced intentions regarding Ziggo, with our cash and growth assets worth $16 and our stock at $12, that's the only conclusion we can reach. Now to arrive at $14 post the Ziggo Group spin, we simply added our pro forma cash balance after the Vodafone deal and asset sales, together with the value of our remaining growth assets, including our residual stake in Wyre, and we get to $14. By the way, these numbers assume that the market continues to assign no equity value, that's 0 equity value to our remaining telecom businesses in the U.K. and Ireland. Of course, we think there is substantial equity value in these businesses, but we don't need to agree on that to get to these numbers. So to recap, if you follow the light blue boxes, from February '24, the day we announced our plan to spin off Sunrise to today, we created $7 on what was an $18 stock. So that's 40%, and we believe for those who had held on to the Liberty stock and the Sunrise stock, that number gets to 41% with the Ziggo Group spin. If you do the same thing with the dark blue boxes for those who bought their shares after the Sunrise spin-off, we think we can take $12 today to as much as $28 by the second half of next year when we spin the Ziggo Group. Now while there are no sure things in life and plenty to do between now and then, trust me, the building blocks we think are in place, and we feel good about the plans and these estimates here. Now one of the reasons for that good feeling is the progress Stephen and his team have made over the last 5 quarters. This next slide summarizes some of those initiatives and some of the progress beginning early last year when we repositioned broadband pricing, we changed the operating model and rejuvenated our campaigns, even expanded our footprint through the deal with Delta Fiber. As a result of that, we saw steady improvements right away in broadband, where we've been losing over 30,000 subscribers every quarter. Those changes continued into '26 when we rejuvenated the Ziggo brand with a new campaign, The Everything Network, that was supported by our UEFA rights, by the way, which we just extended. We also launched broadband into our no-frills flanker brand, bringing a simple and value-driven connectivity product to that critical segment. And you can see at the bottom right, the broadband net adds have been moving in the right direction for 4 straight quarters. In fact, our first quarter result was the best in 3 years, driven by all the initiatives I just referenced, pricing adjustments, new campaigns, product expansion and network improvements. And by the way, we have the largest reach of 2-gig broadband services in the country. And we just launched field trials with DOCSIS 4 in anticipation of launching 4 and 8 gig products later this year. So operationally, VodafoneZiggo is in great shape and improving, exactly what you want to see as we plan for a public listing next year. Now the next 2 slides summarize Q1 operating performance across our 4 markets. I'm going to do this quickly since the CEOs are on the call and they can provide color if needed. I think the main headline here is that we continue to see good broadband trends pretty much across the board and stable fixed and mobile ARPUs. Starting with VodafoneZiggo, like I just talked about, our broadband performance improved for the fourth consecutive quarter and postpaid mobile net adds also improved sequentially. We continue to invest in our fixed and mobile markets in Holland with both the Vodafone and Ziggo networks receiving outstanding awards in the Umlaut test. With ARPUs of nearly EUR 57 in fixed and EUR 18 in mobile staying steady, this has been a good outcome. Turning to Belgium. Telenet delivered its highest quarterly broadband result in 10 years, driven by successful cross-sell campaigns and strong performance with our BASE, our flanker brand there. Postpaid mobile results remain subdued in Belgium as the market is pretty competitive. And here, too, our base brand is outperforming, while both mobile ARPU at EUR 16 and fixed ARPU at EUR 63 remained largely stable ahead of upcoming price adjustments in Q2. Now turning to the U.K. on the next slide. Despite a market that remains highly competitive, Virgin Media O2 delivered a third straight quarter of broadband improvement with just 6,000 losses compared to 43,000 losses a year ago. And this was supported by strong commercial and retention initiatives and, of course, lower churn. Importantly, and despite pressure on the overall market pricing, here, our fixed ARPU remained relatively stable at GBP 46.50, supported by more and more personalized and AI-driven pricing. And with the Netomnia deal working its way through the regulatory process, we continue our fiber-to-the-home expansion with 8.7 million fiber homes available today. In U.K. mobile, we launched O2 Satellite. You might have seen that making us the first operator in the U.K. to switch on direct-to-device satellite connectivity. In addition, our mobile network transformation is progressing with new RAN upgrade agreements and the transfer of the second tranche of spectrum from Vodafone 3, that's hugely important to us. O2 now has the largest 5G stand-alone footprint in the U.K. Net postpaid losses of 60,000 were materially better than last quarter as churn from the Q4 price adjustment, we've talked about that, subsided, and ARPU of around GBP 17 was broadly stable. In Ireland, lastly, we continue to execute strategically with growth in wholesale and off-net traffic more than compensating for retail pressure on-net. Fixed retail ARPU of EUR 61 remained stable despite no price rise in '25. And importantly, our fiber rollout, this is critical, remains on track to be substantially complete in 2026, with nearly 20% of the retail base now taking a fiber product, and that will also drive free cash flow in 2027 and beyond. Now just one slide on our Liberty Growth portfolio, currently valued at $3.4 billion and centered around 4 key verticals you know: infrastructure and energy, technology and AI, services and, of course, media and sports. Our strategy here has been consistent for some time. We are exiting positions that are no longer strategic and using that capital to both invest in new opportunities as they arise and as needed, provide capital for transactions that will unlock value in our telecom assets. That second point is really important. Historically, we've divested investment positions totaling something like $1.6 billion since 2019, and we've targeted another $700 million in sale proceeds this year, of which, as I said, $300 million is already accounted for. Now a few comments on sports and live events. Of course, we're already invested heavily here through Formula E, but we also believe there are significant structural tailwinds that warrant us evaluating additional opportunities, and we're doing that. And these points are probably well known to all of you, I'm sure, but there's clearly a generational shift from physical goods to experiences, that's live events, sports, travel and entertainment. Many of these markets are fragmented and most are protected from AI disruption. So it's an interesting space. It's also a clear momentum in the sector, right? Just look at sports, global revenue in sports growing well in excess of GDP over the last 10 years and by almost everybody's estimation, poised to increase and accelerate from here. What's our right to play, you might be asking? Well, we know how to consolidate fragmented industries, both in telecom, but also we've been doing that for decades and recently with All3Media before exiting at a premium. We've got strong relationships across these sectors. Really, the deal flow is the easy part. And when you factor in our expertise in things like treasury, operations and technology, it's a pretty strong combination. And we have a good track record in sports, specifically with Formula E, the fastest-growing motorsport globally and one of only 8 global sports leagues, which is a great segue to my last slide. I always get excited when I talk about Formula E, sometimes too excited. But I think this moment is perhaps our biggest yet. Like over the last 10 years, and you've been following this, we have constantly innovated, investing significant energy and time in the car, the technology and the racing. Well, the wait is over. Last week at the [indiscernible] circuit in France, Formula E unleashed the next-generation race car, GEN4, we call it, and the motorsports world is still reverberating. First of all, you have to see it in person. Yes, it is a beast, but it's a beautiful, beautiful race car. The step-up in power and performance is incredible. 600 kilowatts of power represents a 71% increase in base output over the current GEN3 Evo car. The acceleration is insane, 0 to 100 kilometers in 1.8 seconds. That's meaningfully faster than an F1 car and top speed in excess of 335 kilometers an hour, nearly 210 miles per hour. We estimate -- because it's an estimate at this point, that lap times will decrease by 10 seconds on average from the current generation car. That's a lifetime in racing. It's also the first single-seater race car with active all-wheel drive all the time, which will provide incredible acceleration in torque out of the turns. And of course, it meets all of our expectations from a sustainability point of view. It's made from at least 20% recyclable materials. It's 98.5% recyclable itself and allows us to continue claiming that our race-related carbon footprint for the entire championship would fit into F1 team, by the way. Speaking of F1, yes, we might have taken a few shots at them since the GEN4 launch. It might be deserved also, you're obviously aware of the issues they're dealing with currently and that they're going through with the hybrid engine. And it just reinforces our view that going halfway on anything does not make history. And we love the position that we're in technologically, competitively from an entertainment and motorsports point of view. But hey, just don't take my word for it. In the next slide, you can see -- go ahead and scan social media, the motor sports press. There is widespread consensus. I know I'm quoting this GEN4 car is a "monster." It's "ushering" in the most extreme era of electric cars, and it's expected to change perceptions of Formula E forever. Even Max gives it a thumbs up, as you can see on the bottom right. So anyway, super excited about GEN4 car in front of the E. And with that, Charlie, I'll turn it over to you. Charles Bracken: Thanks, Mike. My first slide sets out the Q1 financial results for our Benelux companies. Now as you can see on this slide, we're now presenting Wyre's financial performance for the first time separate to Telenet to give investors clarity on their respective financials before we complete the full separation of the 2 companies and their capital structures later this year. VodafoneZiggo reported a revenue decline of 1.8% in Q1, driven by a lower customer base and ongoing repricing impact. Now this was partially offset by the price indexation and higher revenue from Ziggo Sports and adjusted EBITDA declined 6.4%, driven by higher marketing costs and some incremental investments in network resilience and service reliability, in line with our guidance in March. At Telenet, revenue was broadly stable in Q1, reflecting our strategic decision not to renew Belgium football rights, which was partly offset by a strong broadband performance, which was driven by effective cross-selling into the video customer base. Adjusted EBITDA grew 8.9%, driven by lower content costs following the exit from the football broadcasting rights. And at Wyre, revenue declined by 1%, impacted by the implementation of a new pricing model, which was partially offset by strength in wholesale growth. Adjusted EBITDA declined by 4.6%, and this was driven by an investment in build capability as we start to accelerate Wyre's fiber build-out capability. Turning to the U.K. and Ireland. Virgin Media O2 delivered a total service revenue decline of 3% on a guidance basis. Now this was impacted by competitive pressure in the consumer fixed market and lower B2B revenue as the newly rebranded O2 business rationalizes its product portfolio to support its long-term growth in the mobile segment. This was partially offset by wholesale revenue growth, which was supported by growth in MVNO revenue and adjusted EBITDA declined by 3.4% as a result of the lower total service revenues and a noncash provision for legal matters recorded in the quarter. This was partially offset by cost reduction initiatives. At Virgin Media Ireland, revenues declined by 1.4% in Q1, impacted by intense competition in the consumer fixed and mobile markets as well as a decline in advertising revenues at VMTV. This was partially offset by a strong wholesale performance. Meanwhile, adjusted EBITDA declined by 7.1%, driven by these top line pressures and was also impacted by a one-off benefit in Q1 last year. Turning to the next slide. We remain committed to our disciplined capital allocation model as we rotate capital into higher growth investments and strategic transactions. Starting on the top left, Telenet reported EUR 10 million of free cash flow during the quarter and is expected to deliver at least EUR 20 million of free cash flow for the full year. Additionally, Liberty Corporate delivered adjusted EBITDA of negative $2 million, putting us firmly on track to achieve our full year 2026 guidance of negative $50 million. Turning to the bottom left. CapEx has meaningfully stepped down at Telenet in Q1 on a guidance basis, driven by the 5G upgrade nearing completion at the end of 2025 and lower spend on digital platforms. Capital intensity remains elevated at the other OpCos, reflecting investments in our fixed networks and also 5G upgrades. Moving to the Liberty Growth walk in the top right. The fair market value of our growth portfolio remained broadly stable versus 2025 year-end at $3.4 billion. This was driven by modest investments in AtlasEdge, egg Power, NextFibre and EdgeConneX, offset by the partial disposals of our ITV and some of our EdgeConneX stake as well as a positive fair market value adjustment at EdgeConneX, along with the recent decision to move Liberty Blume out of our Corporate & Services segment and into the growth portfolio. Turning to our cash walk on the bottom right. We ended the quarter with a consolidated cash balance of $1.9 billion. Q1 distributable free cash flow was impacted by high CapEx levels related to the fiber-to-the-home rollouts at Wyre and Virgin Media Ireland. In addition to working capital movements at Telenet, that's worth noting, we continue to anticipate that Wyre will draw on its stand-alone facility following BCA approval, and will fully repay the short-term funding provided by Liberty Global consolidated cash by Telenet. As a reminder, we are aiming to end 2026 with around $1.5 billion of corporate cash despite the expected outflows associated with the incremental Vodafone stake and also, to a lesser extent, the Netomnia acquisition. And finally, turning to our full year guidance targets for 2026. We are reconfirming all guidance metrics of VMO2, VodafoneZiggo and Telenet as well as our guidance for corporate costs. And that concludes our prepared remarks for Q1, and I'd like to hand over to the operator for Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Carl Murdock-Smith with Citigroup. Carl Murdock-Smith: That's great. Two questions, please. Firstly, I wanted to ask on Virgin Media O2 about the wholesale service revenue growth. In the release, you say that, that included GBP 15 million of fixed pre-enablement and installation income. Am I right in saying that, that increase was due to a change in accounting treatment, meaning that it's now recognized as revenue, whereas previously it wasn't? I recognize that it's low margin, but that has provided almost a 1% boost to service revenue overall in Q1. So my question is, did you know about that change in treatment when you issued the guidance in February? Or does it provide potential upside to the revenue guide of 3% to 5% decline, particularly as you come in at the very high end of that range in Q1? And then secondly, I just wondered if you could expand slightly on the O2 satellite news and your kind of level of excitement around that? How much customer interest are you anticipating? And more broadly, just what is your view on the role of satellite in telecoms as a complement or competitor going forward? Michael Fries: [indiscernible] go over to Lutz first, but let me just say that as we look at the satellite space generally, we think, of course, satellite broadband, Starlink broadband has a role to play on the planet. There will be plenty of people who will utilize that broadband service and need that broadband service. We believe the direct device mobile opportunity is far more limited by technology, by market access, but we do like the idea of having a satellite service attached to our mobile network. We think it adds just another level of service and commitment to customers. And of course, the U.K. is the first market to where we have done that. So Lutz, I'll turn it over to you for satellite and then someone -- Charlie, I guess, will answer the wholesale question. Lutz? Lutz Schuler: Yes. Carl, so we are very satisfied with the launch of O2 Satellite, not disclosing numbers. But the fact that we have, at the moment, not the iPhone available, we will have it available in a week from now, and we have already quite high demand is leading us to the assumption that this is really a reliable service, an interesting and attractive service for customers. And also in combination with our improved mobile network, our 5G stand-alone coverage, we are really creating the right perception for customers, which means we have the most reliable mobile network from everybody in terms of coverage and data speed. And so therefore, we are very happy with that. Michael Fries: Charlie, do you want to address the wholesale? Charles Bracken: Just on the wholesale revenue, I mean, I think it was basically in budget, and that is a very difficult business to forecast by its very nature because it's -- but I think it was a pretty strong quarter. Lutz, do you have anything to add on that? Lutz Schuler: I mean I can give some color, right? I mean this -- I think, Carl, you're right. It was not -- we didn't account it the same way before. The reason for that was not to beef up our service revenue. And as you see, right, we are coming currently more at the upper end of the guidance. The reason for that is, that will be a growing and a continuous service revenue stream because we will more and more connect customers either from other networks or from other ISPs. So therefore, when you look at that way, I think that change makes sense. But as you said yourself, right, we are coming in at the upper end of our guidance. And you could drag that number a little bit. It is [indiscernible] of it if you want to accrue for it, but it won't change anything in the guidance. And I mean, we wouldn't change it. It's only one quarter, but so far, we are happy with what we have. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Polo Tang with UBS. Polo Tang: I have 2. The first one is just on U.K. competitive dynamics for Lutz. So could you maybe talk through how the recent price rises in April have landed because the percentage increase is quite large, and I think it's double digit for most subscribers. So I'm just wondering if there's been any change in terms of churn. Separately, your postpaid mobile losses are continuing. So how optimistic are you that this can stabilize through the year? Second question is just a broader question on use of cash going forward. So you've talked a lot in this -- in the prepared remarks about ventures and the focus on sports and media. I think press reports suggested you were considering buying a European NBA franchise. So are you pivoting the group more towards media and sports? Or is the plan still to break up the group and return cash to shareholders? So any color on that would be great. Michael Fries: Sure. I'll start with that, Polo. They're not mutually exclusive. That's point one. Point two is our primary commitment, and I think it should be clear, but I'll repeat it here, is to create value for shareholders. And we believe, as I've said a few different times, the biggest opportunity to do that is to highlight and find ways to illuminate value in our telecom business. So that is our priority. That is number one. And as I mentioned a moment ago in my remarks, when we look at the use of capital, that factors in squarely to that -- to the strategy. So as I said, we will use capital and rotate capital into growth opportunities should they be presented to us, but also into the telecom business if it helps to unlock value for shareholders. And then I think I went on to say that second one is an important point. So that's the first part of the answer. I'd say, secondly, we are opportunistically looking at and being presented with sources of opportunities. Sorry, somebody has got this -- somebody is ringing. Anyway, with opportunities in the sports space and in the media space generally. And there's a reason why the portfolio was $3.4 billion large because we have been very active as an investor. And maybe it's been quiet, and we don't spend as much time on our earnings calls doing it, but it's arguably the biggest component of our stock price today are the investments that we've assembled strategically and purposely over the last, let's say, 5 to 7 years. And we're divesting ourselves of a huge chunk of those investments and rightly so because we need cash to do the things we've been talking about today. And then we will opportunistically look at new investments if they make sense. But don't get me wrong, we are committed to the unlock strategy, and that is priority #1. Lutz, do you want to talk about competitive nature of U.K.? Lutz Schuler: Yes. Polo, so in mobile, you see in our numbers that we have been shrinking in service revenue around 3% but this is before the price rise. And right, a reason for the net losses in Q1 was the higher price rise we decided for. Now we are seeing this landing very well. We have the first month of the second quarter behind us, Polo. And our explanation for that is that those who didn't want to pay it less and -- before that has materialized. Now we don't see any spike in churn. And obviously, we also have to wait for May, but the findings here are so far so good. On the fixed side, the competitive situation is also unchanged, I would say. So all are very aggressive, as we all know, and also other competitors have to follow. But here, remember, I said at the last call, we have to optimize our prevention machine as we used to do it with the retention machine, which we have done now. So therefore, we are quite proud about the fact that we have almost stabilized -- managed to stabilize our fixed customer base in Q1, and we expect something like that in the future. And yes, it comes at the cost of some ARPU which is 1.6%. But in the scheme of things, that is a balanced approach. And let me finish with -- remind you when we've given the guidance, right, 70%, 80% of the service revenue decline is attributed to our expectation on the fixed consumer service revenue market. And that means that we are planning for a recovery in mobile service revenue, Polo, and we are going to see this as we speak from the price rise in Q2. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Robert Grindle with Deutsche Bank. Robert Grindle: I see the progress on the long-form agreement with Proximus, but approval for the collaboration is still outstanding. What happens if you're delayed for another 6 to 9 months? Do you progress the build of planned? Or is the project pushed back? And I think Charlie said the Wyre revenues were impacted by a new pricing model. Could the Wyre Telenet ServCo financials change from here? Should there be a change in the wholesale rates associated with any approval? Or will this financial base you've given us now be effectively unchanged? Michael Fries: Thanks, Robert. We've got John Porter on the line, who's worked tirelessly on this Proximus transaction [indiscernible] outstanding result for Telenet and for us. Do you want to speak to the regulatory process from here, John? Unknown Executive: Sure. Well, we've been in lockstep with the Competition Authority and the BIPT over the last 2 years. They are right up to date on every aspect of the transaction between ourselves and Proximus. We have very positive inclination from them and believe that they will expedite the final review of the transaction. There is then a necessary 30-day review at the European Commission. That is not an approval process. It's just a chance for them to reflect on the transaction and see if it has broader implications. So we are cautiously optimistic that we will complete this transaction over the next, say, 6 to 8 weeks. And it's a virtual impossibility that it would go longer than that because I think we'd all down tools. But I think that we are -- the main critical path has been achieved between ourselves and Proximus and everybody is ready to get going. Charles Bracken: And let me just step in on the -- I'll just say, we're separating the 2 companies. There is a little bit of tweaking. For example, there is a bit of movement on the wholesale rate to Telenet, and there's also some management fees that are being reevaluated. So I think we'll get a more stable view on the numbers in Q2, but I would say it's pretty good news for the ServCo. I'd also say on the financing side, just a real shout out to our treasury team, the $4.35 billion of underwritten financing that's clearly in place and we could draw has -- now been fully syndicated, which is a great success, very successfully syndicated, and with the completion of the BCA approval, we'll be drawing that down and indeed paying some of the money that we decided it was more efficient to bridge from our balance sheet rather than draw revolvers to do so. So I think it's all around good news for the eventual Ziggo Group spin because I think the Telenet part of the equation is very much on track for the free cash flow target we set them in 2028. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Joshua Mills with BNP Paribas. Joshua Mills: Two from my side. One was just going back to Slide 6, where you lay out the strategic plan for the new Ziggo Group. My question is around the leverage. So there's a lot of moving parts there. Can you just remind us what the pro forma leverage position of this business would be today if you put it together? And how much you're expecting to bring in the Wyre stake sale and then the other asset sales to make up the EUR 1.2 billion to EUR 1.4 billion. I just want to understand the assumptions underpinning that, what you're at today and then how you get down to the 4.5x. That would be the first question. And then the second question is just around the Dutch business. We've seen continued improvement in the broadband performance. Can you give a bit more color as to what's driving that on the customer side on perception? Is it people happier with price? Is it, that they have noticed a change in the network quality? Any detail you have would be great. And as a final add-on, your competitors have highlighted potential benefits from the data breach at Odido. I think in the Q1 and probably going into Q2, Q3 net add trends there. How much of an impact have you seen from that on your own business in Q1 and Q2? Michael Fries: Thanks, Joshua. Look, Stephen will prepare answers to the Dutch questions. On the asset sales, the EUR 1.2 billion to EUR 1.4 billion, those consist primarily of towers and technical facilities, et cetera. And we're not really providing a breakdown of those numbers today because we're in active sale process. So we're not going to provide expectations or estimates of what we think that is. But we think that's the range of total combined asset sales, which would be used to pay down debt. Charlie, do you want to address the pro forma leverage? It really depends on what point in time you look for that number and what's happened with the Wyre stake. Do you want to address that, Charlie? Charles Bracken: Yes. I mean it's actually a very complicated question because clearly, the Belgian assets that are going to go into the Ziggo Group do not include because there will be a full separation of the Wyre assets. With the $4.35 billion of underwritten and now syndicated debt, we will therefore be paying down debt at Telenet or Telenet ServCo, but Telenet will be what we'll call it going forward. And it remains because of the investment profile, Ziggo -- but Ziggo is relatively highly elevated. So there's a lot of moving parts in answering that question. I would just reconfirm what Mike said is we're very confident in a path to get down to the -- around 4.5x by 2028. It does depend on some asset sales, but we feel pretty good about those being delivered. And with those asset sales and indeed continuing organic EBITDA growth, particularly in Holland, I think we should be there or thereabouts on target. I'm very happy to take it offline to get some of the detail because there's a lot of moving parts about why... Michael Fries: And it's in the low to mid -- yes, the combined group is going to be in the low to mid-5s. Telenet itself will be in the mid-4s. VodafoneZiggo will be higher, and then we'll start layering in the various deleveraging steps, additional steps as well. So there's a clear path, but perhaps in next call, Joshua, we'll give you a little bit more detail. But that is the general trend. Joshua Mills: That's great. And this isn't assuming any injection of cash from the -- sorry, there's no assumption of... Charles Bracken: [indiscernible] no cash from corporate, but I think it is important to note that we are putting our money where our mouth is. There's no distributions to Liberty Global in terms of equity distributions. We're reinvesting the free cash flow of Holland back in the business this year and indeed in Belgium. So that is a commitment to our bondholders and also to the fact that we are very confident in this growth profile. Do you want to answer the question? Stephen van Rooyen: Yes. And in terms of the operational performance of the broadband business -- yes, can you hear me? Yes. So in terms of the operational performance of the broadband business over the last 12 months, if you follow the story, we've done a number of very clear interventions. The first is -- we got our pricing right for the broadband products that we're selling. We were mispriced in the marketplace. We fixed that a year ago. When we talk about the back book repricing, we're pleased with the progress we've made on that. You haven't seen that in the ARPU. So we've managed that, I think, pretty well. Second thing we've done is we've gotten top of churn. We've been much more proactive in how we manage our customer base, which I think has had an effect on bringing churn down. We're now down 3 points year-on-year. We've invested more in marketing, by repositioning the business. The business was underspending on marketing and was out of sync with how, in my view, connectivity should be sold. We've invested, as you saw, in upgrading the speeds of the network. So you've seen us launch with the only 2 -- we're the only national 2-gigabit service. So we've taken speed as a headwind off the table for us. And then more generally, I think we've done a pretty good job of just tightening how we take the business to market. And you've seen that flow through sequentially each quarter as each of these initiatives have landed. And we have a series of initiatives coming through the rest of 2026, which we anticipate to continue to help us with the momentum behind the story. Unknown Executive: The Odido question, Stephen? Stephen van Rooyen: I'm sorry, I missed the Odido question. Can you repeat that? Michael Fries: The question was, are you seeing any benefit from their cyber attack? Stephen van Rooyen: Yes. It happened late in the quarter. It happened around week 10. So we saw some impact from that, but it's -- we didn't see a lot of it in the quarter. Because of the size of the mobile base -- we felt a bit more of it in the mobile base. But nothing that I think is material in the Q1 results because it only represented a handful of weeks. Joshua Mills: Great. And -- I mean I was more talking about the Q2 results. Obviously, it happened later in the first quarter, but are you seeing any impact so far in Q2? Stephen van Rooyen: No, we're happy with our progress on Q2 so far, but it's quite early. I have to come back to you when we do the Q2 results in a couple of months. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of James Ratzer with New Street Research. James Ratzer: I had 2 really both around Belgium. So in Telenet, you obviously had a very good quarter in terms of broadband net adds. And I'd love you can just give a bit more color behind what's driving that? Is that now growth out of footprint in Wallonia? Is that coming on your kind of BASE brand within Flanders? Or is it something else? I'd be interested to kind of get just a bit more color on the drivers there of broadband subs growth. And then secondly, just going back to the point that was raised earlier about Wyre revenue growth, which was down year-on-year in Q1. Is that a kind of one-off for this quarter, Charlie, you were mentioning around pricing and it goes back to growth in the following quarters. I'd just love to understand a bit more about the kind of dynamics there between kind of P and Q because I've been thinking that with kind of pricing there, we should see Wyre as a top line growth company. Michael Fries: John, do you want to take the Belgium question? Unknown Executive: Yes, I can take it. So on the first -- on the broadband, the BAU has been strong, particularly in the BASE brand, and their growth is about 50-50 between the Telenet footprint and growth in the South. So we are steadily growing and that growth in the South is increasing incrementally. There is a, what will be a year-long enhancement of that growth as we migrate out of DVB-C and into full IP for our video distribution. So we are the last operator in the market to have DVB-C where you don't require Internet to get television, but we are shutting that down over the next year. So we're expecting to see continued strong growth. But as you can see, the last -- the quarter ending '25 and the quarter -- the first quarter of the year, very strong, and those are the main drivers. On the Wyre revenue, there, we implemented a wholesale deal, a new wholesale deal on the HFC, which is making -- essentially structuring the higher speed tiers to be more accessible. The wholesale price is going down a little bit, and that's what you're seeing flowing through. That is -- will be part of the overarching deal done with Proximus, and we'll be able to give you more detail on that down the road. But the drop will not continue to drop, but it is the new HFC wholesale pricing. James Ratzer: So from those new prices, do prices then rise with inflation from this slightly lower level looking into 2027, '28? Unknown Executive: There is an inflationary component to both the fiber wholesale and the HFC wholesale. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Matthew Harrigan with StoneX. Matthew Harrigan: This is very much a contextual question rather than kind of blocking and tackling valuation anomalies. But you made a quick reference to more benign regulatory environment in your markets. But what's even more interesting on a macro basis is the emphasis on your industrial base and defense. And clearly, telecom is a vital pivot in defense. Is there any possibilities for your telecom business or I guess, particularly your venture portfolio in that end, I'm sure Charlie [indiscernible] to be manufacturing drones, but it still feels like something that could be an interesting tailwind, particularly since you're involved in so many areas of verticals? Michael Fries: Matthew, listen, the whole sovereignty debate, it's no longer a debate. It's a verifiable conviction. It's net positive for us in the telecom space. Now we won't all benefit equally, but every telecom player will benefit from the European Union and the countries within the European Union's focus with their own cybersecurity, their own data protection, their own data centers, their own AI infrastructure. So inevitably, whether it's AtlasEdge or our investments in EdgeConneX on the infrastructure side in our Liberty Growth portfolio, whether it's our OpCos themselves and their ability to provide services and B2B services and connectivity to governments and others, I think it's a net positive for telcos in Europe, which is why I mentioned it along with the loosening regulatory framework, which I think will also be a net positive. We may or may not be part of any of that consolidation, but we know that consolidation itself brings benefits to customers as well as operators and investors. So I think it's a real positive step. In terms of defense itself, we're not -- unlike perhaps some of our peers who are more closely aligned with the government, we are not involved in any specific defense type investment opportunities or infrastructure. But if we were approached, we would certainly consider it if it was consistent with our overall strategy. I don't see us veering off, if you will, into that. But -- does that answer your question, Matt? Matthew Harrigan: Absolutely. Operator: Out next question comes from the line of Ulrich Rathe with Bernstein Societe Generale Group. Ulrich Rathe: Two questions. First one is, Mike, you talked about the improving regulatory climate with regards to consolidation. Other management teams in the sector have flagged mixed signals they perceived to come out of Europe. So could you talk through what specifically you have in mind there, what insights or uses you have to share [indiscernible] more positive assessment? And the second question is on the EUR 1 billion synergies that you talked about in Ziggo. Can you talk about the sort of rough makeup of that in terms of operation and other source of synergies? Michael Fries: On the synergies point, I don't know if we've been specific, so I'm going to pause. But typically, you wouldn't be surprised to learn that it's consisting of 3 or 4 key line items. There's a financial synergy. That's more, I would say, a free cash flow type synergy from -- that we haven't -- well, from taxes essentially, there's operating costs that we think are achievable and we can create more efficiencies around. There's procurement and CapEx type synergies. So it's not going to be -- and when we get closer to legal day 1, we'll clearly provide more detail to you. Right now, we're still in the midst of closing the deal. But there's lots of things we can be doing and will be doing in those 2 operations and within and among them to create those synergies. And if I had to put my team on the spot right now, they'd say that's probably a low number. On the regulatory side, we did just get the EU merger guidelines released, and they are quite positive, at least in comparison to the kind of posture and position that the European Union would take previously when it came to in-market consolidation, right? I mean they're looking at a much more, I guess, moderate and pragmatic approach, and they're seeing that benefits could certainly accrue for mergers versus just always seeing the negative in those mergers. There's always been a structural bias against scale. And now they're seeing -- actually scale could increase investment, could increase innovation. And it's actually spelled out in the document that was released recently. So that to us is when it's in writing, if it's just a speech, I don't give that much credit. But when they put it in writing as they have with these new EU merger guidelines, that is a -- that is a positive step. Now it needs to be put to the test, and there will be plenty of deals that will put it to the test soon, I imagine. But never before have they written down in black and white, the sort of statements that we're reading today in terms of -- which are consistent with the arguments we've been making that consolidation in market is the first step to repair in European telecom space. Operator: Our last question comes from the line of David Wright with Bank of America. David Wright: Yes, last question. So a couple, please, guys. Just on the -- I guess it's for Ziggo, but DOCSIS 4.0, I think you may have said, Mike, that there are some trials ongoing. If we could just get some estimates of maybe the sort of trajectory of commercial launch for 4.0 in Holland. When do you expect the first sort of significant retail launch, et cetera? And is it something that you think you could even price a little as you move into the real sort of mega tiers of speed? And then the second question, maybe a little more conceptual. We're observing a lot of discussion around the kind of InfraCo, ServCo split, and you guys have obviously sort of embraced that. And there's obviously a clear sort of capital allocation justification and the ability to separate the 2 businesses that are quite structurally different. But I just wondered, does having a separate InfraCo make a more agile ServCo in terms of just day-to-day operations? Is the business just more able to respond and sort of change shape in the sort of digital age? It's a little more conceptual. Mike, if you have anything to add on that, I'd appreciate it. Michael Fries: Sure, sure. Stephen jump in here if I get it wrong, but I believe our 4- and 8-gig trials are the latter part of the year, maybe even late Q3, Q4. But what we did was get the field trials underway to demonstrate that it works. It works well, that the technology we're using is really state-of-the-art even in relation to the U.S. operators. But as we get closer to going public in the latter part of this year, then we'll have more information, but it's happening. And we think it's going to be a big positive for the market and for our business for sure. On the ServCo side. Look, I mean, Belgium is the test. What does it do when you end up taking the fixed network, you still own the mobile network, but taking the fixed network and putting it into a separate entity, I think, and John will agree, I'm sure it forces you to be more efficient, more agile and your margins change, all of a sudden, there's a wholesale fee in your P&L that you have to account for. In principle, Telenet will continue to be a very competitive brand and a very competitive B2C company and B2B company. It's -- with respect to its network, its fixed network, it will be renting instead of owning that network. But the relationship that's developed with Wyre is highly integrated, highly -- with mutual benefits, both directions. And so on balance, I think -- and this is the only place we've done it, it really is Belgium. I think on balance, and John can chime in, I think it does create a bit more energy in that ServCo, a bit more focus on margins and competition with a little less to worry about and a slightly better CapEx profile. And that CapEx profile frees up free cash. Telenet will generate significant free cash here shortly as it has, and we'll have to figure out how to reinvest that free cash, whether it's deleveraging or in actually new products and services. But anything more to add to that, John? Unknown Executive: Yes, a bit. I mean the CapEx we are spending, we are now concentrating on customer experience. I mean we pivoted our strategy, obviously, away from network and product differentiation because we have to, into customer experience. And the timing is right because, of course, with a lot of AI initiatives around the company and a new greenfield CRM platform, the focus is well and truly on straight-through digital journeys for our customers, which delivers better experience and a better bottom line. So it's been -- I think I -- certainly, your hypothesis is valid. Michael Fries: Listen, we appreciate everybody joining us on the call. It's been a good -- thanks, David. It's been a good start to the year. I hope you agree, and we're really encouraged by the progress that we're making. And trust me, we are laser-focused on value creation and value unlock, starting, of course, in the Benelux, where we're not only performing well, but the strategic road map. And as I point out, the building blocks are all in place. So we'll keep you abreast and updated on those things, and we'll speak to you soon. Thanks, everybody. Have a great weekend. Operator: Thank you. That will conclude today's conference call. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect your lines.
Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for standing by, and welcome to the Pizza Pizza Royalty Corp.'s Earnings Call for the First Quarter of 2026. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this conference is being recorded on May 1, 2026. I will now turn the call over to Christine D'Sylva, CFO. Please go ahead. Christine D'Sylva: Thank you. Good afternoon, everyone, and welcome to Pizza Pizza Royalty Corp.'s Earnings Call for the First Quarter ended March 31, 2026. Joining me on the call today is Pizza Pizza Limited's President and Chief Executive Officer, Paul Goddard. Just a quick note, our discussion today will contain forward-looking statements that may involve risks relating to future events. Actual events may differ materially from the projections discussed today. All forward-looking statements should be considered in conjunction with our cautionary language in the earnings press release and the risk factors included in our annual information form. Please refer to our earnings press release and the MD&A in the Investor Relations section of our website for a full reconciliation of other disclosures related to non-IFRS measures mentioned on this call. As a reminder, analysts are welcome to ask questions after the prepared remarks. Portfolio managers, media and shareholders can contact us after the call. I'll now turn the call over to Paul for a business update. Paul Goddard: Thank you, Christine, and good afternoon, everyone. We appreciate you joining our call. This afternoon, we released our results for the First Quarter of 2026, which you can find posted on our website. The overall macroeconomic conditions remained challenging through the first quarter of 2026. We saw the impact on consumer confidence, spending and demand, all of which negatively impacted our retail sales, specifically traffic. In the first quarter, our overall same-store sales growth was actually negative 4.1%. Pizza Pizza restaurants were down 4.3%, while Pizza 73 restaurants were down 2.7%. Beyond the current macroeconomic impact on sales, the impact of last year's nonrecurring sales tax holiday was also felt at both brands. So while consumer confidence remains low, businesses continue to face rising costs and ongoing uncertainty. In this environment, we are focused on controlling what we can, strengthening our product offering, further expanding our footprint across Canada and driving operational discipline. Starting with product offerings. Our core pizza category remains resilient, supported offerings at all price points. And while value continues to be critical, staying top of mind through innovation is equally important. Our innovation pipeline allows us to attract new customers, encourage trade-up within our existing mix through premium offerings and deepen overall brand engagement. This quarter, following the success of the Volcano Dipper Pizza at Pizza 73, we rolled out the product at Pizza Pizza. This unique, ownable new product provided us with the opportunity to showcase Pizza Pizza and our food in a fun and playful narrative while enforcing -- reinforcing our gift leadership position. We also recently introduced a $5 Meal Deal slice and drink combo in late March to strengthen our walk-in channel and compete with other QSRs offering entry-level value meals. We saw immediate improvements in both sales and traffic within this channel, which is exciting. We remain focused on delivering strong value to our customers, knowing that we're competing for a share of increasingly constrained consumer spending. Turning to our restaurant network. In terms of restaurant development, I'm pleased to share that we started the year stronger than we have in the last 5 years. And as a reminder, with over 800 restaurants from coast to coast, we have more points of convenience than any other QSR pizza chain in the country. During the quarter, we opened 6 traditional and 3 nontraditional Pizza Pizza locations and closed 1 traditional and 1 nontraditional Pizza 73 restaurant. Our new traditional restaurants span the country with openings in BC, Manitoba, Ontario, Quebec and 2 in Newfoundland. And as mentioned on previous calls, our business is driven by 2 revenue streams. First, our traditional restaurant network, which generates 90% of our Royalty Pool sales; and secondly, our nontraditional and special event locations, which typically generate the remaining 10%. Our nontraditional segment is currently facing some headwinds, particularly locations within colleges and universities where lower attendance tied to international student policies stemming from reduced immigration, et cetera, has resulted in reduced operating hours and overall sales. But looking ahead, we continue to see growth opportunities across our network. At the same time, we are taking a more disciplined approach, carefully selecting locations and formats to ensure long-term profitability, particularly in the context of rising costs. As I close out my comments, we expect us to continue to face headwinds across our entire system in the near future. Consumer confidence is still low, and there continues to be much uncertainty. However, we will continue to be there to provide our customers with the best food and especially for them. Our platform is solid and battle tested. We will drive further value and innovation, and we have the experience and track record to do so. The strength of our brands and experience of our team and our owner operators as a critical part of that team have enabled us to navigate through these challenging conditions before, and we have great confidence in our ability to successfully manage well through this latest period of economic uncertainty and leveraging our proven competitive advantages and leading brand platform. So thank you again for listening in today. And I'll now ask Christine to provide a financial update. Christine D'Sylva: Thanks, Paul. As a reminder, Pizza Pizza Royalty Corp. is a top line restaurant Royalty Corp. that earns a monthly royalty through a license agreement with Pizza Pizza Limited. In exchange for the use of the Pizza Pizza and Pizza 73 trademarks in its operations, Pizza Pizza Limited pays the partnership a monthly royalty calculated as a percentage of the Royalty Pool sales. Growth in the Corp. is derived from increasing the same-store sales of the restaurants in the pool and by adding new restaurants to the pool each year. As we announced earlier this year, on January 1, 2026, the Royalty Pool increased by 20 net new restaurants as a result of adding 39 new locations less than 19 restaurants which permanently closed. So for fiscal 2026, there will be 814 restaurants in the Royalty Pool, comprised of 712 Pizza Pizzas and 102 Pizza 73. This is in comparison to 2025 when the pool was 794 restaurants. So now briefly covering the financial results for the quarter. As Paul mentioned, same-store sales, the key driver of yield for shareholders, decreased 4.1% in the quarter. Both brands saw a decline in traffic, which resulted in Pizza Pizza restaurants reporting same-store sales decrease of 4.3% and Pizza 73 restaurants reporting a decline of 2.7%. The positive impact of the 20 net new restaurants added to the Royalty Pool was offset by the same-store sales decline and resulted in an overall decrease to the Royalty Pool System sales and the corresponding royalty income. Royalty Pool System sales for the quarter decreased 3.5% to $145.8 million from $151.3 million in the same quarter last year. By brand, sales from the 712 Pizza Pizza restaurants decreased 4.1% to $124.5 million and sales from the 102 Pizza 73 restaurants decreased 0.9% to $21.3 million for the quarter. The partnership's royalty income earned as a percentage of Royalty Pool sales decreased 3.5% to $9.4 million in the quarter. As a reminder, the Pizza Pizza and Pizza 73 restaurants are subject to seasonal variations in their business. System sales for the first quarter of the year are generally the lowest, while system sales for the last quarter are generally the highest. So turning to partnership expenses. Administrative expenses, which include listing costs as well as director, legal and auditor fees decreased in comparison to the prior year. This quarter, they totaled $132,000 compared to $152,000 in the prior year. In addition to administrative expenses, the partnership is making interest-only payments on the $47 million credit facility. Interest paid in the quarter was $435,000. The all-in rate for the credit facility for the next 3 years will be 3.51% compared to the maturing rate that expired in April of 2025 of 2.685%. So after the partnership received royalty income and interest income and paid administrative and interest expense, the resulting net cash was available to distribute to its 2 partners based on their ownership. After the [ event ] on January 1, 2026, Pizza Pizza Limited's ownership increased to 27.2% and Pizza Pizza Royalty Corp. shared in the remaining 72.8% of the partnership distribution. The Royalty Corp. received distributions, paid taxes on its share of the earnings and any residual cash was available for dividends to the company's shareholders. The company declared shareholder dividends of $5.7 million in the quarter or $0.2325 per share, which was consistent with the prior year. The payout ratio for the quarter was 134% and resulted in the company's working capital decreasing by $1.4 million to end the quarter at $2.3 million. This $2.3 million working capital reserve is available to stabilize dividends and fund expenditures in the event of short- to medium-term variability in system sales and interim royalty income. The company has historically targeted a payout ratio near 100% on an annualized basis, and any dividend decisions will be made with this target in mind. That concludes our financial overview. I'd like to turn the call back to our operator to poll for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Your first question comes from Cheryl Zhang of TD Cowen. Yaozhi Zhang: So obviously, certainly not an easy quarter for anyone in the QSR space. I'm curious what you're seeing that customers are cutting back on in particular? And is there any notable changes in consumer behavior compared to last quarter? Paul Goddard: Yes, it's a good point, Cheryl. I think we see the landscape we live in and some common issues people face. I think just generally, not unlike our last call, I mean traffic is overall weak. I mean, we still did see some growth positively in pickup but certainly, people are shying away from delivery. So we saw negative in delivery, and that's something we certainly have some plans to try and address. We've been trying for a while, but we have some other ideas we think we will be more successful. So I think there are some signs of light, but definitely, people are just really hurting. I mean you've got the global geopolitical situation. Gas prices are on everyone's mind. I think we're $2 gas in British Columbia, things like that. And so really since sort of mid-Feb really, we and I think the whole market has seen just all that much more conservative, careful behavior on the part of customers. So that translates into things like less frequency, less add-ons, people just getting what they really need and not sort of treating themselves as much and as often. So we just sense it's just been weakening as we saw really in the quarter, weaker than it was even in the last quarter. Yaozhi Zhang: I see. That makes sense. And curious if you could offer any early reads on the trends so far in Q2? Paul Goddard: Well, it's still a little early, right? I mean we're just kind of end of April here. So I think we really need to see. We've got a lot of menu innovation going on and other things we're planning on doing later this year. But I think things like our $5 slice and a coke deal, we think that's out in the market that that's going to have a big impact in walk-in in a positive way. That's something that's really unique to us really as a major chain. There's others that do slice, but nowhere near kind of the volume that we do. So that's just one example. Things like that, we're actually pretty optimistic about having a material impact. But the overall landscape is still very tough. People are looking for value and you're seeing some extreme discounting -- extreme,extreme discounting by other folks that we don't think is really sustainable. So we certainly discount ourselves, but we're also trying to play the long game here and play to our advantages. So I think some of our menu innovations have done well, and we're going to keep pushing things like organic delivery a little more, and we've had some signs of success there. But I'd say it's still a little early for the quarter to really make more comment on that. Yaozhi Zhang: Yes. Speaking of competition, how do you feel about your pricing and offering compared to competitors? And how do you think about keeping your value edge without escalating discount? You mentioned in your prepared remarks some subsequent improvement after you launched the $5 new deal, and I'm curious if you could add some color to it. Paul Goddard: Yes. I mean I think we generally have a good sense of price. I mean when we look at competitors, which we're doing all the time and seeing where we have traffic strength, traffic dropping off, what's happening with relative check. I mean we saw check was up, generally speaking, but traffic was down. It's always hard to find that balance. We think we're well priced. I mean we are not shy to change prices. We've changed prices on a la carte items. We've changed prices on specials from time to time. So I think generally, we feel like we're in the right zone for what we offer. I mean we know we offer very high quality relative to some others. And yet we think with our cost structure, we can be very competitive with our pricing. So I think we feel we're sort of in the right zone, but we do see downward pressure overall from people that are being extremely aggressive, I guess, you could say. So we're aware of that. We have to get good results. We have to get top line sales growth. That's our job. But we also got to make sure it's profitable for our franchisees as well. So I think just overall, we're really looking to play to our strengths. So things like the slice deal, we launched chicken tenders at Pizza 73, some unique items there. We've got more in the pipeline. I think BOGO has been successful out there for us as well. So I think we've had some success with things that we think will work well and some other things that maybe haven't resonated quite as well. I mean one example would be the Volcano Dipper, which we did very well in Pizza 73, we translated it over here, didn't quite get the pickup that we thought, to be honest. So not everything we try does work, but we have a pretty quick cycle time on our innovative marketing team. So we don't always hit it right, but we thought that was great value. But we also have more success with things like our Vladdy Junior Special, the XXL [ $19.99 ] 3-topping pizza, which became very quickly one of our top mixing specials and it's certainly fantastic value in a fun way and especially in our major markets, it's done really, really well. So it's just not doing well enough because customers are still, at the end of the day, hurting so much that even though it's a great deal and talking to a lot of customers, even that only has limited potential. So we're also looking at how do we get something even better, more interesting that can drive traffic further. But overall, I think we're well placed as a value player overall. We're really careful about our pricing. We're looking for opportunities to accentuate things like dips as well, which we're really famous for having the best dips as add-ons. But we know people are cautious. So we need to really get more and more creative about how we can really leverage our advantages, still be a value player and get that traffic up. It's just all about transaction count, getting that traffic up and doing whatever we need to do to do so. Christine D'Sylva: And then to add on to that, Cheryl. We do have the multiple channels, right? We make sure that we have value at every point where the customer is interacting with us. If we're coming in for a walk-in, we've got a walk-in special. If you want to come in to pick up to save on the delivery and the tip, which as consumers are getting more constrained in their available spend, we have pickup specials that are available to you. So you can save on the delivery and tip. And we always have our delivery specials like the XXL Vladdy deal. So we try to make sure that at every price point and at every convenience point, we have something to offer our customers. Paul Goddard: And across dayparts as well, I mean, we slice and dice the numbers every way you can imagine, of course, but we're always looking for growth in various dayparts and those sort of omnichannels, like Christine said. So that is some flexibility that others don't have. But at the end of the day, we're still not getting enough transactions. We know we've got to get traffic up. And we are pretty excited about some of the things coming down the line. And some of them will take longer as well to bear fruit, to be honest, but it's kind of a -- we have kind of a long view on the platform and what we can do to really win over more people from competitors and then get our loyal customers actually coming to us more often, more frequently and adding on more items. So it's a bit of a long game, but we do think there's some signs of hope, but the overall economic climate is still pretty concerning. Yaozhi Zhang: It's very helpful. Actually, I did mention that you still see some improvement in organic delivery. I'm curious if there are any drivers for that, that you could highlight? Is it because of better speed visibility? Or is it SMS tracking from all construct like free delivery or anything that you could highlight there? Paul Goddard: Yes. I mean we do think there's benefits to the customer and there's economic benefits. I mean we've actually been -- as of the last couple of months, I think it was sort of the end of Q2, correct me Christine if I'm wrong, but the -- with the sort of time, the guarantee time, and we try to highlight that a little more because that is something that we -- people don't get on a third-party platform. So we do use those as a channel like everyone else, but customers can rely on a uniform Pizza Pizza delivery driver with really good tracking times. We have much like the third-party providers, a customer tracking map, see where your order is on the map as it comes to the customer with an SMS reminder as it's supposed to get to your door. So it's better service, better speed, it's cheaper rather than paying commission to a third-party aggregator. So we -- and we think that's helpful because our delivery charges are really nominal really compared to those. And we think that's a real competitive advantage we have. We're famous for our guarantee. And although the third parties are a channel that some people only order from, they're also shying away from that. I think we see some weakness overall in the sector there for third party because delivery is just so expensive. So we see people trending more towards pickup. But we think leveraging things like loyalty and cross-channel marketing, getting people to behave in multiple channels, loyal customers or winning new ones in some of our multiple channels, that's a good pathway to success. Christine D'Sylva: We also have on game days, because we have such big partnerships with a lot of the sports teams across Canada, we have free game day delivery. So we try to get those customers who are watching the game with friends at home, ordering and saving on that delivery fee to keep them coming to us. And we always promote our on time or free, right? We are always less than 40 minutes with a guarantee that Pizza Pizza has always had, and we're proud of it and the fact that you can trust your order now is something that our marketing team has done a great job this quarter of promoting as well. Yaozhi Zhang: That's great. And just last one for me. What are you expecting for network expansion in 2026? And are you seeing any early impacts from the rising costs like fuel costs? Any impact on equipment construction costs or input costs that might impact franchisee profitability and interest in opening new stores? Paul Goddard: Yes, we are. I mean we still are, I would say, on offense growth-wise. So we think in terms of traditional stores, we're still looking at 2% to 3% range. I mean last -- this quarter has been encouraging in that respect. And so we do think really most parts of the country, we have lots of green space to grow on it while others perhaps are being a little more defensive. We're certainly defensive about our key markets, but on offense on the store development side. So I think we are getting suppliers increasingly looking for fuel surcharges and things like that. But that does indirectly impact us. We're holding the line on that as best we can. We haven't seen sort of equipment costs necessarily go up yet, but I wouldn't be surprised if we see more of that in the future. And we've been really challenging our construction team to also ensure that the unit economics look good for a franchisee. Can we reduce construction costs? Can we skip certain items or reduce the cost of certain items so that the investment for the franchisee is more palatable? So I think we're being pretty creative with some aspects like that, and that's pretty exciting. I think we have a good record, a good franchisee pipeline. But certainly, there's headwinds. I mean with the inflationary pressure depending on how long this big crisis goes on overseas and just even without that general economic malaise, I mean, that's what we expect. So we say, well, if it's a tough environment, we still need to be successful. So what do we got to do? And if it ends up not being as bad, well, then we'll look even better. But we are seeing some pressure, things like fuel. Most of our Canadian ingredients are Canadian, for instance, so we mirror that quite well, and we've held the line pretty well there. But certainly, we'll control what we can control and make sure that the food basket overall is okay. And same with lease costs and things like that for franchisees. So we're trying to make sure that our economic -- unit level economics are attractive even in a sort of really not helpful economic backdrop. Operator: [Operator Instructions] There are no further questions at this time. I would hand over the call to Christine D'Sylva for closing comments. Please go ahead. Christine D'Sylva: Thank you. Thank you, everyone, for joining us on the call today. If you have any further questions after the call, please feel free to contact us. Our information is on the earnings release. And thank you for your support of Pizza Pizza Royalty Corp. You may now disconnect your lines. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, this concludes today's conference call. Thank you for your participation, and you may now disconnect.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the Imperial Oil First Quarter 2026 Earnings Call. Today's conference is being recorded. At this time, I'd like to turn the conference over to Peter Shaw, Vice President of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. Peter Shaw: Good morning, everyone. Welcome to our first quarter earnings conference call. I am joined this morning by Imperial Senior Management Team, including John Whelan, Chairman, President and CEO; and Dan Lyons, Senior Vice President, Finance and Administration; Cheryl Gomez-Smith, Senior Vice President of the Upstream; and Scott Maloney, Vice President of the Downstream. Today's comments include reference to non-GAAP financial measures. The definitions and reconciliations of these measures can be found in Attachment 6 of our most recent press release and are available on our website with the link to this conference call. Today's comments may contain forward-looking information. Any forward-looking information is not a guarantee of future performance and actual future performance and operating results can vary materially depending on a number of factors and assumptions. Forward-looking information and the risk factors and assumptions are described in further detail on our first quarter earnings release that we issued earlier this morning as well as our most recent Form 10-K. All these documents are available on SEDAR+, EDGAR and our website. So I'd ask you to refer to those. John is going to start this morning with some opening remarks and then hand it over to Dan, who is going to provide the financial update, and then John will provide his operations update. Once that is done, we will follow with the Q&A session. So with that, I will turn it over to John for his opening remarks. John Whelan: Thank you, Peter. Good morning, everybody, and welcome to our first quarter earnings call. I hope everyone is doing well. And as always, we appreciate you taking the time to join us this morning. Since our last earnings call, we've seen significant volatility in commodity markets, driven by geopolitical events in the Middle East. This has served to tighten the supply-demand balance for a range of commodities globally, resulting in a materially different outlook for this year and potentially beyond. It also reinforces the strategic importance of commodity and product supply from Canada to the rest of the world. Our long-standing business model uniquely provides significant leverage to upside conditions, while also protecting against downside scenarios. This is a substantial long-term structural benefit that allows us to return additional surplus cash to shareholders at higher prices, while adhering to our investment plans and strategic priorities over a range of price scenarios. There continues to be a dynamic global backdrop. However, our corporate strategy and investment plans remain consistent. We continue to maximize the value of our existing assets and progress material, high-quality organic growth opportunities, leveraging our competitive advantages of technology, scale, integration, execution excellence, and very importantly, our people. Speaking of technology and scale, we also continue to advance our business transformation restructuring plans. As a reminder, we expect to capture significant long-term efficiency and effectiveness benefits as we further leverage rapidly advancing technology and ExxonMobil's global capability centers. Now from a financial perspective, cash flows from operating activities were $756 million in the quarter. Excluding the impact of working capital, cash flows from operating activities were over $1.2 billion. Moving to operations. I want to highlight several achievements. At Kearl, production was in line with our second best first quarter ever despite the impact of a third-party natural gas supply outage. At Cold Lake, we achieved our highest first quarter production in over 8 years, supported by new technology-advantaged low-cost volume that is transforming the asset. In the Downstream, our renewable diesel facility at Strathcona captured significant value compared to more costly imports. In terms of capital allocation, our approach remains consistent with our long-standing priorities, which begins with investing in the business to sustain and grow value. Next, a reliable and growing dividend remains a key priority. Our annual dividend has grown for 31 years. And then as we generate surplus cash above and beyond our commitments, we look to return that to shareholders in a timely manner. And as you've seen in the release, we intend to renew our Normal Course Issuer Bid at the end of June. Overall, I'm excited about the opportunities in front of us, including our long-term in situ growth potential. We continue to construct the Enhanced Bitumen Recovery Technology pilot at our Aspen lease which can unlock significant new low-cost volume growth for Imperial and its shareholders. With that, I'll pass things over to Dan to walk through the financial results in more detail. D. Lyons: Thanks, John. Starting with financial results for the first quarter, we recorded net income of $940 million, down $348 million from the first quarter of 2025, primarily driven by higher incentive compensation charges as a result of our higher share price and unfavorable upstream realizations based on lower average prices across the quarter. Elaborating on the incentive compensation item, the total charge in the quarter was $143 million after tax. This mark-to-market charge was driven by a historic share price increase of almost $65, over 50% in the quarter. When comparing sequentially, first quarter net income is up $448 million from the fourth quarter of 2025 primarily driven by the absence of identified items and by higher prices, partially offset by lower volumes and the incentive compensation charge I just mentioned. Now shifting our attention to each business line and looking sequentially. Upstream earnings of $470 million are up $472 million from fourth quarter due to the absence of identified items when those items -- when excluding those items, net income is up $52 million, primarily due to higher prices. Downstream earnings of $611 million are up $92 million from fourth quarter. Excluding identified items in the fourth quarter, net income is up $47 million, mainly due to lower operating expenses. Our Chemical business generated earnings of $24 million, up $15 million from the fourth quarter. Excluding identified items in the fourth quarter, net income is up $4 million. Moving to cash flow. In the first quarter, we generated $756 million in cash flow from operating activities, excluding working capital effects. Cash flows from operating activities for the first quarter were $1,239 million, down $521 million from the first quarter of '25. Cash flows from operating activities were also impacted by unfavorable deferred tax effects of about $350 million, primarily driven by much higher commodity prices late in the first quarter as compared to the fourth quarter of 2025. As a U.S. GAAP LIFO reporter, we tend to see transitory negative inventory-driven deferred tax impacts when prices rise and transitory positive impacts when prices fall. This is driven by our reporting earnings on a LIFO inventory basis, while our deferred taxes are calculated on a weighted average cost inventory basis consistent with Canadian tax regulations. Now shifting to CapEx. Capital expenditures in the first quarter were $478 million, $80 million higher than the first quarter of 2025 and $173 million lower than the fourth quarter of 2025. In the Upstream, first quarter spending of $362 million focused on sustaining capital at Kearl, Cold Lake and Syncrude. In the Downstream, first quarter CapEx was primarily spent on sustaining capital projects across our refinery network. Shifting to shareholder distributions. In the first quarter, we paid $350 million of dividends. And earlier this morning, as John noted, we announced our intention to renew our NCIB in June, and we declared a second quarter dividend of $0.87 per share, in line with our long-standing philosophy of returning surplus cash to shareholders. Now I'll turn it back to John to discuss the company's operational performance. John Whelan: Thanks, Dan. I want to take the next few minutes to share key highlights from our operating results. Upstream production for the quarter averaged 419,000 gross oil equivalent barrels per day, up 1,000 oil equivalent barrels per day versus the first quarter of 2025. First quarter crude production was the second highest quarter -- first quarter result in company history, just 1,000 barrels per day below the all-time first quarter record set in 2024. I'll now cover highlights for each of the assets, starting with Kearl. Kearl's quarterly production was 259,000 barrels per day gross, up 3,000 barrels per day versus the first quarter of 2025. As a reminder, first quarter volumes at Kearl tend to be lower on a seasonal basis relative to the second half of the year. In addition, during March a third-party regional gas supply outage required us to temporarily reduce production levels to match lower natural gas availability. Now that we're in the second quarter, the team is focused on the planned turnaround at Kearl. Work this year will extend the turnaround interval at the K1 train from 2 to 4 years, similar to the work completed last year at K2 train. This is a great example of the work we're doing to maximize the value at Kearl, leading to higher volumes and lower unit cash costs. Consistent with the framework we outlined at our 2025 Investor Day, we are advancing growth at Kearl across multiple fronts, including higher recovery, productivity and reliability enhancements, and the turnaround optimization work I just mentioned. Later this year, we're adding a secondary recovery project at Kearl, designed to capture additional bitumen from the ore already being processed through the plant, supporting incremental capital-efficient volumes growth. Moving next to Cold Lake highlights. Cold Lake's quarterly production averaged 155,000 barrels per day, up 1,000 barrels per day versus the first quarter of 2025. We continue to see the benefits of our strategy of transforming Cold Lake production to advantaged technolog,y, with ongoing strong results from our Grand Rapids solvent-assisted SAGD project and continued ramp-up of the Leming SAGD project. We remain confident in our strategy at Cold Lake to deliver advantaged volumes at lower unit cash costs by leveraging technology. To round out the upstream, I'll cover Syncrude. Imperial's share of Syncrude production for the quarter averaged 72,000 barrels per day, which was down 1,000 barrels per day versus the first quarter of 2025. During the quarter, Syncrude experienced unplanned downtime associated with Coker 8-3, resulting in lower volumes and additional maintenance. The interconnect pipeline was utilized to enable the export of an additional 8,000 barrels per day of bitumen and other products over the quarter. With the additional maintenance required at Syncrude this quarter, the decision was made to postpone the planned second quarter turnaround work on Coker 8-2 until the summer. Now let's move to the Downstream. In the first quarter, we refined an average of 384,000 barrels per day, equating to utilization of 88%. Compared to the first quarter of 2025, refinery throughput was down 13,000 barrels a day. During the quarter, we experienced unplanned downtime, and Strathcona was impacted by the disruption of synthetic crude feedstock caused by the Syncrude Coker outage until alternative supply was put in place. As I mentioned in my opening remarks, our renewable diesel facility at Strathcona captured significant value compared to more costly imports during the first quarter, even as we continue to optimize around hydrogen availability. We are now executing the planned turnaround at Strathcona that began in early April and is scheduled to be completed in just over a week's time. The work is focused on the crude unit, which achieved the longest ever run length of 10 years before this planned turnaround. From a strategic perspective, we continue to invest in our structurally advantaged downstream business with a view to maximizing earnings and cash flow across the value chain. Investment in 2026 includes digital infrastructure enhancements and targeted projects to strengthen logistics and feedstock flexibility. Petroleum product sales were 441,000 barrels per day, down 14,000 barrels per day compared to the first quarter of 2025 due primarily to a reduction in opportunistic supply sales, partially offset by increased retail sales. Overall, across our Canadian network, we saw very similar demand for each of our primary petroleum products in the first quarter of 2026 relative to 2025. Turning now to Chemicals. Earnings in the first quarter were $24 million, down $7 million from the first quarter of 2025 due to lower product pricing, partially offset by reduced feedstock costs. In closing, I would like to reiterate that despite the dynamic geopolitical environment, our priorities remain clear and consistent. We are focused on continuing to profitably grow volumes, further lowering unit cash costs and increasing cash flow generation. We remain committed to maximizing the value of our existing asset base, progressing our volume and cost targets, driving greater efficiency and effectiveness, and delivering unmatched industry-leading shareholder returns. Operationally, our focus remains on execution excellence and being the most responsible operator. This includes safely and effectively completing the planned turnaround at Strathcona as well as the planned turnaround at Kearl in May. Both are important to sustaining reliability, capturing value from our assets and supporting long-term performance. Looking ahead, our restructuring is firmly in the implementation phase and progressing well. We are taking a robust and disciplined approach with a focus on maintaining safe, reliable operations. This work is being advanced in an orderly manner with clear line of sight to the expected benefits over time, including improved efficiency, improved effectiveness, competitiveness and long-term value creation. Finally, our capital allocation priorities remain unchanged. We expect to continue generating cash beyond the needs of our capital plan and our dividend, and our commitment remains to return that cash to shareholders in a timely manner. As noted in the press release this morning, we intend to renew our Normal Course Issuer Bid in late June. As always, I want to thank our employees for their commitment, professionalism and teamwork. Their dedication to safe operations, execution excellence, and customer and community service is what makes our achievements possible. And I'd like to thank all of you once again for your continued interest and support. Now we'll move to the Q&A session. I'll pass it back to Peter. Peter Shaw: Thank you, John. [Operator Instructions] So with that, operator, could you please open up the lines for questions? Operator: [Operator Instructions] And the first question is from Dennis Fong with CIBC World Markets. Dennis Fong: The first one for me is just really around the Upstream. Can you maybe discuss, we'll call it the progress around the pipeline of SA-SAGD projects at Cold Lake? I know that there's kind of a long duration strategy around kind of growing or layering in projects between now and 2050. As the world kind of obviously evolves in terms of diversifying supply chains globally, can you talk about opportunities to maybe accelerate some of that pipeline of projects as well as your appetite for that? John Whelan: Thanks, Dennis. I can -- I'll make a few comments on that. I think maybe I'll step back first and talk about our capital plans in light, as you say, of the current situation and commodity prices. Every year, we review our corporate plan, and we consider that over a range of inputs and a range of price scenarios. And we pace our investment strategy to maximize value at the end of the day. And looking at that both in terms of our existing assets and progressing advantaged growth. So we are -- remain very focused on Kearl getting it to 300,000, Cold Lake getting it to 165,000 barrels per day, and in the downstream flexibility and logistics projects. And of course, we're advancing our EBRT pilot. So I think at the high level, I wouldn't -- you shouldn't expect or anticipate major changes. We weren't waiting for a price signal to drive pace. We're looking at maximizing value for shareholders over a long-term view, and we believe we're progressing our growth opportunities at the appropriate pace to do just that. So that's kind of at the highest level. If you think at Cold Lake, I mean, we continue to work through this transformation of the asset. As I mentioned, Grand Rapids SA-SAGD is continuing to perform very well, above 20,000 barrels a day. We're ramping up the Leming SAGD, which is going back into the -- where the original pilot was, that's ramping up towards 9,000 barrels per day. And then in the future plans, we have Mahihkan, which we've started to invest in, and that's still on track to bring on 30,000 barrels a day of advantaged technology volumes starting up in 2029. So we continue to progress those at a pace we think that makes sense. And stepping back from that at Cold Lake, if you think about the percentage, we talk about this transforming the asset. In 2020, all of our production there was coming from CSS and steam flood and not from what we're today characterizing as advantaged technology. In 2025, that was 20% was coming from advantaged technology, largely the SA-SAGD at Grand Rapids. You go ahead 5 more years, that's going to be up to 45%. 5 years after that, it's going to be 60%. And by the time you get to 2040, which is less than 15 years from now, about 2/3 of our production will come from advantaged technology at Cold Lake. So we continue to progress at a pace we think that makes sense. Dennis Fong: Great. Really appreciate that color and context there, John. My second question shifts the focus back towards the downstream. And I was hoping you could provide us or at least remind us about the flexibility in terms of your refining assets, as well as kind of revealing any opportunities to capitalize on dislocations in the market, whether it be locally or globally, as well -- and kind of maybe specifically focusing around distillates and jet fuel, just given how desirable those products happen to be. John Whelan: Yes. I'll make a few comments. I'm going to ask Scott to chime in as well. We feel really good about the -- obviously, our downstream business, the margin capture that we're able to get. Canada remains advantaged globally in terms of margin that we get. And then Imperial remains advantaged within Canada. So we really like our position. We do -- so we're really looking to maximize sales locally. However, given the current environment, we do look at the export market as well and look to overall maximize the margin, our margin capture in that regard. So there are some constraints about what we can export when you look at logistics and so on. But we do continue to look across the whole portfolio and how to maximize overall capture, but we're really pleased with the advantage we have in Canada. And I think you saw us do that in the first quarter in terms of margin capture as we benefit from producing renewable diesel, the flexibility we've had to produce into the highest value products and into the highest value markets. So kind of high level, that's how I think about it, and I'll ask Scott to add some color to that. Scott Maloney: Sure. Thanks, John. I appreciate the question, Dennis. First, on the gas to diesel and jet splits within our refineries, we look at that from an optimization standpoint every single month. And so as we think about the feedstocks we're sending to our refineries, we're doing that based on the value we can achieve on the finished products that are manufactured. And so certainly, in this time period, we've been maximizing our production of diesel and jet molecules over gasoline. And that is a balance because a large portion of our production goes to supply customers within the Canadian marketplace, and we can efficiently supply those customers within the Canadian marketplace with our coast-to-coast logistics network, moving the barrels from our refineries in Eastern and Western Canada to those customers. And so that's where we see the highest uplift. And as John mentioned, we do opportunistically look at exporting additional production on top of that. And certainly, that is an opportunity in this sort of marketplace when you're seeing margins increase in other markets. Operator: And the next question will come from Greg Pardy with RBC Capital Markets. Greg Pardy: And as always, thanks for the detailed rundown. John, I wanted to come back to the -- just the progress in terms of the restructuring that's going on. Maybe to better understand perhaps at what stage you're at in terms of transferring workflows from IMO into some of the ExxonMobil excellence centers and so forth. And then also, just in terms of the technology we're talking about in terms of those advancements and how that's being incorporated, maybe what stage are we at? And what are the things that you're looking for in terms of key benchmarks of success? John Whelan: Thanks, Greg. Yes, as we -- if I step back in from this restructuring, it's all driven around, as you pointed to, leveraging rapidly advancing technology environment and the growth that we've seen in these global capability centers that ExxonMobil has. And that basis, that case for action remains really strong. And both of those things that drove the decision, and we feel very good about that. And it advances our long-standing strategy about maximizing value and leaning into technology and leaning into our relationship with ExxonMobil. I would say I feel very good about the progress we're making, and we are advancing that transition on track today. If I think about that, if you look at it, we're basically -- it's pretty ratable in terms of the -- we're doing 2 things. We're outsourcing work and we're capturing efficiencies. And as I've mentioned before, about 40% of the reduction in positions or the value is actually pure efficiency. And about 60% is outsourcing work to these global capability centers where we already have work being done for us today. So we have very rigorous plans on the transfer of that work to those global capability centers and the positions where we will capture efficiencies. And each department and group within Imperial has detailed road maps on how they're progressing that. It's going to be pretty ratable. We have had people leave the organization late last year. We've had people leave the organization in the first quarter of this year in the range of about 130 people in the first quarter of this year. And that's going to continue pretty ratably quarter-by-quarter and year-by-year this year and next year. So that's progressing well and on track, and you'll see it kind of pretty ratably over that period. The technology, I think a couple of things. There -- part of it is what we put in place that has enabled us to move at this pace. And then the second part of it is, as you move that into these global capability centers, we're going to be able to deploy technology more quickly at scale in the future. So a lot of it was putting the digital programs that we've spoken about in the past, putting in place digital -- our data lakes, getting our data organized and in a structure that could be used in an efficient way regardless where the work is being done, putting digital twins in place and then automating some of our work. So that enabled us to continue on this path. And then as we move these workflows into global capability centers, we see greater opportunity, AI, machine learning and so on to further automate those workflows. And we're going to be able to do that more quickly and at scale when that work is being at a global capability center and being done in a broader sense across ExxonMobil's network. Hope that answers the question for you. Greg Pardy: No, no, it does. I mean I think it's usually these announcements, they come out and then the focus is on cost of the future. But obviously, there's a transition to go through. So it's good to understand some of the context there. So let me just pose maybe a related question. Then in terms -- from your perspective as the CEO, the capability of Imperial to go execute Aspen in the future and recognizing there's a pilot there and there's a bunch of work to do and so forth. It certainly sounds from where you're sitting that the only change in terms of where corporate strategy might be headed is not necessarily in terms of what you're going to deliver, but just where it's going to be delivered from and at what cost. Is that the right way to think about it? John Whelan: Absolutely. That's exactly the way to think about it. Nothing is changing in our company in terms of the governance of our company, the skill sets we will have on the ground to support the assets we have today to support growth into the future. We will have -- we're still going to be an organization of 4,000 people after we go through this transition. And our growth plans, I really believe this sets us up to continue to deliver industry-leading performance and actually builds the foundation for us to grow. And of course, if you think about an Aspen project, we're not sitting here today with the project team waiting for that project to come, right? We build up capability when we see those projects coming in. Of course, a lot of it is done by contractors, but we will need additional capability. We're going to be in a better position to build up that capability because we're going to have support networks globally that are there that we can leverage and ramp up. So it doesn't change anything with our governance, doesn't change anything with our strategy. I'm as bullish or more bullish than I've ever been on our future in situ portfolio, the technology, and we have the ability to double our production with that future in situ portfolio. And when the time is right, when the technology is ready and the investment environment is there, we have the capability to do that. Operator: And moving on to Menno Hulshof with TD Cowen. Menno Hulshof: I'll start with a question on Kearl. In your opening remarks, you touched on some of the initiatives you're pursuing to drive production above 300,000 barrels a day on a sustained basis. And you talked about turnaround optimization. But can you elaborate on where things stand on the key pieces within enhanced bitumen recovery and the overall performance of the equipment? John Whelan: Yes. That's right, Menno. I mean I'm going to ask Cheryl to chime in here, but we've got these three focus areas that we've had, which is around productivity and reliability improvement, the turnarounds and then the one you mentioned around enhanced recovery. And we have specific projects focused on enhanced recovery. And so we're working all three of those components. Those are the things that will unlock and get us to 300,000 barrels a day, $18 a barrel. And I'm going to let Cheryl talk about a couple of the enhanced recovery projects that we have -- that we're progressing right now. Cheryl Gomez-Smith: Sure. Thanks, John, and thank you for the question, Menno. John references three items. I'd probably say there are more. This is a space where this is kind of our ultimate end equation. So when I think about Kearl and where we're headed with 300 kbd, I have very strong confidence in our future. And you've heard me say this before, which is we're anchored and we're building on a strong foundation. We're leveraging scale, such that our incremental production really leverages this fixed high-cost structure. We're doing recovery projects. We've got two in the hopper right now. One is called KFCC, and that's going to come online at the end of the year, and that captures additional bitumen from ore already processed. The second one is called CST or coarse sand tailings, that's in development. Think of this as where you get aeration in the system and it makes bubbles so the bitumen droplets, you're able to recover more bitumen. The other end in this space is the turnaround optimization that John mentioned and then technology solutions. And this really hits on that productivity and reliability space. You've heard me mention about we're continuing to upsize our hydro transport lines. We're looking at mine automation where we're looking for more remote, semi- and automated mining that really takes the physical operations out, continuing with our fleet optimizations on the autonomous side. And then the other thing I find is interesting with Kearl is just by design, your haul distances get longer as mine develops. So there's cost headwinds. Our intent is to more than offset those via scale optimization and technology solutions. And the final thing I'll leave you with, and this is one of the key milestones I'm very proud of. By late this summer, Kearl is on target to hit our 1 billion barrels of production. So this is a significant milestone and very much looking forward to it. Menno Hulshof: Yes. Thanks, Cheryl. That is a big number. Second question, maybe on the recent increase to the SCO premium. What is your marketing team seeing day-to-day in terms of rising SCO demand to meet diesel and jet supply shortfalls? And how long do you think premium pricing could persist? John Whelan: I'm going to ask Scott to take that one. Scott Maloney: Yes. So I mentioned before that certainly, we're optimizing our refineries to manage additional diesel and jet production. We feel like there's ample feedstocks in the marketplace to do that. And with the demand profile within Canada in particular, there's even some imported jet from other markets into portions of Western Canada. So we see some ongoing ability to continue pushing jet production and sales into the Canadian marketplace and believe we have enough feedstocks to do that. John Whelan: Yes. And I would just add, obviously, synthetics are trading higher because they're a good way to make diesel and jet. And that's probably -- we're not going to predict the future synthetic premium, but that may persist for a little bit as these margins stay quite high. Operator: And we'll take a question from Neil Mehta with Goldman Sachs. Neil Mehta: Yes. And this might be for you, Dan, just your perspective on return of capital, which has really been the hallmark of Imperial over the last couple of years. And as we've gotten into a firmer commodity environment, certainly, the NCIB will get turned on, but how do you think about buying back stock here and the potential for an SIB and if there's any price sensitivity around shrinking the share count because the stock has done really well. So any perspective around that would be great. D. Lyons: Sure, Neil. Bottom line is no change in the way we look at this, consistent with John's kind of remarks and earlier on. We're committed, obviously, to the reliable and growing dividend. We paid our April 1 dividend at the higher rate of $0.87, which is a 20% increase from the prior. And as you noted, we said we're going to renew our NCIB at the end of June when we can. And we'll certainly plan to proceed with that. And then the question is, okay, is there an SIB in there somewhere, too? And the answer is it's just going to depend on where cash goes, right? I mean, right now, at current prices, if those persist, we'll have a lot of cash, right? So that would certainly be a possibility. But we'll just have to see what happens. So I'd say no change in our philosophy. We remain committed to returning cash to shareholders. And as we generate the cash based on commodity prices, we'll continue to return that really as we have in the past. So no change to our philosophy. I would say we're not really set -- our prices has a great run. And as I said in my opening remarks, it had this -- the mark-to-market was so big. It showed up as a factor because of the rapid rise in the share price. But we believe that reflects value, and we see the share buybacks as an efficient way to return cash. So we'll continue to return cash. Neil Mehta: Yes. Thanks, Dan. It's been a great run. So just a follow-up on the questions about what you want to accomplish during the turnarounds that you referenced earlier for both Strathcona and Kearl. Can you talk -- can you give us pull back a little bit and talk about specifically what are the 2 or 3 things you want to accomplish at both of those turnarounds and that we should be focused on? D. Lyons: I mean I'll make a few high-level comments and then Cheryl and Scott can chime in. But being at Strathcona with the turnaround of the crude unit, again, it's had a 10-year run. So there are some -- we monitor obviously the integrity of the unit. And there are some elements, components that need to be changed out at that point. They've come to the -- towards the end of their life. So part of that is just the maintenance that comes with it. But 10 years is a long time to run a unit, and we look to continue to optimize that. There's that. But at certain point, you do need to go in and make some adjustments. Then at Kearl, I mean there is, again, the same thing. We've been -- there are some elements that components and things that we do need to change out. They come to end of life. In general, we try to have redundancy when we do that. We don't have that full redundancy to do it everywhere. But a big part is some of the upgrades that we're doing. Cheryl mentioned it already, I mentioned it, but it's some of the upgrades we're doing to allow us to get that turnaround to go from a 2-year interval to a 4-year. So that's metallurgy improvement, size of transport lines and things like that, that will allow us to go longer. So that's at the high level. Maybe, Scott, anything further on the Strathcona? Scott Maloney: Maybe just one other comment. Yes, just to confirm, it is an extended turnaround interval length. So that is something that we're pretty proud of actually getting the units to run this long. But it is a normal turnaround from a work scope perspective. We don't plan to add any new equipment or things like that. The one other comment I'd share is that with our new renewable diesel unit located at our Strathcona refinery, that continues to run during this turnaround. And so we continue to manufacture renewable diesel, and that's really been a bright spot for us in the first quarter. And so that has not been impacted by the turnaround activity in Strathcona in the first quarter to date. Cheryl Gomez-Smith: Sure. And I'll answer -- I'll give a little bit of context for Kearl. So the K1 scope that we've got this year is essentially the same scope that we had for K2 last year. So the work we completed on K2 gives us confidence that we head into the turnaround in May. And a couple of key items there, we have some modifications on the primary separation cell and then we've got some hardening on our surge bin. And those are really the key items to enable the 4-year turnaround. We do have a couple of incremental items to work for K1 around the flare. But in general, I would say the majority of the scope is exactly what we did last year for K2. Operator: And we'll take a question from Doug Leggate with Wolfe Research. Douglas George Blyth Leggate: I guess this might be for Dan. Dan, royalties in Canada are typically priced off WTI, which obviously has gone into overdrive here. And WCS has blowed out quite a bit. I wonder if you could walk us through how we should think about that. You're getting obviously, royalties priced on one number, but you're getting realizing prices at a different number, particularly on the heavy oil and the [ WCS ]. Obviously, your production is more heavy than light. So can you walk us through that? And I guess if I could ask a follow-up here. This is a really -- I know it's a stupid question before I ask it, but I'm going to ask it anyway. And it's about technology on things like SAGD, where does it sit? Does it sit at ExxonMobil? Or does it sit at Imperial? And the stupid bit of my question is, one can't help feeling that we're coming into a very different era for oil prices with UAE pulling out of OPEC and maybe there's a restocking cycle and underinvestment and all the rest of it. Imperial has never operated outside of the U.S. -- outside of Canada, my apologies. Is there ever a situation where the heavy oil opportunities in places like Venezuela might change that? Or does it all sit with ExxonMobil? D. Lyons: Okay. So maybe I'll take the first one on royalties. You're right. I mean it's pegged -- the royalties are pegged. The royalty rates, I should say, are pegged to WTI, but the actual royalty payment is tied to your realizations on bitumen. And that's been the case for a long time. And I would say, on balance, we feel the royalty regime in Canada is attractive. And in particular, for Kearl, which is pre-payout, even at the very highest royalty rate, which is over 120 Canadian WTI, we cap out at 9% gross, which -- so we have really great leverage to the upside on prices. So yes, we don't see it as a significant issue. I mean the spread has widened out a bit. It's like maybe $15. I haven't looked today, but 15-ish, so which is historically not very wide. So it's the rates that are set on the WTI, but the actual payments are based on your realizations of bitumen actual prices. So it's really to us, overall, given the way the rates work, a good regime, and we don't see it as a headwind. We see it as more of a tailwind in a high price environment, especially for an asset like Kearl. John Whelan: And let me take the technology question, Doug. I think -- here's how I think about it. We basically have access to all of ExxonMobil's technology and they have access to ours. So in terms of -- at the high level, is Imperial looking to expand its footprint beyond Canada? We're not. We're focused on Canada. But we basically have sharing agreements on the technology. And Imperial has largely the heavy oil-related technologies, SAGD, SA-SAGD, the technologies we use at Kearl, the paraffinic froth treatment and so on. That has been developed by Imperial. So Imperial has kind of been the center of excellence around heavy oil technology. So if ExxonMobil were to decide to look at Venezuela or whatever, they could utilize some of our heavy oil technology involved in that. Right now, we at Imperial are not looking to go outside of Canada. The flip side of that is we get to take advantage of ExxonMobil's technology. So we talked a lot about renewable diesel here today. We're using a low-temperature proprietary technology that allows us to use that our renewable diesel can be used year-round in cold weather environment. That's an ExxonMobil-developed technology that we have full access to and we're able to use to give us a competitive advantage with our renewable diesel project. Some of the metallurgy we use at Kearl on our hydro transport lines has come from metallurgical technology advancements that ExxonMobil has developed. We just used the ExxonMobil Proxima carbon fiber material in one of our bridges at Kearl. So we have full access, and we use much of their process optimization technology in our downstream and in our upstream as well. So we have full and free access to their technology. We use it in areas when it comes to heavy oil, that technology development has largely occurred through Imperial and will continue to occur. We just announced last year how we donated our technology center here to SAIT, which was a $37 million donation, the largest ever donation to an educational institution in Alberta. But we'll continue to have research at that research center going forward in specific to heavy oil optimization as well as tailings work and so on. So that's kind of how we see that. Douglas George Blyth Leggate: Maybe not such a dumb question, John. That's very informative. D. Lyons: We love your questions, Doug, just for the record. Operator: And that does conclude the question-and-answer session. I will now turn the conference back over to Peter Shaw, Vice President of Investor Relations for closing remarks. Peter Shaw: Thank you. So on behalf of the management team, I'd like to thank everyone for joining us this morning. If there are any other further questions, please don't hesitate to reach out to the Investor Relations team, and we'll be happy to answer your questions. With that, thank you very much, and have a great day.
Operator: Good morning, ladies and gentlemen. Thank you for standing by. Welcome to the Hudbay Minerals Inc. First Quarter 2026 Results Conference Call. At this time, all participants are in a listen-only mode. Following the presentation, we will conduct a question-and-answer session. I would like to remind everyone that this conference call is being recorded on 05/01/2026, 11:00 AM Eastern Time. I would now like to turn the conference over to Candace Brule, Senior Vice President, Capital Markets and Corporate Affairs. Please go ahead. Candace Brule: Thank you, operator. Good morning, and welcome to Hudbay Minerals Inc.'s First Quarter 2026 Results Conference Call. Hudbay's financial results were issued this morning and are available on our site at www.hudbay.com. A corresponding PowerPoint presentation is available in the Investor Events section of our website, and we encourage you to refer to it during this call. Our presenter today is Peter Gerald Kukielski, Hudbay's President and Chief Executive Officer. Accompanying Peter for the Q&A portion of the call will be Eugene Lei, our Chief Financial Officer, and Andre Lauzon, our Chief Operating Officer. Please note that comments made on today's call may contain forward-looking information and this information, by nature, is subject to risks and uncertainties, and as such, actual results may differ materially from the views expressed today. For further information on these risks and uncertainties, please consult the company's relevant filings on SEDAR+ and EDGAR. These documents are also available on our website. As a reminder, all amounts discussed on today's call are in U.S. dollars unless otherwise noted. I will now pass the call over to Peter Gerald Kukielski. Peter Gerald Kukielski: Thank you, Candace. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us on today's call. We have had a great start to the year, achieving several key operational, financial, and growth milestones. Hudbay Minerals Inc. delivered another quarter of record revenue, record adjusted EBITDA, and record adjusted earnings in the first quarter. This was driven by steady operating performance, our focus on cost control, and the continued benefit from margin expansion with our unique mix of copper and gold exposure. Our leading operating cost performance resulted in record low consolidated cash costs in the first quarter, which contributed to continued strong free cash flow generation. With the strong performance in the quarter, all our operations are on track to achieve 2026 production and cost guidance. Building on our commitment to prudent balance sheet management, we ended the quarter with over $1 billion in cash and cash equivalents, benefiting from $420 million received from Mitsubishi for their initial cash contribution on closing of the Copper World joint venture transaction in January. Our enhanced financial flexibility has positioned us well to continue advancing the development of Copper World, reinvest in high-return opportunities at each of our operations, and de-risk the Cactus project upon completion of the acquisition of Arizona Sonoran to deliver attractive growth and maximize long-term risk-adjusted returns at each of our operations for stakeholders. Slide three provides an overview of our first quarter operational and financial performance. The first quarter demonstrated strong operating performance with higher mill throughput across the three operations compared to the previous quarter, delivering consolidated copper production of 28 thousand tonnes and consolidated gold production of 62 thousand ounces. We achieved record quarterly revenues of $757 million and record adjusted EBITDA of $422 million in the first quarter. Cash generated from operating activities was $211 million, remaining relatively consistent with the fourth quarter as a result of favorable changes in non-cash working capital. First quarter adjusted net earnings were a record of $159 million, or $0.40 per share, reflecting higher realized metal prices and strong cost control across the operations resulting in higher gross profit margins. During the first quarter, we continued to demonstrate industry-leading cost performance, delivering record low consolidated cash costs of negative $1.80 per pound of copper and sustaining cash costs of $0. This incredible cost performance was partially driven by higher gold byproduct credits, reflecting the benefits of Hudbay Minerals Inc.'s unique commodity diversification. Turning to Slide four, Hudbay Minerals Inc. has delivered several quarters of significant free cash flow generation as a result of steady operating performance, expanding margins from strong copper and gold exposure, and our cost control efforts. With our enhanced balance sheet and diversified free cash flow generation, we are well positioned to fund our attractive growth pipeline. Our cost control efforts are focused on navigating emerging external cost pressures such as higher fuel prices and short-term labor challenges. We have not experienced any disruption to fuel availability and have been able to mitigate the cost pressures through initiatives to further improve throughput and enhance operating efficiencies. We are well insulated from external cost pressures due to our diversified platform with significant byproduct credits from gold production and the polymetallic nature of our ore deposits. While most of our revenues continue to be derived from copper, revenue from gold represents a meaningful portion of total revenues, with 39% of gross revenues from gold in the first quarter. After accounting for our sustaining capital investments but before growth investments, we generated $102 million in free cash flow during the quarter, bringing our trailing twelve-month free cash flow generation to $400 million. As mentioned earlier, we ended the first quarter with over $1 billion in cash and cash equivalents, and as of March 31, our total liquidity was $1.4 billion. Our net debt at the end of the quarter was nearly zero, bringing our net debt to EBITDA ratio to its lowest point in more than a decade. Consistent with our prudent balance sheet management and focus on cost of capital, following the quarter, we repaid our outstanding 2026 senior unsecured notes on maturity on April 1. We used a combination of cash on hand and a $272 million draw on our low-cost revolving credit facilities. After giving effect to this repayment, Hudbay Minerals Inc.'s total liquidity decreased by $473 million to $957 million. This continues to provide us with significant financial flexibility as we advance Copper World towards a sanctioning decision later this year. Turning to Slide five, the Peru operations continued to demonstrate steady operating performance with production and costs in line with expectations. The operations produced 21 thousand tonnes of copper, 9 thousand ounces of gold, 530 thousand ounces of silver, and 380 tonnes of molybdenum during the first quarter. Production of copper and gold was lower than the fourth quarter due to the depletion of the higher-grade Pampacancha ore in late 2025. Mill throughput levels averaged approximately 90.7 thousand tonnes per day in 2026, achieving a new quarterly record. The team's efforts to increase mill throughput align with the Peru Ministry of Energy and Mines regulatory change allowing mining companies to operate up to 10% above permitted levels. On March 6, Hudbay Minerals Inc. received a permit approval to increase annual mill throughput capacity to 31.1 million tons (29.9 million tonnes), setting a new base for the 10% permit allowance. We continue to advance the installation of pebble crushers later this year to further increase mill throughput rates in 2026, and we are on track to achieve 2026 production guidance for all metals in Peru. First quarter cash costs in Peru were $0.70 per pound of copper, a 23% increase compared to the fourth quarter due to lower byproduct credits, offset by lower profit sharing, lower power costs, and lower treatment and refining charges. Cash costs in the quarter outperformed the low end of the annual guidance range as a result of strong operating cost performance and temporarily higher gold byproduct sales from Pampacancha despite emerging external cost pressures. We are well positioned to achieve the full-year cost guidance range in Peru. During the quarter, Constancia was recognized as the safest open pit operation in Peru during the National Mining Safety Contest for our performance in 2025. This reflects our company's unwavering commitment to safety and validates Constancia's compliance with the highest operational safety and regulatory standards. Moving to our Manitoba operations, on Slide six. The first quarter demonstrated strong operational agility in mitigating lower equipment and labor availability at the Lalor mine while continuing to prioritize gold ore feed for the New Britannia mill. This strategy successfully maintained strong gold production in the first quarter, supported by higher mill recoveries compared to 2025. Our Manitoba operations produced 48 thousand ounces of gold, 2.5 thousand tonnes of copper, 5 thousand tonnes of zinc, and 213 thousand ounces of silver in the quarter. Production of gold was higher than in the fourth quarter due to higher gold recoveries and higher mill throughput, while all other metals were lower primarily due to lower grades. Production in 2026 is expected to be higher than in 2025 due to grade sequencing and higher ore output from Lalor. With solid operating results in the first quarter, we are on track to achieve 2026 production guidance for all metals in Manitoba. The Lalor mine hoisted an average of 3.9 thousand tonnes of ore per day in the first quarter, strategically prioritizing gold zones to secure optimal feed for the New Britannia mill. Total ore mined was lower than the prior quarter because of lower effective utilization of equipment due to reduced workforce availability. This was offset by successfully onboarding nearly 80 new employees as recruitment and upskilling of employees are underway to increase proficiency of frontline employees. The New Britannia mill averaged approximately 2 thousand tonnes per day in the first quarter and benefited from continuous improvement initiatives to unlock future throughput capacity. Gold recoveries of 90% at the New Britannia mill reflect ongoing optimization efforts. Similarly, the Stall mill achieved improved gold recoveries of 73% in the first quarter, reflecting process optimization and enhanced gold recovery initiatives. The 1901 deposit delivered 11 thousand tonnes of development ore in the first quarter. The team continues to advance haulage and exploration drift to further delineate the ore body and support ongoing infrastructure projects. Looking ahead, we plan to prioritize exploration definition drilling, ore body access, and establish critical infrastructure at 1901 in preparation for full production in 2027. Manitoba gold cash costs in the first quarter were $4.08 per ounce, outperforming the low end of the guidance range. We are well positioned to achieve our 2026 cash cost guidance range. In British Columbia, we continue to focus on advancing our multiyear optimization plans, achieving significant milestones in both mining productivity and project permitting in the first quarter, and remain on track to deliver the benefits of the stripping program and unlock higher-grade ore later this year. As shown on Slide seven, Copper Mountain produced 4.1 thousand tonnes of copper, 5.2 thousand ounces of gold, and 43 thousand ounces of silver in the first quarter, in line with our guidance and planned mine sequencing. Production was supported by a higher mill throughput, offset by lower grades compared to the fourth quarter. We remain on track to achieve our 2026 production guidance expectations for all metals in British Columbia, with higher production expected in the second half of the year as mill improvements take effect. Mining activities reached a record total material movement of over 25 million tonnes in the first quarter driven by an optimized mining sequence in the Main Pit and increased contributions from the North Pit. This ramp up was supported by the successful commissioning of a new production loader in January. To further bolster the equipment fleet and add to this momentum, a new shovel has been recently commissioned. Drilling throughput benefited from the completion of the second SAG mill and the mill optimization initiatives implemented in late 2025, resulting in increased mill throughput in 2026. The second SAG mill achieved increased throughput in the quarter and averaged 10 thousand tonnes per day in March. The primary SAG mill continues to operate under a reduced load and is being rigorously monitored prior to the head replacement scheduled for late June and into July. The mill remains on track to achieve its permitted capacity of 50 thousand tonnes per day in 2026. British Columbia cash costs were lower than the prior quarter, delivering cash costs of $2.41 per pound of copper as a result of higher gold byproduct credits and resolving the unplanned maintenance downtime issues experienced in the prior quarter. First quarter cash costs were within the guidance range and despite emerging external cost pressures, we remain on track to achieve 2026 cash cost guidance in British Columbia. During the quarter, the New Ingerbelle project reached a major milestone in February with the receipt of the Mines Act and the Environmental Management Act amended permits from provincial regulators. The New Ingerbelle project supports continued copper production, increased gold production, and further mine life extensions. The project is designed to access higher-grade mineralization while improving operational efficiency with a stripping ratio approximately three times lower than current mining areas. With these permit approvals, we are advancing critical infrastructure required for the expansion. This includes the construction of an access road, a bridge across the Similkameen River, and the development of an east haul road link to New Ingerbelle with existing operations. A large drill program was initiated during the first quarter at New Ingerbelle to improve resource definition and expansion. We are pleased to receive the news this week that the B.C. government has added the New Ingerbelle project to the province's list of priority resource projects. This list highlights the acceleration of major projects that strengthen economic growth, support resource development, and create jobs and long-term value. Turning to Slide eight, we announced our annual mineral reserve and resource update along with an improved three-year production outlook during the quarter. We extended Snow Lake's mine life by four years to 2041, maintained Constancia's mine life to 2040, and extended Copper Mountain's mine life by two years to 2045. Consolidated copper production is expected to average 147 thousand tonnes per year over the next three years, representing a 24% increase from 2025. This growth is driven by higher expected copper production in British Columbia from the mill throughput ramp up in 2026, higher grades in British Columbia in 2027 from the completion of the accelerated stripping program, and higher expected mill throughput in Peru starting in 2026. Consolidated gold production is expected to average 243 thousand ounces per year over the next three years, reflecting continued strong production in Manitoba and the expected contribution from New Ingerbelle in British Columbia starting in 2028. We have already made significant progress in advancing many of our corporate and strategic objectives so far this year, and we anticipate many more key catalysts to come from our portfolio of long-life assets in Tier 1 jurisdictions, as shown on Slide nine. Our prudent balance sheet management, strong financial flexibility, significant free cash flow generation from strong exposure to higher copper and gold prices, and continued margin expansion has positioned us to be able to advance generational growth investments across the portfolio. In Peru, we will deliver higher mill throughput in the second half of the year as we complete the installation of two pebble crushers, which will grow copper production in 2027 and 2028. We also continue to progress exploration plans in Peru, including at the Maria Reyna and Caballito properties, to provide long-term growth potential at Constancia. In Manitoba, we continue to advance optimization initiatives and exploration efforts to demonstrate an enhanced production profile and expanded mine life. Exploration activities are underway at the 1901 deposit as we advance towards production in 2027, and an expanded exploration program at Talbot is focused on upgrading mineral resources to reserves and expanding the deposit footprint at depth. In British Columbia, we expect to continue to see operational improvements in the second half of the year as we complete our optimization initiatives and advance this operation towards its free cash flow inflection point later this year. Following the receipt of the New Ingerbelle permits earlier this year, we have commenced construction of critical infrastructure for the development of the deposit to access the higher-grade mineralization and drive further cash flow growth starting in 2028. We have also launched the largest exploration program at New Ingerbelle to further increase mine life extension potential. On Slide 10, during the first quarter, we made significant steps towards enhancing our United States copper growth pipeline. At Copper World, as I mentioned earlier, we announced the closing of the Mitsubishi joint venture transaction establishing a long-term strategic relationship with a premier partner. The initial $420 million in cash proceeds will be used to directly fund the remaining pre-sanctioning costs and the initial project development costs following a sanctioning decision later this year. Feasibility activities at Copper World are well underway, with the DFS progressing above 85% completion at March and remaining on track for completion in mid-2026. In March, we announced the acquisition of Arizona Sonoran, establishing a major copper hub in Southern Arizona with the addition of the Cactus project to our existing Arizona business. This transaction further strengthens our position as a premier Americas-focused copper company, enhances our U.S. growth pipeline, and creates significant operational efficiencies and regional synergies with the staged development of Copper World and Cactus. The transaction has received strong shareholder support and is expected to close in 2026. We have also commenced pre-feasibility study activities at our Mason copper project in Nevada. We expect the study to be completed in 2027. While Mason is not expected to come into production until after Copper World and Cactus, its larger production base will position it as the third-largest copper mine in the U.S. As we continue to advance all of these attractive growth initiatives across the portfolio, we remain committed to prudently allocating capital to the highest risk-adjusted return opportunities to deliver significant value for stakeholders. Concluding on Slide 11, our focus on demonstrating continued operational excellence while prudently advancing our many organic growth opportunities will deliver significant copper production growth. Over the next three years, we expect to increase production by 24% through attractive brownfield investments while continuing to advance our attractive U.S. pipeline to meaningfully expand annual copper production levels. By the end of the decade, we expect to increase our annual copper production by more than 70% to approximately 250 thousand tonnes with Copper World. And with the staged development of Cactus and Mason to follow, we have a pathway to 500 thousand tonnes of copper by the middle of the next decade. The most compelling part of this industry-leading copper growth profile is that our growth assets are low risk, low capital intensity projects located in some of the best mining jurisdictions in the world, and we have the team, the balance sheet, and strong financial plan to deliver this pipeline. This is largely driven by a diversified operating platform with significant exposure to complementary gold and our expanding margins. I have no doubt that our continued focus on delivery and execution will continue to drive significant value for all our stakeholders. And with that, we are pleased to take your questions. Thank you. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, we will now begin the question-and-answer session. Our first question is from Ralph Profiti with Stifel Financial. Please go ahead. Ralph Profiti: Thanks, operator, and good morning. Thanks for taking my question. Peter and Eugene, there has been a lot of work being done at Copper World on long-lead items ahead of the definitive feasibility study. Do you have a goal for how much of the revised budget, by the time sanctioning does come, will be locked in, contracted, and committed? I am trying to get a sense of how much work can be done ahead of time to manage inflationary pressures. Peter Gerald Kukielski: Thanks, Ralph. Great question. We certainly will lock in a significant amount of the equipment. For example, we already have pricing on fleet. We have the opportunity to lock in fleet pricing right now. We have pricing from vendors for primary equipment that we are going to procure, and we are ensuring that we have space in the production facilities right now. I would say between the issue of the DFS and FID, we will lock in pricing on all of that equipment. Andre, any comments you might have in addition? Andre Lauzon: Yes, I agree on long-lead and there are also some critical path items that we have been moving along. We started construction of our waterline, taken some initial blasts, and we are pioneering our haul roads as we speak. Those are already in our budget for the year. Like Peter said, the big ones are already in place. Ball mills, SAG mills, all those costing items are coming forth. Eugene Lei: Ralph, if I could just add one more point. You will recall that when we announced the joint venture transaction last August, we increased the 2025 budget for long-lead items. We did not just react to this today. We have been thinking about this for well over a year. We have been placing orders and getting ourselves ready for the FID decision well over a year in advance. Ralph Profiti: Great. That is very helpful. And maybe as a follow-up, a point of clarification, Peter, on the LSIB judicial review. This is a process that is actually tied to the regulatory government process itself and sits outside of Hudbay Minerals Inc.? Are you needing to have a legal strategy around this to preserve the 2028 timeline for New Ingerbelle? Peter Gerald Kukielski: Yes, great question, Ralph. In March, the LSIB submitted an application for review of the regulatory decision to grant the permit amendment. We remain very confident in the integrity and the robustness of that regulatory process that led to the issuance of the permit amendment, and we believe that the court will uphold the decision. At the same time, we remain committed to working with the LSIB in a respectful and constructive manner to try to resolve their concerns through the mechanisms that were agreed to by the parties in the participation agreement. Their issue is not with us, it is with the government, and we have a constructive relationship with them and will continue to ensure that we continue to drive that relationship. Ralph Profiti: Great. Thank you for that clarity and for your answers. Operator: The next question is from George Eadie with UBS. Please go ahead. George Eadie: Yes, hi, thanks for the call today. Following up on that question from Ralph, on the Copper World CapEx, Peter and Eugene, how much can you lock up in the next twelve months or so in terms of dollars? Are we talking 20% to 30% of the CapEx spend you can fix in that period? Is that a reasonable estimate? And we have seen a zinc project nearby this week materially lift CapEx, and while part of that is scope change, how can we get meaningful conviction that in twelve months you can avoid that risk? Eugene Lei: Lots of careful planning. We have had a lot of time to think about this project over the years, and the feasibility study for a similar project was completed a decade ago. We also have a certain amount of equipment already in storage and obviously not subject to cost inflation. In terms of the actual percentage in dollars, we are still working on the final estimate in the DFS. We do not know that number yet. We have been very clear that we expect there to be some cost inflation and escalation related to the final CapEx number from the pre-feasibility number that was released three years ago. As you know, there has been inflation, but that three-years-ago number was post the biggest wave of inflation post-COVID. So we are not expecting a blowout in terms of capital. We are approximately 85% done with the feasibility study. We will release that likely in the third quarter, midyear as expected, with an FID to follow. We do not have any further clarity or any guidance on the actual CapEx number at this moment. Peter Gerald Kukielski: I would add, George, that we are following an integrated project delivery system, which incorporates a number of the contractors and engineers in the overall project management structure. So the development of the estimates that we have will, in no small measure, include their estimates of their own contributions. The constructors and engineers we are using have actually participated in several of the projects that have been developed in the U.S. recently, and they will have deep insight into the evolution of costs over the last couple of years in any case. That will be reflected in the definitive feasibility study. Andre Lauzon: To the original question around percentages, it is tough, like Eugene said, but we do have insights in terms of the fleet. If you recall from the pre-feasibility study, the fleet is 10% to 15% of the overall cost, and the numbers that we are receiving are in line with our estimates. That is a good sign to start. You will recall this project is one of the lowest capital intensity projects in the copper space. It is not subject to some of the larger cost flows we have seen in the sector. It is not at altitude and is about 26 miles from Tucson, so some of the inherent infrastructure challenges that have plagued other builds do not apply to this project as much. We are confident there will be a very robust economic case for this project, as evidenced by Mitsubishi joining at the PFS level a few months ago. George Eadie: Okay, yes, that is helpful, thanks. Pivoting slightly, at Cactus, when will we get an updated PFS with Hudbay Minerals Inc.'s overlay post-transaction closing? Could that be by year-end, or is it still going to be some time next year? And what is the latest on the permit amendments too, please? Andre Lauzon: Sure. I will take that. The vote is still to come in a couple of weeks. We are quite excited about the project and the teams. We are very pleased with the quality of the teams currently working for Cactus and excited for them to be part of ours. The next step, once the vote goes through, is to sit with the teams and regroup. There are lots of synergies with Copper World and our view of the acquisition. Getting their understanding as well will go into next year. It is not a year-end thing. Realistically, it is into 2027 for sure. In terms of permitting, the teams are progressing permitting at site and having discussions locally with the county. The permitting and the revisiting of that is on track and moving forward, and we are supportive. The synergies include looking at fleet; we just completed negotiating a large fleet for Copper World. Once we go through closing, there will be opportunities for Cactus when we look at it altogether. But end of the year would be rushed; it is definitely into next year. George Eadie: Okay. Thanks, guys. All the best. Operator: The next question is from Fahad Tariq with Jefferies. Please go ahead. Fahad Tariq: Maybe just any color on input cost pressures or supply constraints that you are seeing? I do not think I saw anything in the presentation or in the press release. If you could comment on that, that would be helpful. Thanks. Eugene Lei: I can take that. I assume, Fahad, you are referring to current fuel and oil prices and the like. From Hudbay Minerals Inc.'s standpoint, we are fairly well insulated from these emerging cost pressures. As you saw, we held costs very well in the first quarter and, while prices for oil were not yet elevated, our operations are minimally affected. In Peru, about a $10 increase in the price of oil per barrel is about a $0.04 cash cost increase per pound of copper. In B.C., given the heavy stripping that we are doing, that is a little higher, about $0.10 per pound produced. If you think about oil today and, for example, current prices were to hold, oil is about 50% higher than our original budgeted amount for the year, and that would result in about a $45 million hit to cash flow if oil prices were to persist at this level for the whole year. We have a natural hedge of gold in our portfolio that more than insulates that cost. Gold is about 20% higher than what we budgeted for the year, and if these gold prices were to hold for the rest of the year, the impact of that would be close to $200 million. So, in terms of the net effect, what we have with the gold that we produce in the portfolio is a natural hedge against larger cost inputs like oil. We feel very well positioned. Peter Gerald Kukielski: And, Fahad, I would also add that one of our primary cash flowing assets, which is Manitoba, is largely insulated from the effects of oil prices since we use very little oil in Manitoba at all. Most of our underground equipment is electrically driven or battery driven in any case. Fahad Tariq: Okay, great. That is really clear. And then switching gears to the growth profile, can you remind us in terms of the sequencing between Cactus and potentially Copper World Phase 2, how you are thinking about that assuming those permits happen at some point and you are in a beneficial situation of being able to select between the two? Peter Gerald Kukielski: For sure. It makes absolute sense to progress Cactus in sequence with Copper World because there are a lot of synergies between the two projects. As Andre mentioned, we would continue with updating the pre-feasibility study of Cactus, move from that into definitive feasibility, and get all the permits in place so that once Copper World Phase 1 is in production, we would be able to phase the construction of Cactus and bring that online subsequent to Copper World. For Phase 2, we would not want to apply for permits until Phase 1 is in operation because we do not want to get things mixed up. It will take several years to get the permits for Phase 2, so it makes absolute sense to progress Cactus, and then Phase 2 would come in after Cactus. Andre Lauzon: And Cactus is a little different than Copper World. At Copper World, a lot of CapEx is around building a facility and infrastructure. At Cactus, it is more of a stripping exercise leading into building an SX-EW plant. It is very low risk in terms of execution of moving material. It is about purchasing the fleet and executing the plant. So, as Peter said, there is a timing element and it almost naturally fits. Operator: The next question is from Dalton Baretto with Canaccord Genuity. Please go ahead. Dalton Baretto: Thanks. Good morning, guys. Staying on the sequencing theme between Copper World Phase 1 and Cactus, given what has been going on with sulfur and sulfuric acid pricing, demand for U.S.-made cathode, and the timing of the sequencing, has anything changed in your thinking as it relates to the feasibility study around the Albion facility? Peter Gerald Kukielski: Great question. Nothing has really changed. The DFS is a continuation of the PFS, pretty well the same. Andre Lauzon: What we could do is, during the update of the PFS for Cactus, take a look at the sequencing or the timing for the development of the Albion facility. That will be something that we look at as part of the Cactus PFS rather than the work that we are doing on Copper World right now. To build on that, the other project in Manitoba where we are looking at getting the gold out of the Flin Flon tails is progressing quite well with the studies. There is still more to go, but one of the byproducts there is also sulfur—molten sulfur and sulfur products. There is lots of optionality in our portfolio to produce sulfur that would benefit the Cactus project, where ultimately what you are trying to get is acid for the heap leach. Whether it is advancing Albion, as you suggest, or producing a lot more gold in Manitoba and doing the other, we will evaluate all those at the right time. Dalton Baretto: Understood. And then once the feasibility study drops midyear, outside of the financing package, what are some of the other gating items to get you to FID? Peter Gerald Kukielski: Obviously, getting our partner on board. The partner is already on board in many respects, but they have their own internal approval process that we need to respect. There will be some time between the completion of the definitive feasibility study and the final investment decision in respect of what our partner needs. Andre Lauzon: They are actively working with us. We are meeting with them. They absolutely do not want to be a barrier. We are all aligned on rock in the box and hitting that first production. They have been really great to work with, and we do not see any barrier to spending the money. Eugene Lei: The $420 million that they deposited in January at close is being used to advance the feasibility study and will be the first capital spent when we FID this project. Andre Lauzon: We do not see the FID being a barrier to rock in the box and first production. All the allowances we have made and the critical path items we are focusing on are keeping us on track. Dalton Baretto: Great. Thanks. And finally, Peter, can you comment on some of the political developments in Peru right now and whether that is translating into any form of social unrest? Peter Gerald Kukielski: The social landscape has been complicated since the unrest we saw last year. With the federal elections underway right now, there may continue to be periods of heightened social unrest. The general election was held on April 12, and from the initial voting, there is not yet a clear result of who the second candidate is. The first candidate, as everybody knows, is Keiko Fujimori. By mid-month, it probably becomes clear who the second candidate is. Frankly, federal elections do not really impact Hudbay Minerals Inc., as we have seen many different presidents since we started operations ten years ago. What has been constant in those years has been the stable fiscal regime, which we do not expect to change. We have seen left-wing presidents, right-wing presidents, and everyone in between. Peru is a leading copper production nation globally, and the new president will recognize the importance of mining to the country. It will be business as usual for us. We have no concerns with respect to the upcoming election. I do not think it will result in heightened unrest. There may be bouts of it, but we are well positioned to deal with it. Operator: The next question is from Stefan Ioannou with Cormark Securities. Please go ahead. Stefan Ioannou: Hi, can you hear me okay? Maybe following on the Peru theme. In the slide, you mention preparing for Maria Reyna and Caballito exploration. I assume that involves more local social considerations. Is there any update on when we might be able to put a drill rig in the ground there? Peter Gerald Kukielski: There are no changes to the remaining steps in the permitting process, which includes the government’s Previa process with the local community. With the election underway, that process is delayed. There are community elections later in the year. We think once those elections have been held, we will move forward towards getting the permits. Permits are delayed, but we think we are coming to the end of that period of delay as we move past the general election and the community elections, and then we probably see some movement towards the end of the year. Stefan Ioannou: Okay, great. Thanks very much. Operator: The next question is from Matthew Murphy with BMO. Please go ahead. Matthew Murphy: Hi. I wanted to ask about the labor balance at Lalor. You mentioned it a few times. Some challenges in Q1—maybe you can elaborate on what you are seeing and how you are addressing it? Andre Lauzon: Sure. There have been some challenges. They are not new; we have gone through this before. We saw a bit of a peak toward the end of Q1, and we are working through it now. We are bringing more people into the organization, and that takes a little time to train—more of a medium-term fix. In the very short term, the team is looking at the 1901 ore body, which we have been developing ourselves, and we have a lot of skilled employees there. The team is working on contracts with a mining contractor for that isolated area as a nice fit, and then we will redeploy our resources into the shortfalls within the mine. There are several initiatives underway, but those are the main ones. We have this in hand. It is something we have done before. It is just a blip, and we are working through it. Peter Gerald Kukielski: And, Matt, we were straightforward in the results release that we remain on track to achieve the annual production guidance ranges in Manitoba regardless of any labor issues and ups and downs that we might see. The team has it well in hand. Andre Lauzon: We will still be within production and cost guidance, even with those extra costs. Matthew Murphy: Got it. Okay. Thank you. Operator: The next question is from Lawson Winder with Bank of America Securities. Please go ahead. Lawson Winder: Thank you, operator, and good morning, Eugene and Andre. Thank you for today’s update. Could I ask about capital return? In light of the recently revamped capital return framework and the stronger balance sheet, and considering the growth capital needs and the buyback renewal approval, can we consider the probability that Hudbay Minerals Inc. might be more active in the buyback in 2026 as a higher probability than in 2025 when the buyback was not acted upon at all? Eugene Lei: Hi, Lawson. I can take that question. We look at this holistically, and the capital allocation framework was meant to provide us, beyond that 3P plan, the way to advance the company. With the framework, we are able to do three things: fund the development of Copper World, reduce debt with a goal of less than 1x net debt to EBITDA through the life cycle of the build, and fund generational investments in brownfield projects at each of our operating sites. Given the progress we have made on the balance sheet, we are able to consider shareholder returns well ahead of our goal to be a meaningful dividend payer with the development of Copper World. We started thinking about that earlier this year with the capital allocation framework, and the first step was increasing our dividend. It was a nominal increase, but it was the first dividend increase we have had in our history. We would like to ramp into that if we have the opportunity and if these prices were to hold, while making generational investments and providing shareholder returns. The NCIB was put in place as good housekeeping, as a tool to smooth market volatility. It is something we want to be able to access at the right time. We are not committing to any set dollar amount of share buybacks at this time. We do not think that is the right way to set our capital allocation priorities, particularly during the year of sanctioning at Copper World. If we have the opportunity to have excess capital at the end of the year, we can relook at the dividend and see if we can enhance that as part of the whole capital allocation framework. Peter Gerald Kukielski: I would also add that we want to have all options available to us, but right now the most important thing for us is delivery. I am confident that the culture of consistent operational and financial delivery that we are building will ensure we are the gold standard in the copper space, as we referred to in our release. Lawson Winder: Thank you. One other follow-up on capital return: I am not entirely clear on the potential spending at Mason. You are advancing plans to initiate a pre-feasibility study. Can you remind us what you think you are going to spend in 2026 on Mason? Could that change? Is there a range, or is it fixed? Eugene Lei: We are starting that process, and approximately $20 million is allocated to advancing Mason this year. That will be expensed, as it is not yet in reserve. That is essentially a fixed budget number. There is not much we can increase that by in terms of moving ahead. We are starting the pre-feas and that will take the better part of a year or two. Andre Lauzon: It is mostly studies—studies, some drilling, some geotech, hydrology. Lawson Winder: Okay. Fantastic. Thank you all very much. Operator: The next question is from Analyst with Haywood. Please go ahead. Analyst: Thanks. Peter or Andre, following on the discussion with respect to sequencing in Arizona, do you feel comfortable giving a date in terms of production start for Copper World, for Cactus, and for Phase 2, just to give us a broad sense of what this is going to look like over the long term? Peter Gerald Kukielski: Sure. Copper World targeted dates will be released with the DFS, but it is pretty well mid-2029 for rock in the box. Cactus would be sometime after that. As Andre said, Cactus is more an earthmoving effort than anything else. We have to move rock, do some stripping, develop the heap leach piles, and then build an SX-EW plant. There could be concurrent activity on mining between one and the other, but it remains to be seen during the PFS update what that will look like and the actual sequencing. Andre Lauzon: We are not slowing down Cactus studies. We will move those forward as fast as we can. Depending on where we are with Copper World, metal prices, and all that, we could start stripping—things that are very straightforward—while we are doing detailed engineering. We want to keep that optionality open. Analyst: Understood. On overlap, if you start in mid-2029 at Copper World, would you consider a start-up at Cactus within 18 to 24 months of that start-up, or do you need longer lead time? Andre Lauzon: That is possible and reasonable. Pre-feasibility is roughly a year and feasibility is another year. Layer on concurrent permitting updates. One thing we do know is you have to strip rock, and at the right time that costs money. How Copper World is going, where metal prices are, and permits in hand will drive timing. We are not slowing anything with Cactus. We want everything ready as fast as possible. It is optionality for us. In the next five years, we could potentially triple copper production and Cactus is a key part of it. Peter Gerald Kukielski: In terms of Phase 2, we will apply for permits pretty quickly once Phase 1 is up and running. The question is the duration of permitting. It will certainly take longer to permit Phase 2 than to bring Cactus into production. Phase 2 is not a massive effort, and there are nice surprises in Phase 1 that will come out. Analyst: And finally on New Ingerbelle, what are the implications of bringing New Ingerbelle on in 2028 from a production perspective? Peter Gerald Kukielski: For gold, it is basically more gold and mine life. It is roughly double the gold grade of what we are currently producing. Andre Lauzon: There is some stripping that goes along with it, but it is a great cash flow generator for us, particularly at these metal prices, and with about a third of the stripping ratio of current areas. Eugene Lei: The average gold production with New Ingerbelle essentially doubles from about 20 thousand ounces of gold per annum to about 40 thousand ounces per annum. It would be a very nice complement to the consistent copper production, and the mine life of New Ingerbelle on a reserve basis today is ten years. We started drilling at New Ingerbelle and expect to convert a lot of the inferred, so we are likely to see something much closer to double that mine life as we continue to drill and convert that resource. Analyst: Alright. Okay. Thanks. Operator: This concludes the question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Candace Brule for any closing remarks. Candace Brule: Thank you, operator, and thank you, everyone, for participating today. If you have any further questions, please feel free to reach out to our Investor Relations team. Thank you and have a great day. Operator: This brings to a close today's conference call. You may disconnect your lines. Thank you for participating and have a pleasant day.
Daniel Fairclough: Good afternoon, everyone. This is Daniel Fairclough from the ArcelorMittal Investor Relations team. Thank you for joining this call to discuss ArcelorMittal's performance and progress in the first quarter of 2026. Leading today's call will be our Group CFO, Mr. Genuino Christino. Before we begin, I would like to mention a few housekeeping items. As usual, we will not be going through the presentation that was published on our website this morning. However, I do want to draw your attention to the disclaimers on Slide 20 of that presentation. Following opening remarks from Genuino, we will move directly to the Q&A session. [Operator Instructions] And with that, I will hand the call over to Genuino. Genuino Christino: Thanks, Daniel. Welcome, everyone, and thanks for joining today's call. As usual, I will keep my remarks brief and much of what I say will echo the messages from recent quarters. That reflects the consistency of our performance, the clarity of our focus and the discipline with which we continue to execute our strategy. What we are delivering at the bottom of the cycle positions us very well for the near future, particularly as more favorable policy conditions translate into a stronger operating environment with improving margins and returns. Alongside the impact of our growth strategy, this supports the free cash flow outlook and the delivery of consistent capital returns to shareholders. But first, I want to address safety. Our multiyear safety transformation program is now delivering more consistent and improved outcomes across our organization. Leadership expectations are clearly defined, risk management practices are being applied more uniformly and our focus on process safety has expanded across installations. Advanced analytics, including AI are strengthening these efforts, for example, enabling early identification of workers entering hazardous areas and triggering fast alerts and interventions that human monitoring alone. Most importantly, the sustained focus on safety is translating to tangible improvements in performance across the group. We provide a more detailed account of this progress in the sustainability report published last week, which I encourage you to review for a fuller picture of how we are advancing our safety objectives. Now I want to focus this quarter on 3 key points. First and foremost, our results consistently demonstrate clear structural improvements. In the first quarter, we delivered EBITDA of $131 per tonne, up $15 per tonne year-on-year and around 50% higher than our historical average margins. This clearly demonstrates the strengthening of our underlying earnings power over recent years. Importantly, this performance does not yet reflect the significantly stronger price environment seen in recent months, which we expect to be more fully evident in our second quarter results. Underlying free cash flow performance was robust. Excluding the seasonal working capital investment and the strategic growth CapEx, underlying free cash flow was running at an annualized rate of over $2 billion. Again, considering where we are in the cycle, this represents a strong outcome. Consistent and disciplined execution of our strategy is driving improved performance and providing the capacity to continually invest with discipline and focus and materially enhance the future earnings potential of ArcelorMittal. This brings me to my second point, our compelling growth opportunities, which clearly set us apart from our peers. We are allocating capital to the highest return opportunities. This includes projects that are actively enabling the energy transition, expanding our iron ore mining capacity and adding new value-added capabilities. We recently approved an EAF investment in Dunkirk. The decision was enabled by the more supportive policy backdrop, the cost visibility from a competitive long-term energy contract and the support of the French government. Our EAF projects are expected to deliver incrementally high EBITDA to provide an acceptable return on the capital deployed. So we have reflected Dunkirk together with the previously announced EAF projects in Sestao and Gijon into the expected EBITDA impact from strategic projects. This now stands at an incremental $1.8 billion from 2026 onwards. My final point is on the positive outlook, which is underpinned by trade policy. Given the change to trade policy, the steel sector today offers much more defensive characteristics, particularly in Europe than it did in the past. More effective trade protections are leading to increasingly regionalized market structures, enabling domestic producers to recapture market share from unfairly subsidized imports. The biggest shift occurring in Europe. We are very pleased with the agreement achieved in the new Tariff Rate Quota tool in Europe. As a result, we can expect this to be in effect from 1st of July 2026. Together with CBAM, this underpins our positive outlook for our European business. We are seeing stronger customer engagement, higher order inquiries and customers shifting more towards domestic supply. This is apparent in the material improvement in steel prices and spreads since the start of the year. As a result, despite the volatility of energy markets caused by the conflict in Iran, we continue to expect our production and shipments to improve across all regions in 2026. And we should see a clear improvement in our EBITDA in all Steel segments next quarter. As I conclude, the message is simple. We are consistently delivering structurally improved results while executing our strategy with discipline. Our high-return growth opportunity to differentiate us from our peers as does our track record of capital returns through the consistent application of our policy. That framework has already delivered a 38% reduction in our share count and a doubling of the dividend over the past 5 years. At the same time, we have advanced the business strategically, enhancing resilience and structurally improving returns on capital, all achieved while maintaining a strong investment-grade balance sheet. With that, Daniel, I believe we can begin the Q&A. Daniel Fairclough: Great. Thank you, Genuino. So we have quite a long question -- list of questions already. So we will move to the first, which we'll take from Alan. Unknown Analyst: A couple of questions from my side. The usual question is probably a good place to start. If you can walk us through the usual profit bridges Q1 versus Q2? And where do you see the greatest delta in prices and volumes? And how are your divisional costs evolving sequentially, including the CO2 cost implications in Europe? That's the first question. Genuino Christino: So I will ask Daniel to start with the bridge. Daniel, do you want to kick it off? Daniel Fairclough: Yes, sure. Thanks, Genuino. And it's a very simple bridge, which you've already alluded to, I think, in your opening remarks, you referenced that we expect all of the Steel segments to improve in the second quarter relative to the first quarter. And the drivers behind that improvement are common across the segments. So it's a theme of improved volumes and improved prices. So that's applicable to Europe. It's applicable to North America, and it's applicable to Brazil. Genuino Christino: Yes. Perhaps then I will add, Daniel. I mean the point on carbon cost, I mean, as you know, I mean, we have the new benchmarks, right, from beginning of the year, and that's ETS 4.2. So I'm sure you know what it means in terms of reduction of free allowances, right? But I think what is important here, and we have in our results is that now with CBAM, which so far, based on what we can see, is proving to be very effective, right? I mean we see that prices since the introduction of CBAM has moved up by this year, just look at the index almost EUR 100, right? And you don't see that yet in our results. You see, of course, the costs in Europe already, right, as we accrue the higher CO2 costs, but you don't see yet the benefits of CBAM, that's I would say. So that should come, of course, from quarter 2 onwards. Unknown Analyst: And my second question is, if you're able to give us some qualitative color on the European customer behavior, how receptive are they to the new pricing frameworks both CBAM and the upcoming safeguard? And are you worried about inventory levels in Europe? Or are you seeing any client retrenchment because of the Middle Eastern conflict? So any color you can give us on your customer profile in Europe today would be much appreciated. Genuino Christino: Yes. Well, I made some comments in my prepared opening remarks, right? We are seeing more activity. The order book is good. So when I compare where we were last year, I would say the order book is stronger. We see customers trying to develop the relationships -- so that is all supportive, Alan. That's good. So -- and that's why, I mean, we feel, of course, confident to confirm the guidance that we discussed at the time of Q4 results, higher shipments in Europe year-on-year, right? And I would expect our second half actually to be stronger than the first half, which is, as you know, unusual. Typically, our second half is weaker. But because of everything that we are discussing here, I would expect shipments in the second half to be actually stronger. Yes. So I think it's all moving in the right direction. Daniel Fairclough: Great. So we'll move now to take a question from Bastian at Deutsche Bank. Bastian Synagowitz: My first one is also a follow-up actually on maybe your guidance, particularly on the steel production side in Europe specifically, which was, I guess, very low in terms of production in Q1. And you talked about the maintenance, but shipments were down quite a lot as well, which I guess one could say is a little bit surprising given the impact from CBAM we've seen already as well as maybe some withdrawal from imports. So I'm wondering how far we will see a real catch-up in the second quarter driving very strong year-on-year growth and whether you would be able to even give a bit more detail on that, that would be great. That's my first question. Genuino Christino: Yes. Sure, Bastian. Yes, you're right. So we are, of course -- and as we discussed in Q4, we had maintenance in some of our facilities, right? And we have just 1 or 2 days ago, restarted one of our furnaces in Poland. And we continue to work on our furnace in France and Spain. So we're going to be in a position to bring back the capacity as and when we see the demand, right? And as a result, the furnace in Poland is already -- we are ramping up that as we speak. I mean inventories, and I have not really touched on it, so I should do it now. I mean we know that imports were quite elevated in Q4, right? We saw imports coming down in quarter 1, right? But evidence suggests that imports, at least at the beginning of quarter 2 elevated. So you still have players to try, of course, to get materials here before the new TRQ starts from 1st of July. Having said that, we don't believe that inventories are too high. I mean, of course, they are higher than, I would say, normal levels, but not so high. So our expectation is that the new TRQ comes into place, this inventory should normalize relatively quickly. Bastian Synagowitz: Okay. And in terms of what this means for, I guess, the overall cycle, I guess there are some players in the market, which do expect that imports in the second quarter will basically go up before they fade in the second half. Is this the view you do share as well? And I guess, what is your view maybe particularly also on the pricing side, prices have been very strong already. But is your view that rely comes third quarter, we will see further price dynamic most likely kicking in, in Europe? Or will it take longer to maybe digest and work through, I guess, inventory overhang, whatever disruptions we could see? Genuino Christino: Well, Bastian, I mean, what we are seeing, I mean, we saw prices actually moving up during the quarter, right, actually accelerating from beginning of the Iran war, also in response, right, to cost pressures. So I think it's fair to say that imports in quarter 2 should still be high, right, as we discussed because just it's normal, right? So players are trying to get the materials here before the new TRQ. But again, it's not ideal, of course. We're going to need to work through that. But we don't expect that to really be to take the market long to absorb that. And of course, on prices, as you know, we cannot comment, right? We can -- I can only refer you to what we are seeing. If you look at the index, it's right? I mean we have a nice -- not only prices increasing during the year, but it's spreads, right? So when you look at the spreads also evolving positively, also as a result of introduction of CBAM at the beginning of the year. I think we need to look at the European market. As we have always been saying, right, it is the combination of the 2 CBAM and TRQ that is very, very powerful here, right? And we have one piece, and we're going to have the second piece now from 1st of July. Bastian Synagowitz: Okay. Great. Maybe a very quick one on India, which you didn't mention in your early second quarter indication. I guess we have seen decent performance actually in Q1. Prices also picked up, but then there is obviously the energy situation. So I guess, what is the trajectory for India into the second quarter? Genuino Christino: Yes. It's also good. You're right. So because of the DRI, we are more exposed to gas in India. But as you know, I mean, we have -- we are fully hedged, Bastian. So we don't expect cost pressure coming from gas in India. So we are fully hedged. And the price environment has also improved, which already benefited Q1, right? And we would expect also a good second quarter for our Indian operations. Daniel Fairclough: So we'll move to take the next question from Reinhardt at Bank of America. Reinhardt van der Walt: First one, maybe just we've spoken a lot about inventories, and it seems like it's creating a bit of an uncertain picture around when this domestic demand will kind of kick in. What are you seeing across the European steel industry in terms of capacity mobilization -- outside of the actions that you've taken, do you think that the European industry is ready for the challenge of producing that additional volume? Genuino Christino: Well, Reinhardt, I'm not going to talk much about what the competition is doing, right? I think what we have been saying very consistently is that ArcelorMittal is in a good position, right, to take our market share of the reduced imports and we can do more, right? So to the extent that others cannot, so then we're going to be in a good position as we talked about, we have a lot of flexibility here. So we have the finances that we can bring back. We have the possibility to bring back blast furnaces. We have more downstream capacity. So we're going to be in a good position here to make sure that the market is supplied that we don't have any shortages in the -- as a result of this. Reinhardt van der Walt: Understood. That's very clear. Just maybe a second question on the Dunkirk EAF investment. You're looking to do any kind of downstream additions there or to get any changes in your product mix maybe out of that capacity as you go through the capital allocation? Genuino Christino: So can you repeat the question? I'm not sure that I got it. Reinhardt van der Walt: Yes, sure sir. So as you're converting over to EAF, are you looking to add any downstream investment as well, any kind of finishing capacity as part of that project? Genuino Christino: No, not really. We're going to be able to, of course and that's why the CapEx can be reduced to some extent because we're going to be able to still use some of the equipment there, right? And downstream will, of course, be intact. We're going to be able to -- so basically, what you're changing is the upstream, right? So instead of the blast furnace and the converters, you're going to have the EAF, the ladle furnaces and then we're going to just follow the normal process of that plant. So we should be in a position to achieve the same mix, which [indiscernible] as you know, it's quite high. We have a very quality high order book there, which we, of course, it's very important for us to protect. And that's exactly the idea here that we should be in a position to produce the same grades as we can today with the blast furnace. Daniel Fairclough: So we'll move now to take a question from Boris at Kepler Cheuvreux. Boris Bourdet: The first question is about the new capacity restarts at both in France and Dabrowa in Poland and plus EAF capacity in Spain. How much capacity are you bringing back with those new furnaces? And the second question would be on North America. Are you still facing the same headwind about the tariffs, Section 232? And can you share with us the expectations you might have for the coming renegotiation of USMCA agreement? Genuino Christino: Yes. So we have a couple of questions there. So the first one on the capacity in Europe. So all these furnaces, they are 2-plus million tonnes. So they are relatively large-sized furnaces. As I mentioned before, so we started [indiscernible], and we are getting ready in force and also in Spain, right? And we'll, of course, announce when we are ready to bring these furnaces back up, right? But we're just doing all the work so that we are in a position to restart them when we need them, right? In North America, look, I mean, the USMCA, I mean, it's early days. I think we have to wait to see really how it starts, right? It's probably wouldn't be right for me to speculate. The only thing I can say is that we hope that the outcome will be one that we feel that we can operate as a single block, right? I think for us, for our business, what would be ideal is that we have Mexico, we have Canada, putting the same barriers against the imports that we have similar protection as we have in the United States, right? And then the material then can flow. So that's what I would say. I think we have to wait there, Boris. Boris Bourdet: Okay. And just the current headwind that we still something like $150 million per quarter due to that. Genuino Christino: Yes, there is no change there. The headwinds remain basically the same, Boris. Daniel Fairclough: Great. Thanks, Boris. So we'll move now to take a question from Tristan at BNP Paribas. Tristan Gresser: I have two questions. The first one is a question on North America and Section 232. We've seen recently that there could be some relief for Mexican, Canadian producer to build new capacity in the U.S. to supply the auto market. Do you believe this could be retroactively applied to your first Calvert EAF? And if not, is that a consideration for the potential second one? Genuino Christino: Yes, Tristan. So I think it's important to be clear, right? So that today, we are not receiving any tariff relief, right? And all imports into the U.S., including from Canada and Mexico continue to pay Section 232, 50% tariffs. I think you know our position on tariffs, which is very consistent. For over 20 years, we have been arguing that the global steel industry has been suffering from overcapacity and continuously pushing for fair trade, whether it is in the U.S., Brazil, Europe, Canada or other parts of the world. So we do fully support the Section 232. But we also support being able to operate, as I was saying before, as one regional market across North America and that there are no tariffs on steel that is melted and put in Canada and Mexico. And as you know, we have been seriously considering the second EAF in Calvert as the U.S. is an attractive market to make steel. And in terms of potential tariff release, as you know, tax has been now published, designed to stimulate additional investments in the U.S., and we are analyzing it. So it's a lot of details has now been published, and we're just going through that. And the answer is not really a clear yes. We still need to study it. And I just want to also just take the opportunity as a lot has been written on this topic. I would actually like to also take the opportunity to confirm that we are contributing steel to the White House Ballroom. So approximately 600 tonnes have been delivered to date. As you know, we have a track record of both supplying strong high-quality steels to U.S. customers and donating steel to iconic buildings and projects around the world that showcase its strength and flexibility. Just to give an example, when the Freedom Tower was one of the strongest steel in the world, they came to our facilities. So we are pleased to add the White House to the list of iconic American buildings where our steel will stand strong for years in this country. So we just need to wait a bit more. We're going to go through the details, and then we're going to be in a position to update everyone. Tristan Gresser: Okay. Okay. No, that's clear, but that's a potential thing to consider. My second question is on the green steel economics in Europe. I was a bit surprised to see that you were only targeting $200 million of EBITDA for your 3 EAF projects. Because if I understood correctly, Sestao in Spain is potentially adding another 1 million tonne of new volumes. Gijon is replacing 1 million tonne and Dunkirk is replacing 2 million tonnes. So that's close to 4 million tonnes of EAF steel. And it does not look like there are much of productivity gains or green steel premiums baked into that. So maybe if you could discuss a little bit the high-level assumptions you're making and perhaps the delta is on the cost base and if you expect a big increase there from moving from BF to EF. Genuino Christino: Well, Tristan, there are a couple of points there, right? I think it is important to appreciate that we are talking about -- we are just giving you the incremental EBITDA, right? So it's incremental to what we are adding today. So -- and as you know, the idea here is that we're going to be except for Sestao, where we are really increasing capacity. In Dunkirk, we're going to be replacing one furnace. So we are not really looking to increase capacity. So what you have is really what is incremental. And then I think it's also important to take into account the amount of the investments, right? And that's why we were so focused as a company to make sure that we have the right conditions, right, so that we can justify this investment. That's why the focus on making sure that we have visibility in terms of CBAM, visibility in terms of imports [indiscernible]. We have visibility in terms of our energy contract, which we now have for this project, as you know. So I would encourage you also to look at what is the net amount of this CapEx, right? And then in the case of Dunkirk, not only you're going to have the 50% support through the white certificates, but we're going to also be in a position to avoid the reline of the furnace that we're going to be replacing. So that's why in the end, we feel that we're going to be in a position to earn a return on our investment. And when it comes to the assumptions, we don't want to be too specific about it, Tristan. As you can imagine, this is also commercially sensitive. We have our teams going out and marketing already for the future of this contracts, the green steel. I mean, as you know, for some time, at least we believe that this will be limited, right? And I think this is -- it's -- our teams are out there. So we don't want to be talking too much about the assumptions. Daniel Fairclough: So we'll move to take the next question, which I think will be from, yes, Ephrem at Citi. Ephrem Ravi: I'm just trying to understand the Page 12 AMNS future growth optionality figures. There's 15 million tonnes from Hazira, 8 million tonnes from Andhra, which gives you 23. My understanding was that Hazira was after 15, there is an optionality of Phase 2a to 18 and then Phase 2b to 24. And then obviously, the Greenfield in Andhra is sort of separate. So is the Phase 2 being delayed? Is that how we should sort of interpret that in favor of pushing ahead with the Greenfield in Andhra in order to balance the balance sheet and skill sets? Genuino Christino: I think you're right. I mean, of course, we have to phase it, right? And absolutely right. So we have in front of us the 2 options. And it continues to be an option for us, right, to take Hazira further, and that will most likely happen over time as well. But right now, yes, that's the sequencing that we see, right, and which is to start Andhra. And yes, and Hazira will remain an option for us as well as after we complete this first phase in Andhra, we can go also for another phase, right? So the 40 million tonnes vision for the Indian operations remain intact. Ephrem Ravi: And then you've said that obviously, your current energy situation is manageable, hedging and support of policies framework for insulates margins. Can you give us a sense of time line for that in terms of how long -- because, I mean, energy prices could remain high for 6 months, 12 months, 2 years. So if they remain for how long would your hedging policies cover it? And at what point do you think you and the industry will have to start thinking about energy surcharges in your steel? Genuino Christino: Yes. Well, specifically in India, we are -- our program goes -- it's a multiyear program, Ephrem. So I think we are in a good place there. So it's a multiyear. And even in Europe for gas, we will also have a multiyear plan program. So I think we are -- as I said, I think we are in a good place. Daniel Fairclough: Great. Thanks, Ephrem. So we'll move to the next question, which we'll take from Cole at Jefferies. Cole Hathorn: I'd just like a little bit of color on the metals on iron ore, just the ramp-up on volumes and how you see that into the second quarter? Just any color you can provide? And then I'd also just like to follow up on imports into Europe ahead of the trade barriers. I mean we've seen a lot of logistics disruptions globally. Do you think that there's a possibility that everyone is expecting a lot of imports into Europe, but considering the supply chains, we just don't see them delivered in time or customers potentially pull back on some of those orders just considering they might not meet the delivery dates. Just any thoughts on that? Genuino Christino: Yes. So maybe I'll take this one, Daniel, and then maybe you can comment on iron ore. So you're right. So I think what we are seeing, of course, is at this point in time, what we are seeing is more a cost issue, right? We are seeing freight rates going up. And of course, some of the journey is also taking longer because of the conflict. But it's not something that we believe should be delaying the arrival of the materials. So I think that's why as we discussed, we feel that the second quarter should still end up with elevated levels of imports, right? And as a final quarter and then from Q3 onwards, the new TRQ comes into play. And I would say that this window is now closed, right, as we are here almost the beginning of May, the window to imports, they are basically under the existing safeguards regime are getting close to an end. And the fact that we don't have yet the quotas for the new TRQ split by country, I mean, it makes it even a little bit harder for imports, right? So that's what we are seeing. Dan, you want to talk about the iron ore? Daniel Fairclough: Yes. Sorry, Cole, would you mind just repeating that question? Cole Hathorn: Just a little bit of color on the iron ore production that you're expecting into 2Q and any of the phasing through the year, just so we can think about that in the model? Daniel Fairclough: Yes, sure. So thank you. So we did have obviously a good start to the year in Liberia, another record production shipment quarter. So I think as we -- and that will just continue over the next 3 quarters. So we've signaled in our initial guidance at the beginning of the year that we expect to be at full capacity in the second half and to achieve at least 80 million tonnes of shipments. So yes, I would just be -- that's how we would be factoring it into the model. Some further improvement in the second quarter. I expect that we will navigate the rainy season through Q3. We continue to improve on our ability to navigate that. And then I would expect we should finish with a strong fourth quarter performance. Cole Hathorn: And then maybe just following up on iron ore. You've been very clear that the energy situation is manageable across the rest of the business. But are there any things we should be thinking about in iron ore costs just for diesel, et cetera, on the mining side? Genuino Christino: I think the only thing I would call out, Cole, is freight, right? I think the profitability of mining in Q2 will depend, of course, much more, of course, where prices finally land and freight, right? So oil will have an impact as well. But based on what I see today, I would be more focused on prices and freight. Daniel Fairclough: So we'll move to the next question, which we'll take from Andy at UBS. Andrew Jones: I've got a few follow-ups to previous questions. Just on that potential tariff carve-out in North America. My understanding is it's based upon volumes sold just into the auto sector. So if you ship slabs from Mexico into Calvert, would you -- is it your understanding you potentially get some relief on those if they then be sold into auto? That's the first one. I've got a couple of ones to follow. Genuino Christino: Andy, as I said, I mean, we just got all these details, right? And the teams are busy going through that. So I don't want to anticipate the analysis. If you don't mind, I think we will address that with you next quarter. I'm sure we'll have more color and information to provide on that. Andrew Jones: Yes. Okay. No worries. And just a couple of modeling ones. On the Ukraine contribution, I mean, that was obviously a drag in the first quarter. Can you quantify that on EBITDA? And do you see anything changing into 2Q? Genuino Christino: Yes. Yes, it was -- Q1 was a challenging quarter for Ukraine, right? So energy prices, in particular, really very, very high. So as we discussed before, so Ukraine, they have been managing relatively well, right? So in the whole of 2025, as we discussed, at EBITDA level, they managed to be basically neutral, still free cash negative, of course, because of CapEx. Q1 EBITDA was negative as a result of the high energy costs. Energy has come down, so which is good news. So we do expect to do better in the second quarter, right? But as we know, the situation remains very challenging. But at least on that front, we expect to do better, and that has been really one of the key drivers of the result. Andrew Jones: Okay. That's clear. And just finally on Mexico, the operating issues that you had last year, there was a little bit of overspill into 1Q. Like how material was that? I think you -- I think maybe in the fourth quarter, you called out 65 million hit. I mean what was the equivalent number in 1Q? Was it material? Genuino Christino: Yes. So the evolution in Mexico is very good, right? We started the blast furnace, which is producing long products. So we were not yet at full capacity in Q1 in long. So we're going to be at full capacity in quarter 2. So I would expect our production and shipments in North America to continue to improve as we move forward, right? But it's no longer, of course, the same magnitude that we had in prior quarters. So I think it's a very good evolution. As we discussed at the time of Q4, you see profitability in North America almost doubling, and we should continue to see progress going forward in the second quarter. But production is now up and running, and it's only now the full capacity of this furnace that you should see in quarter 2. Daniel Fairclough: So we'll move now to take a question from Timna at Wells Fargo. Timna Tanners: I wanted to actually double-click as the kids say these days on North America just a bit more, if I could. I think we obviously, as you pointed out in the last response, seen a nice benefit. It was the biggest contributor to Q1 over Q4 from rising prices. You have some locked up in annual contracts. Can you talk to us about how auto annual contracts fleshed out a bit or give us high-level color on that? And then also, do you think that you could see the same order of magnitude in the U.S. into Q2 given the pace of price increases? And then also I wanted some more color on how Calvert was ramping up? Genuino Christino: Yes. So automotive, I mean, as you know, in U.S., our contracts, they are really the negotiations happen throughout the year. It's a little bit more spread out compared to Europe. In Europe, we have a concentration really at the beginning of the year. In U.S., it's more, I would say, more like 30% Q1, 30% from quarter 2 and then the rest is 25% is Q3. And so I think we are doing well. And as you know, we don't really comment so much on the outcome of these negotiations. But I have to say that they are going in line with our expectations. It's good. The ramp-up at Calvert, the EAF is progressing. So in quarter 1, we were a little bit running above already 20%, 25%, and we are progressing. We believe that by the end of quarter 2, we should be at much higher levels. And we remain optimistic that we're going to be getting close to ending this ramp-up phase by the end of this year, Timna. And then if I have... Go ahead, Timna. Timna Tanners: No, I just wanted to ask about if you would be able to quantify the extent of the price increase in Q1 over Q4, if that could be sustained given recent price strength continuing into Q2? Genuino Christino: Yes. Look, we're not going to be quantifying that, but I mean, I think you know very well how prices have moved up in the U.S. I mean they continue to rise, and you should see that reflect in our results. We talked about automotive, the annual contracts and how much is resetting, right? So yes. Timna Tanners: Okay. And one further one, if I could, please. We're hearing a bit about switching away from aluminum to steel. In the U.S., of course, it's been a more extreme change in prices between the 2. But even in Europe, to the extent that the BYDs are getting built and have more steel amount in them versus aluminum. So it would be great to get any observations that you're seeing on switching away from aluminum to steel and automotive. Genuino Christino: Yes. So when we look at -- I think you're right. I think this is -- to be honest, it has been at least now less of an issue. We continue to be very focused on that, showing the benefits of steel to our customers. I think we have been very successful there, Timna, as you know. So I think we continue to make improvements there. So it's not something that I would highlight to you as a big concern that we have at this point, right? But of course, we remain very focused on R&D, making sure that we have the right grades, we achieve what customers want. So we have successes. And so when we look at the level of intensity, steel intensity on average, we see relatively stability. Daniel Fairclough: So we'll move now to a question from Tom at Barclays. Tom Zhang: Just one quick follow-up for me, just on Ukraine, you talked about obviously high energy costs having an impact in Q1. Are you seeing anything from CBAM impacting Ukraine? I guess one of your Ukrainian peers has called out CBAM as being quite a big disruptor for Ukrainian steel going into Europe. I think it's not exempt at the moment. There's been a few articles saying maybe some order cancellations. Yes, are you seeing any kind of impact there? Genuino Christino: Yes. I think there was the expectation that Ukraine will be exempted, right? And they are not. And we believe that is right. There shouldn't be exemptions, right? At the same time, prices are increasing in Europe. So if you have the right cost base, of course, then you should be competitive. In our business, of course, we are focused in Ukraine on the domestic market, right, and also selling pig to different parts of the group. There's good demand for pig, which we continue to sell. Tom Zhang: Sorry, I didn't quite catch that. Did you say it shouldn't be or it should be exempt from CBAM? Genuino Christino: It shouldn't be an exemption. Tom Zhang: Shouldn't. Okay. So you're focusing more on the domestic market. And you would say there was some kind of earnings impact that I guess, persists into Q2 if an exemption doesn't come through. Then just second question, just on sort of buyback thoughts really. I mean I know your capital allocation policy hasn't changed. We haven't seen any buybacks for nearly a year now. If I look at your free cash over the last 12 months, it is positive. And I guess you're talking about earnings ramping up through the rest of the year. Is that sort of back on the cards potentially to restart that buyback program? Genuino Christino: Well, I think you're right. So you know our policy, right? And we had, by the way, in Q1, our first quarterly dividend which was paid. We remain very optimistic that we're going to be free cash flow positive this year. And then the policy will kick in. And based on the visibility that I have today, I see no reason why we would not go above the minimum 50% as we have been doing in the last couple of years. And if I can remind everyone, the policies has been really great. I mean we bought more than 38% of our stock. And I think we are close to restart that. Tom Zhang: Okay. Great. And sorry, you just said I'm so optimistic free cash flow positive this year, then the policy will kick in. Does that mean the policy only kicks in once you sort of see the full year numbers in? Or is it more dynamic than that if you have visibility, you could start sooner? Genuino Christino: Yes. I mean it is more dynamic. Daniel Fairclough: Great. So we have time for maybe 2, 3 more questions. So the first, we will take from Max at ODDO. Maxime Kogge: So first question is you published last week a sustainability report where you cut your carbon emissions objective to minus 10% from minus 30% previously by 2030. I think the new objective is very dependent actually on being delivered on time in 2030. So my question is what would be, in your view, a more realistic time line for the 30% reduction? Is it the mid-30s, late 30s, even beyond? And how should we think about the sequencing of the next EAF projects in Europe? Are you waiting for Gijón to be delivered and ramped up before potentially launching investments? Or will it come perhaps even later? Genuino Christino: You want to start with this one, Daniel? Daniel Fairclough: Yes. Thanks, Genuino. So I think you're right to observe the change to our 2030 target. We well flagged that, I think, in recent reports and communications. What's, I think, important to take away is that, that 2030 target is based on the announced projects. So it's a number that we are confident we can achieve and that's why we updated it. In terms of the timing of the next EAF projects, I think if you look at our communications on our messaging, we've also been quite clear that our EAF projects are going to be sequential. So we don't expect significant overlap on any of our blast furnace to EAF project. So the focus right now is completing Gijón. We've just announced Dunkirk, and that will occupy us for the medium term. And then the intention and time is to obviously communicate on what the project that will then follow will be. So let's really focus on getting a smooth start to Dunkirk at this stage, and then we will update on the next project in due course. Maxime Kogge: Okay. And just the second and last one is about the German stimulus plan. So expectations in recent weeks have come down actually amid the red tape, other priorities perhaps an infra for the new German government. So what's your latest view on the topic? You were quite vocal previously on it saying that it could increase demand in Europe by around 2% per year over the next 10 years. Is that still your scenario? And when do you expect that to really kick in already next 2 2026 or it's more of a story of 2027 or even 2028 based on your latest understanding? Genuino Christino: Well, I mean, to be honest, I mean, we don't see any significant change there. I mean when we look at the impact of the program. We start actually to see some activity, right? So I don't believe that the overall numbers that we talked about, they will change. I mean we -- at least that's not the intelligence that we have. We will, of course, have to -- we'll keep monitoring that. But I think we are progressing as the progress is happening there. Daniel Fairclough: Great. So we do have time for 2 more questions. So we'll take the first from Dominic at JPMorgan. Dominic O'Kane: Just 2 quick questions. You've spoken and given us a lot of granularity on Europe. And again, just maybe coming back to the U.S. given how tight we see that market at the moment, do you think there's any possibility that you actually run harder through Q2 than normal? So obviously, we often see a summer slowdown. Do you think there is potential that given the state of lead times that you may run harder than normal? And second question, just on -- so any kind of obvious cash flow items we need to be aware of for Q2 modeling for the net debt bridge. Genuino Christino: Dominic, so in U.S., I mean, as you know, I mean, we are running our facilities full. I mean Calvert, we have been running at high levels, and that will continue, right? So where you're going to see improvements in terms of production shipments is going to be more really in Mexico and a little bit also in Canada, right? And the focus in U.S. for us right now is to ramp up EAF as we talked about, that will bring more results, so it should contribute to results. And the second part of the question, can you repeat that for me, please? Dominic O'Kane: But just in terms of modeling for net debt in Q2, are there any... Genuino Christino: I would not -- Daniel, I would not focus so much in quarter 2, right? I mean I guess my message is more really when I think about the year as a whole, as you know, we have -- typically, we will have a larger release of working capital in the second half. That should continue to be the case despite all the improvements that we are discussing, we are seeing, right? And we explained that because we built some strategic inventories at end of last year that we're going to be releasing. So despite all the good developments that we are seeing in terms of prices, volumes in the second half, our expectation is that for full year, working capital should not really be consuming a significant amount of cash, which should then support even more the free cash flow generation. Daniel Fairclough: Is that helpful, Dominic? So I think the focus there just to reiterate is normally, the working capital movement in Q2, Q3 is not a major delta in the cash flow bridge, where it is a major delta is normally Q1 and Q4. So normally, we invest in working capital in the first quarter, and this year has been no different. And then normally, we see a nice release of working capital in Q4 and Q2, Q3 normally that's broadly a wash. Great. So I think we will now move to the last question, which we're going to take from Matt at Goldman Sachs. Matthew Greene: I have one question on your Indian operations, perhaps in 2 parts. Genuino, you mentioned costs are largely hedged, that's fine. But given India's reliance on gas imports primarily from the Middle East and some of your peers flagging shortages, could you outline where you're sourcing your gas from today and whether you've received any force majeure on future deliveries? And then just a follow-up, given your use of gas-based DRI and captive power, what measures can you realistically take to manage gas availability or reduce gas intensity across the Indian operations? Genuino Christino: So I think we are in a good place there as well. I mean we have different sources of gas. So we are not really dependent only on Middle East. So we are in a good place. So we have not had any force majeure. So we have received all our gas. We have no indication as we speak in end of April, beginning of May, no indication of force majeure. So I think we are -- as we discussed, I think we are in a good place there. So we are not expecting any disruptions because of availability for sure on the price and also on availability, it's not something that we are overly concerned at this point. Daniel Fairclough: Great. So I'll hand back to Aditya Mittal for any closing remarks. Genuino Christino: Yes. So thank you, everyone. Before we close, let me briefly reflect on the key messages from today's discussion. First, our first quarter performance again demonstrates the structural improvement in the earnings power of ArcelorMittal. Margins are well above historical levels with the further benefits of more favorable policy still to accrue. Underlying free cash is annualizing at over $2 billion. Second, we have a clear and differentiated growth pipeline. Our strategic investments are supporting our results and materially enhancing our future EBITDA potential. Finally, the positive outlook for our business is underpinned by more supportive trade policy, especially for Europe. More effective trade protections are fostering a more regionalized market structure, providing a robust platform for higher capacity utilization and profitability and higher and more consistent returns on capital employed. Alongside the impact of our growth strategy, this supports the free cash flow outlook for ArcelorMittal and the delivery of consistent capital returns to shareholders. With that, I will close today's call. And if you have any follow-up questions, please reach out to Daniel and his team. Thank you again for joining us, and I look forward to speaking with you soon. Stay safe and keep those around you safe as well. Thank you.
Operator: Good afternoon, and welcome to Poolbeg Pharma PLC Full Year Results Investor Presentation. [Operator Instructions] I'd now like to hand you over to Jeremy Skillington, CEO. Good afternoon, sir. Jeremy Skillington: Good afternoon, and thank you for the introduction. I appreciate everybody joining us this late afternoon. Finally, a bit of a sunny Dublin. It's -- bleak winter is over. And we're delighted here to be able to present on the back of our full year results announced this morning, company update, company presentation and let you know where we are with particularly POLB 001 clinical trials. So again, appreciate you joining us this evening. And I'll be sharing presentation duties tonight with Liam Tremble, our Principal Scientist, who will talk more of the POLB 001 clinical trial attributes. So just to give a setting, just a grounding, a reminder, Poolbeg, we're a clinical-stage company developing POLB 001 that we believe has the potential to transform the lives of cancer patients by delivering these cancer immunotherapies in particular safely and locally. There's a big unmet need. There's a lot of issues around Cytokine Release Syndrome associated with cancer immunotherapies, and we believe we have a solution for that. We'll talk a little bit more about the scientific and medical rationale for that later on. We're also developing an oral medication for obesity treatment, we'll touch upon later on as an oral GLP-1. Again, very exciting space to be in. We are an AIM listed company, listed in London. And we believe we've got a strong investment case. We've got a terrific team here behind us, both on the, as I said, the clinical business development, which will be critical, and I'll talk a lot about that and, of course, on the corporate and finance side as well. The clinical -- stage programs we're developing, getting into the clinic, these are clear large unmet medical needs and large, growing markets. We've done an in-depth analysis, particularly on POLB 001, again, we'll touch upon later on. So very excited about to get these moving forward. We have financial runway into 2027. So we've got several key clinical inflection points coming up. So we're funded through these clinical inflection points and into 2027. And that gives us scope then for partnering, for collaboration and licensing discussions. So again, we have had many discussions with potential partners over the last several months. Again, I'll touch upon those later on. So there's a strong interest in what we're doing. So a strong potential to secure partnerships. Of course, what comes with that is financial revenue, and we'll touch upon that later on. So right now, we're certainly in clinical development execution mode, particularly with POLB 001. But over the last 6, 9, 12 months, we've been gearing up on the partnering aspects, talking to a lot of big pharma companies, midsized pharma companies, and again, pitching and promoting Poolbeg. We've got high-value programs with strong IP. Those of us -- those of you who have kind of followed Poolbeg have seen the RNS that's talking about IP grants, very important in this industry. The proof-of-concept clinical trials we touched upon are ready to be done, touch upon the timing on that later on. And what we've built thus far with regard to the programs, we've got very high-quality and compelling human data in the POLB 001 setting. Again, touch upon that, Liam will cover. So again, our discussion with partners have gone exceptionally well. They're very keen, obviously. They see the value inflection point, and the derisking episode will be the clinical data that will read out in the summer of this year. A summary of what we announced this morning in our annual results. So we believe 2025 was a transformative year for Poolbeg. We really got ourselves kind of focused and driven and aligned with not just the market, but the clinical community as well, the Cytokine Release Syndrome community in the cancer immunotherapy space. We finished the year with GBP 7.7 million in cash, again, a healthy cash position. That allows us, as mentioned, to execute on our clinical development programs. The first bullet here, we have the TOPICAL trial, is fully prepared. And with that, that's the POLB 001 CRS prevention trial. We've appointed ACT as the clinical trial executor, the CRO that will run the trial. We've had fantastic discussions with Johnson & Johnson, and they have agreed to supply us with their approved bispecific antibody teclistamab. And they've given that to us at no cost because, obviously, they're keen to see the reduction in Cytokine Release Syndrome or CRS with teclistamab. And we've enrolled now -- we've lined up 6 U.K. cancer centers to be part of this clinical trial, and we've finished the protocol and we've gotten MHRA approval, which is very important to allow us to start dosing patients. Importantly, during 2025, we've got Orphan Drug designation from the U.S. FDA. So again, they recognize the scientific validity of what we are doing, what we are trying and reducing CRS. It is linked to patients who will receive these T cell engagers. And these are wonder drugs that are now demonstrating cures in these blood cancer patients such as multiple myeloma. So again, they're very good to get that. There's a lot of additional bonuses that comes with that, we'll touch upon later on. But certainly, from a partnering standpoint, that actually adds a lot of value to the program when it comes to talking with a big pharma company. So intellectual property is very important for this industry. It protects the programs as we get to the market. It doesn't allow any competitors to invade our space. We did get multiple patents granted last year. Many of you know, in the hypercytokinemia or the severe influenza space, we've been progressing down those roads for many years. But importantly, we got our first patent grants earlier this year in Australia when it comes to the cancer immunotherapy and CRS aspect. So very happy with that. And again, that helps bolster the discussions with pharma companies when they know that the program is protected. We also generated last year positive in vivo data, again, demonstrating that we can impact Cytokine Release Syndrome in an in vivo model. Liam will talk later on about a very exciting program we have in collaboration with Johnson & Johnson with the University of Manchester, that's looking into broader research into the immunology around Cytokine Release Syndrome. And then lastly, making progress on our oral GLP-1 program, which is now expected to start in the second half of this year due to the revised manufacturing lead time. I will highlight that last year, we were, again, very delighted to fund-raise GBP 4.865 million from the market. Tough conditions in the market, but I think the investors saw the potential of what Poolbeg is doing and what we can bring to the market. And speaking of this market, we've done some independent analysis where we see that preventing CRS in these cancer immunotherapies is a market opportunity of over $10 billion. And we'll talk about the details around that later on. When it comes to 2026, this year, again, we are at full pace right now. It's a full-steam-ahead situation. As I said, the first 4 months or so of this year has been, again, very productive from a Poolbeg standpoint. I mentioned the patent grant, and again, that's in the cancer immunotherapy space, which again adds validity to the program that we're doing. And again, we're hopeful that there will be many other opportunities to announce patent grants in other territories as we're going forward. We are, as I said -- have a wide patent application in various territories and they're moving through the processes there. It can be kind of a long process, but I think we're encouraged by the responses we're receiving from the various PTO organizations and the EPO organizations going through. Again, exciting this year, we've -- our LPS challenge study. This is our Phase Ib study that again was a very successful study run in the Netherlands. We were able to get peer-reviewed data published in that. And again, this peer-reviewed is important because as people look at the data, they look at the paper itself and they saw worthy of publication. We've gotten some very good feedback from that. And that springboards us then onto -- into the CRS prevention study we're talking about. When we see prevention of that inflammatory response in the LPS challenge, we're hopeful that we'll see a similar prevention of the inflammatory response when it comes to Cytokine Release Syndrome that's caused by these cancer immunotherapies. We're very excited. We had several discussions last year with Dr. Adrian Kilcoyne. He's an expert in the Cytokine Release Syndrome space. He's had many, many interactions with the U.S. FDA around developing clinical trial programs around CRS. He came onboard to join our Scientific Advisory Board and is now a very active member of our development team when it comes to planning what the future holds for CRS clinical trials. I mentioned we got MHRA approval this year as well. Very exciting. Again, it's a rigorous process where they take and review all of our data, clinical and preclinical. As I say, it's a very high bar for any drug to get into human clinical trials. So the MHRA gave us that approval in the past few weeks and we've announced at the RNS. And that gives us the green light to progress and move into the clinical studies that Liam will talk about. Again, we want to make sure, when we're talking to partners, we want to make sure -- or we make sure that they're aware that this is a significant market opportunity. So to achieve that end, we've had independent analysis done where we look at the market, the Cytokine Release Syndrome, the incidence that occurs in the various bispecific antibodies and CAR T cell therapies, these T cell engagers. And the impact it has on the health care system, the impact it has on patients, what it costs for the health care systems. So again, we were able to do an in-depth analysis looking at -- it's a multibillion-dollar peak U.S. sales potential stand-alone. So we spoke to 3 different payers talking about CRS and our program, and they're very enthused that this is a drug that they would happily reimburse if and when it gets onto the market because they see CRS is a cost drain for them as an insurance company. So they'd like to get rid of that. And as you know, we're talking about prevention of CRS. So I think it's a very important goal, a very important goal that we want to achieve here. And it's very well received by these insurance payers both in Medicare as well and Medicaid. Again, momentum in partnering has accelerated. As we get closer to the clinic, it's becoming more kind of apparent. What we have here is a very exciting program, as I mentioned, some of the large pharma companies and more midsized companies that maybe are in the more cancer supportive care area specifically. So they're all very excited to wait and see what this data hold, this clinical data hold as it reads out. And as I said, we've got multiple upcoming milestones in the near future. So again, I talk about momentum, I talk about running at full speed. So as I say, the POLB 001, the trial site initiation visits have been scheduled. So these are the 6 sites that we've -- are going to run this trial in the U.K. It's going to be led by Dr. Emma Searle at The Christie in Manchester, and she's brought some of her hematology colleagues onboard to be part of this clinical trial. So very excited to get that moving. As I say, the next step then is trial -- patient recruitment and dosing, so basically getting the patients onboard, these multiple -- these relapsed/refractory multiple myeloma patients, get them onboard and get them dosed, to get the clinical trial to -- the clinical trial up and running. But we always comment that like 80%, 90% of the work is done in advance of dosing patients. So we've come down the road quite a long way. So we're very excited to be at this stage right now. So again, we're looking to have this interim data, the POLB 001 CRS prevention data, in the summer. So again, it's linked to the patient enrollment. These are very short clinical trials Liam will speak to, so we should have data relatively rapidly out here. And then the second half of the year, we're looking for to commence our oral GLP-1 clinical trial. I'll talk a little bit about that later on. So fantastic, exciting time for the company. Again, very productive 2025, very productive first 4 months of 2026. So we're excited to be progressing this forward, and again, generating that key data, which will be the value inflection point, really derisking the program. And then transactions and collaborations, license agreements will follow from there. So we're very excited to be in the space. And again, thank you for attending this evening. Liam will present on the POLB 001 program. I'll return in the end and talk about the market opportunity and the oral GLP-1 program. And then we will open up the floor for questions. So again, thanks for your time right now. Liam, over to you. Liam Tremble: Brilliant. Cheers, Jeremy. So just I'm going to do a brief introduction to POLB 001. But before we jump into the asset itself, I want to give a little bit of context of where the field has come. So obviously, over the last number of decades, a massive amount of progress has been made for cancers. It's not been symmetrical. Some cancers have had significantly more progress than others. But if we look at something like multiple myeloma, it's really been a poster child for where significant progress has been seen. So for somebody diagnosed 23 years ago, 2003, 5-year survival, 10-year survival really wasn't that great. 30%, 5 years; 10 years, about 20%. And it's because the treatment options really weren't that effective. And a lot of these you might be a little bit familiar with: pomalidomide, chemotherapy, corticosteroids. They didn't do a massive amount for all patients. Fast forward 20 years and the progress has been exponential. If you're diagnosed now, 5-year survival rate is well over 80%, or estimated; 10 years, well over 60%. And I say estimated because the progress is so quick that the pace of clinical trials is faster than the survival data we have from those clinical trials. So at the moment, in multiple myeloma, we've obviously -- we've had immunotherapies be approved in the last number of years, so CAR T cell therapies, bispecific antibodies, but also a number of other therapies like antibody drug conjugates, proteasome inhibitors. It's quite common now for multiple myeloma patients to actually get quadruplet therapies as first line or even quintuplet now because the therapies are so effective. And a lot of the projections, so this is a disease with a median, so 50% of people get it age 69 or older. And some of these frontline therapies have median progression-free survival projected to be up around 15 years. So really in myeloma, you're at a position where people are discussing functional cures where really patients will pass away from old age rather than their disease. And that's what we're ultimately trying to achieve for all cancers. What's important about this is that when we get to this stage where multiple effective options exist, patient preference has a significant impact on market uptake of the drug. Patients don't always go for the drug with the best overall survival. They also consider things like time at home, treatment time, having to travel to hospitals. Some of the tolerability issues can be quite significant for these drugs. The immunotherapies, for instance, have a lot of severe infections that can happen for years afterwards. So they all have a very meaningful impact on what drugs patients actually decide to take. So for these CAR T cell therapies and bispecific antibodies, they really are revolutionary. For the CAR T cell therapies, are potentially curative in some patients. And it's really making sure that they are accessible to all patients. So if I zoom in on the bispecific antibodies, these are breakthrough immunotherapy as well. And they're extending into early lines of therapy. As I'll show you on some of the later slides, at the moment, they have to give micro-step of doses. And it's quite common for patients to be hospitalized for 5 to 10 days just for these initial doses because of the risk of CRS. So they have a significant amount of time in hospital just to get on to these therapies. And then obviously, they have downstream infection risks as well. So a lot of these therapies as well are restricted to specialist cancer centers who have the expertise and the tools to manage these patients. It depends on what country you're coming from, but in some countries, this is a very significant obstacle to accessing these therapies. Particularly in the U.S., people talk to things called treatment deserts. It's where patients can live hundreds of kilometers and miles from their nearest hospital who can administer these therapies, and really is a significant issue for a lot of late-stage patients. So CRS, as I mentioned, is a major barrier for some of these immunotherapies to become more widely available, with over 70% of some patients being affected on the immunotherapies, and hospital stays due to the risk of CRS may negatively affect the uptake of these therapies themselves. So the next slide. So just zooming in on that for 2 seconds. So on the left-hand side of this slide as well, we've shown a simple diagram to have these therapies and how 001, POLB 001, could change the treatment paradigm. So the current standard of care, on the left here, is typically a patient will come into hospital, they will get their immunotherapy. And the immunotherapy will actually activate their immune system. And what this induces is Cytokine Release Syndrome. And the risk of Cytokine Release Syndrome or indeed CRS after the onset can result in significant hospitalization for these patients. So it can persist for days to weeks. And in severe cases, it can mean that the patients have to discontinue the immunotherapy, so they have to opt for something else. And obviously, they lose time between these different choices. So it's really important that when patients do opt to go on to a therapy, that they can continue with it. If we bring in 001, potentially, we have something where they can take orally before they have the immunotherapy. They come into the hospital, they are administered it. And rather than the immunotherapy causing activation of the immune system, we still allow activation of the immune system, but it doesn't cause Cytokine Release Syndrome. And if we're able to avoid Cytokine Release Syndrome, then we can potentially prevent this hospitalization and make this step onto the treatment a lot more manageable and feasible for the patients themselves and for the health care systems that have to deliver it. So just zooming in on POLB 001 a little bit deeper. So it's a p38 MAP kinase inhibitor. What this means is that it selectively prevents excessive inflammation without immunosuppression. So compared to some other drugs, they completely block a pathway. Actually, p38 is kind of like a master inflammation switch where if you activate p38, you can get global expression of a lot of pro-inflammatory cytokines, which are things that cause CRS. If you don't p38, actually the production of these falls 80% to 90%. So the drug itself is an oral agent, again, particularly important where we positioned this as a prophylaxis. It really needs to be easy for the patients and the hospitals to administrate. And we have a strong patent portfolio with potential coverage out to at least 2044. So we do have a strong preclinical and clinical data package to date. So favorable safety and tolerability profile, which again we think is really important as we move into this indication. And we have potential inhibition of IL-6, TNF and other key inflammatory markers. IL-6 and TNF we mentioned because we know these are the main drivers or significant drivers of the Cytokine Release Syndrome itself. So as well, Jeremy will go into later in the presentation that there is a very significant market opportunity behind this drug. So over USD 10 billion market opportunity. There isn't anything approved in the preventative setting and there's a growing number of these drugs that induce CRS and they're going into earlier lines of therapy. So this problem is only becoming much, much more significant for hospitals across the world. So at the moment, these bispecific antibodies will only be delivered in specialist cancer centers until there's a way to make them safer and easier to deliver. And POLB could make that treatment safe enough to extend bispecifics to a much wider treatment population. Just there in the bottom of this slide, so we have engaged a lot of key opinion leaders on this who also believe in the program. And that's Gareth Morgan from the U.S. Just to show you some of the data that we've presented before. So the last clinical trial that POLB 001 was in was an LPS human challenge trial. So this is essentially where you use a pro-inflammatory stimulus, LPS. It's a component of the bacterial cell wall that induces a mild inflammatory response in patients. So we can give this to healthy volunteers. It stimulates the immune system very similar to the way the immunotherapy would. And they get something that approximate Cytokine Release Syndrome. So it's an incredibly strong model for us to test the efficacy of POLB 001 in. What we also saw in that trial was that POLB actually had an excellent safety and tolerability profile, as we expected. We were able to confirm potent target inhibition, that's the p38 MAP kinase. And we had a clear dose response relationship observed, which is really important from a drug development perspective. And then we also, from a CRS perspective, had a major reduction of key inflammatory cytokines. On this slide, we're showing IL-6 and IL-8. So just briefly, this LPS challenge trial was placebo-controlled and had 3 different doses of POLB 001. So the gray line, as indicated underneath, is the placebo. The green line is 30 mg of POLB 001 given twice daily. The blue line, again, twice daily 70 mg, and the red line is the highest dose of 150 mg POLB 001 given twice daily. And what we can see in the graph is that actually, if you just give placebo with the LPS challenge, you see this spike of IL-6 and as well, on the right-hand side, IL-8. But actually, as we introduce increasing concentrations of POLB 001, we see a suppression of these increases, which is exactly what we hypothesize it will do in Cytokine Release Syndrome. So the lowest dose produced a small decrease, but the 2 upper doses, actually you can see, they almost overlap, and this is probably the maximal inhibition through p38, where the inhibition is in the region of 85% to 95%, which is really promising as we move forward into further trials. So we have the potential to effectively prevent Cytokine Release Syndrome while preserving key immune system functionality. I think that's a key element that we always have from clinicians in that a lot of the existing drugs and that completely blocked pathway, they have their downsides. They often induce cytopenias or other adverse events, which really isn't preferable in an indication like this. So as Jeremy mentioned, we are really excited at the moment. We recently announced that we have all the approvals in place to start dosing patients, and the trial is moving forward at speed. So POLB 001 first-in-patients TOPICAL trial, and it's being conducted in the U.K. So it's a trial of prevention of immune cytokine adverse events in myeloma. It's being led by Dr. Emma Searle, who's a leading hematologist based in The Christie Hospital in Manchester. And it's being run by Accelerating Clinical Trials. Again, we've previously spoken about this to the market, that this is a specialist blood cancer organization who are equipped to run trials in the U.K., in these clinical trial centers that we're tapping into to recruit these patients. It's a really strong team who know the sites, who know the investigators, who are equipped to really accelerate this trial the way we need to. And the objective of the trial is to investigate the safety of POLB 001 and also the efficacy, in particular, its ability to reduce the incidence of CRS in patients receiving an approved bispecific antibody, teclistamab. Teclistamab being an immunotherapy that induces Cytokine Release Syndrome. So we'll have approximately 30 patients, and we will be recruiting a patient population of relapsed/refractory multiple myeloma patients and receiving this antibody. So we are really excited. All of the leading sites in the U.K. are really participating on this trial. So it's been led by Dr. Emma Searle, as I mentioned, at The Christie. But also we have UCH, we have The Royal Marsden, Birmingham, NHS North Midlands, Royal Stoke and Edinburgh. And so we have an exceptionally strong team that we're really optimistic that we can complete this trial quickly. Just a little bit more detail about the actual trial itself. So this is the design of the trial. On the top left, this schematic is showing the trial design. So I mentioned with the bispecific antibodies earlier in the presentation that they're getting step-up of micro-doses. So if you were to give a full dose of these bispecific antibodies, what would happen is you'll activate your T cells, you get other immune cells activated, you get overwhelming Cytokine Release Syndrome, which could potentially kill patients. The only way at the moment to deliver them safely is to give these micro-doses. And the micro-doses are there to give the body a small exposure to cytokines. And the body needs to get used to seeing these cytokines without inducing severe CRS. And once the body has seen the cytokines once or twice, actually then they can go forward with normal dosing. But these step-up doses are critical purely to mitigate the risk of Cytokine Release Syndrome. These typically happen over a 5 to 8-day period. During this period, patients are typically hospitalized, depending on the cancer center that they're in. And so what we're trying to do in the trial is we are going to pre-dose POLB 001 for prevention from before that first step-up dose until after the first dose. So here in the schematic, that would be indicated on day 1, 4, 7. So we'd be dosing. Actually 96% to 100% of all the Cytokine Release Syndrome happens in that period. And that's the period that's really hard for clinicians actually managing these patients at the moment and is mandating the hospitalization. So twice daily oral dosing of POLB 001. It's a single-arm trial, meaning no placebo. But we're really trying to get the evidence of efficacy as quickly as possible, so we want to give everybody our drug. 30 patients, as I mentioned. Teclistamab, really promisingly, is being provided by J&J. And it's an open-label trial in that all the patients know that they're getting POLB 001. So we're really excited that we have fantastic investigators. We have the collaboration with J&J. And we have the right team to really deliver this trial quickly. And the protocol has been finalized. All the regulatory approvals are in place and site initiation deals are scheduled, and patient recruitment and dosing to commence shortly. And we hope to be able to give further updates as we go. The key endpoints, as I mentioned: incidence of CRS, severity of CRS, confirmation of the safety and pharmacokinetics. That's more just to make sure that the drug, as I mentioned, is exposed to patients at the right level. And then obviously, CRS management and tocilizumab usage. CRS management, what we mean is the duration of hospitalization. So everything to do with the current challenges of managing CRS to be managed or measured in this trial. We have a great team of investigators. We have J&J. That's because there is a massive amount of excitement about this program. If we can find a drug that really solves the CRS problem, I think a lot of people realize the potential of it. So there's also been a GBP 3.4 million grant to the University of Manchester and The Christie. The program is called RISE. So RISE is about reducing immune stress from excessive cytokine release with advanced therapies. And it's being led by the University of Manchester and NHS Christie Trust, where we're the lead site on the TOPICAL trial, is the clinical lead. We are the lead business partner because we are experts in Cytokine Release Syndrome at this stage. And J&J are an industry partner providing teclistamab for it as well. So it's being led by a fantastic cell therapist who delivers solid cancer cell therapies to patients, Dr. Jonathan Lim. He's a Clinical Senior Lecturer and Honorary Consultant Medical Oncologist at The Christie and the University of Manchester. So we really have a multidisciplinary team. And the whole idea of this grant is actually to research things of this is an on-target effect of immunotherapy. So there's nothing surprising that these immunotherapies induce Cytokine Release Syndrome. It's predictable. We know the mechanism, we know the triggers. We know how to potentially prevent it. But that's a great opportunity to learn more, to really research this in the clinic. So POLB 001 is going to be a key element of the overall research grant for preclinical and clinical, but the TOPICAL trial itself will be a central focus of it. So we'll be generating additional clinical evidence as part of this on CRS from bispecific antibodies and CAR T cell therapies. Because as Jeremy will have mentioned before, there is a major commercial opportunity for the prevention of CRS related to CAR T cell therapies as well, not just bispecific antibodies. And so this is real significant recognition of the unmet need in CRS, and it's something that we're really excited for. We do expect if there's positive results from this trial, that the interest in the program is only going to grow. So we're really excited moving forward. And with that, I will hand back to Jeremy. Jeremy Skillington: That's wonderful, Liam. Thank you for that. I think it's a very nice segue as we do talk about the market opportunities. So as I mentioned at the outset, we've done a lot of work trying to assess what the global CRS market looks like. We've taken on board some consultants to get that independent perspective. And I'd say it's a very important acknowledgement when it comes to the partnering and partnerships, kind of what the value we're bringing to the table is here. So as I say, we're looking, from our analysis, about a $10 billion market opportunity. And I'd break that down as to how we came to that number briefly. But I just want to flag that for both bispecifics and CAR T, these are quite expensive drugs in their own right. But as Liam mentioned, we believe that these are life-saving drugs. Sometimes there's cures observed. But for CAR T, now it's more of a laborious approach where you take a patient's T cells out, you re-engineer them, and you introduce them back in, and they're bringing the immune system closer to the tumor. And these are quite expensive. But as I said, these are reimbursed in the U.S. by the American insurance companies. When you look at bispecific antibodies, it's slightly less, but it's still a significant cost to the insurance companies. Now what we did with this analysis is that we narrowed in on 2 different tumor types, 2 different blood tumor types: diffuse large B cell lymphoma and multiple myeloma. And if you look at the markets in the U.S. and the European 5, the incidence of these diseases, they total to about 500,000 patients between now and -- between 2023 and 2030. So the market is kind of large. Market is growing. But what we did when we looked at what would we charge, what would we charge the insurance companies for POLB 001, we looked at a very interesting and probably very appropriate comparator. This is a drug, Neulasta, which is used to treat neutropenia. So when patients get chemotherapy as an example, then they get -- they're obviously trying to reduce their tumor burden, but it also reduces a lot of their kind of white blood cells. So this Neulasta brings those back up. When that was launched many years ago, it was introduced in at about $18,000 per cycle. So we kind of took that realm, that POLB 001 could be in that. If you take roughly $20,000 by the 500,000 patients, then you're looking at a $10 billion market opportunity just for these 2 tumor types and for these 2 markets, the U.S. and the EU 5. And obviously, we could go broader than that. We've mentioned a few times that CAR T cell therapies, bispecifics are now moving more into solid tumors, so there's an opportunity there where CRS is also observed. And interestingly, looking into autoimmune diseases. But that's a story for another night. But as I say, we're looking to prevent CRS from happening in the first place. And I think that if we -- this is where we got J&J's attention, for example. And I'll talk a little bit later on about our partnering initiatives. But they got the attention. To prevent is obviously better than cure. It's an old statement that's well worn. But they see that if we can prevent CRS, then they can get their drug, their bispecific antibody, as an example, into community hospitals, getting it away from these dedicated cancer centers. Because you need people on hand to manage the CRS, but if the CRS isn't there, then we're in a fantastic situation. So as I say, it is a cost to insurance companies, cost to the health care system. We talk about Grade 3 CRS actually costing greater than $70,000 as a management, as treatment. But of course, let's not forget the patients who have to go through this issue. So there's many things at play here. But more recently, this is the most recent piece of work that we did that was very enlightening, where it's one thing about understanding the patient population, these multiple myeloma, diffuse large B cell lymphoma, but we needed to talk to ultimately the payers. These are insurance company. We looked at the U.S. because that's the large and major market. And we partnered with Acumetis Global. So they held 3 different payers that cover 75 million lives in the U.S. They introduced them to POLB 001, the target product profile, what it is, what it does, what it's intended to do, and asked about payments. "What would you be willing to pay for these drugs?" And I think there's a -- it's quite a long quote here. I won't go through it all. But it was very clear that there's a willingness to pay for a commercially meaningful price for POLB 001. Because they know the offset. They know that they can -- patients will spend less time in hospitals, so overall their insurance burden is less. It's obviously beneficial for the patients. But it takes the pressure off the health care system as well. And maybe it spreads a little bit thinner. Instead of these patients being in these dedicated cancer clinics, they can go kind of outside to their community hospitals. And that's really where people are attempting to go, have the treatments on your doorstep. And I think from a psychological standpoint, these patients are already going through cancer treatment, but if they can get it closer, their treatments closer to home, all the better off because they'll have family support networks around. So as they say, they see that POLB 001 is a compelling CRS solution with significant market potential. So that was obviously music to our ears when we -- we kind of believed in the program, but to see it in black and white that the payers would be willing to pay was very exciting and very gratifying, I must say. But again, from the market opportunity, and I've outlined this already, so 500,000 patients. There is that bottleneck where they can't get access to the drug rapidly because beds are being taken up in the CAR T setting. As I say, if you can remove CRS, then you can open up this. And we've talked, as Liam said, many key opinion leaders, thought leaders in the space, multiple myeloma docs. And they're all echoing the fact that if you can reduce or eliminate CRS, then a whole load of infrastructure falls away. Their lives are easier, the patients' lives are easier. And as I say, we now, we're confident that the insurance companies are willing to pay for the drug as it goes forward. So again, very exciting time for the company. Again, there is -- I see a question coming in about partnering, so maybe I'll address that right now. With my background, I'm a scientist by training, but in the industry, I spent a lot of time on business development in the partnering setting. So we spent the last, in particular, the last 9, 12 months really focusing, ramping up the partnering, as we're getting closer to the clinic, that laying the groundwork, talking to the big pharma companies, as I said, the midsize companies, about 001, what we do. We've caught a lot of attention. And I think that happens, and it's not by coincidence, that it's closer to the clinic, because then there'll be a data readout, and as I mentioned, a derisking readout. So again, people appreciate that there are more and more cancer immunotherapies coming to the market, and CRS is still an issue with them. Pharma companies are looking to fill their own pipeline as well with new programs coming through. And that's all linked to the patent cliff. I mean it's been shared that GBP 300 billion in annual prescription drug revenue will fall off because of patent cliffs. They'll be substituted by generics. So pharma need to kind of boost their bottom lines, so they get more drugs into their pipeline. But I think when we talk to the smaller companies and show that we can have POLB 001 in combination with any and all CAR T or any and all bispecific, they see this as a significant market opportunity. So over the last, as I mentioned, 9, 12 months, we've attended a lot of conferences. JPMorgan in San Francisco this year was particularly productive. Again, face-to-face meetings with decision-makers at pharma companies. We attended BIO in Europe, LSX as well. And these are, again, lots of partnering meetings talking about POLB 001. Just last weekend, Liam and our clinical colleague, Mina, attended the British Society of Hematology, meeting directly with our investigators, again, building momentum on that front. And then in the near-term future, we're attending the European Hematology Association meeting in Stockholm and then BIO Convention in San Diego. And again, that's where all the pharma kind of descend on a city. Obviously, the EHA is hematology-specific, so we'll be talking directly to the decision-makers in the hematology or myeloma spaces. And then BIO is on the business development front. And we've got meetings set up there as well. And again, they're very excited to see the clinical data as it comes through. So I think, obviously, from our past successes, you could say, great discussions with Johnson & Johnson providing their bispecific antibody free of charge. They want to see CRS reduced, and we're hopeful we'll be able to do that with this TOPICAL trial we've discussed. And as I say, the midsize pharmas are interesting because they've got smaller pipelines, but they see this cancer supportive care element that they could obviously get this drug to market relatively quickly. We can talk separately on that, but these are very short-term trials because we're only looking at that initial immune or inflammatory response. And as I say, lots of really productive discussions there. We have a virtual data room that's populated and open. And we've got people in the data room kind of exploring the, as I say, the preclinical and clinical data we have. And it's all a case of once we have that clinical data in hand, then we kind of trigger those negotiations around, a deal and a transaction, to generate revenue from there. So again, I'll reiterate from a POLB 001 standpoint, we're very excited with the progress we've made. And obviously, in the not-too-distant future, there'll be very exciting milestones to report. I think we've gone over a little bit on time, so I will just kind of go briefly through the GLP-1 program. People are very familiar with GLP-1, initially diabetes drugs, but now very applicable to obesity. These are primarily given by injection, and there's a big need or an unmet need to have an oral option for that. We've partnered with AnaBio here down in Cork. They've got drugs that -- sorry. They've got products on the market that use this encapsulation technology. And it's more in the food science space. But we're using this technology to encapsulate GLP-1, protect it from the stomach acids. And when there's a change in pH, that is released in the small intestine, which is the site of action here. So a huge market, huge opportunity. In our partnering discussions we've had at the partnering conferences, people have reached out to discuss this program. And as we're standing now, we've got a clinical trial that's designed, ready to execute. We are moving into that kind of manufacturing phase, the timelines for manufacturing, that's going on. Again, it's -- the manufacturing has been demonstrated before. We've done a lot of the validation studies on acids, et cetera. So now it's just to get that GLP-1 material ready for the clinical trial. It'll be run by a Professor Carel le Roux up in University of Ulster. He's very well recognized in the metabolic disease space. Again, it's a very straightforward clinical trial in that it's 20 volunteers. We're looking at safety and tolerability and pharmacokinetics, getting the drug onboard. And we'll test that from glucose tolerance test. Very simple study where we want to see the drug having effect on metabolism essentially in these volunteers. So it's designed to get the rapid readout and so very excited to see this program move forward as well. Again, there's a good deal of interest in that from a business development standpoint. I'll wrap up with this slide. I certainly want to leave time for questions and I see there are a few coming in. But again, a reminder, a very experienced team. We are executing right now. And I think we've done a very -- I'm very proud of the team. We've done a terrific job the last 12 months to move 001 to be here. We are on the precipice of dosing patients, so that's very exciting. These are very high-value programs. I think we've found the right disease for POLB 001 to go after, this acute inflammatory condition. Importantly, with the fundraise last year, we've got our financial runway into 2027. So that gives us time and scope to negotiate the best deal for Poolbeg once we have the data in hand. But as I said, the partnering discussions have been on many levels, as I say, large and small companies. We've got many discussions going on in parallel, data room open, reviewing the preexisting data. But as I say, people are waiting for this clinical data to read out. Because that's the value inflection point. That's the derisking episode where you're having data in this TOPICAL clinical trial in multiple myeloma patients -- relapsed/refractory multiple myeloma patients. This will be the key trigger for Poolbeg. So again, thank you all for your time again this afternoon, this late afternoon. And what we'll do now is that we'll switch to some of the questions that came in, and again, appreciate your time on that. Jeremy Skillington: All right, so we'll jump straight in. Oliver has a question. When are the CRS trials due to be completed? Summer '26. Can you pin this down, June, July or August? Although summer in the U.K. is virtually a 2-week period. Nice one. Good bit of levity there. Also once completed, will it be go or no-go decision? Or is there a potential for a phased decision tree solution if not the results you're looking for? I think, listen, that's a really good question. We could spend a while kind of talking about that. I think we mentioned earlier on, like one of our ambitions was to get the data as quickly as possible. That goes without question. And this is why with ACT, who are going to run the clinical trials with Emma, we're zoning in on 6 clinical trial sites. Now we're exploring options for more. And what comes from that then is kind of rapid enrollment. That's ultimately the goal here, get more patients onboard quickly, get more drug onboard quickly. Liam and Mina and the team have done a terrific job of kind of lining up that kind of analysis that comes after that. It's well understood that teclistamab drives CRS in greater than 70% of patients. But we're going to analyze that immune and inflammatory response at a molecular level. So these are looking at all of the cytokines that are there, signs and symptoms, but at the kind of blood and molecular level looking at that. So it depends is probably the answer. But it is once we have that certain number of patients going through where we can kind of interpret the data. We've done statistics, et cetera, that up to 30 patients would be the full trial. But as mentioned previously, this is an open-label trial, so we'll have access to the data pretty rapidly on that for each individual patient. So it's not blinded, so we know that each patient will get the drug. So it's a really good question, but as I say, we're planning and what we've built so far is going to get rapid enrollment to say 6 clinical trial sites, maybe more. And then your question around decision trees. I mean it's -- obviously, we got to wait to see what the data is. But I think if the data is strong, and the way we've built up the business development, partnership aspects, I think there'll be multiple suitors here. I think there'll be strong interest if the data's positive. Because it can be applied to multiple pharma companies, and I mentioned the cancer supportive care area. So as I say, we'll be running full steam on those negotiations when it comes to -- one of the interesting questions here is kind of the deal type. We feel that, on the one hand, with the big pharma may come in and just take over and run the trial themselves, there could be opportunity to partner with a smaller company where we would kind of help and assist, kind of run the clinical trial. Because it is our baby in one sense, but it is our expertise in what we're doing. So you're right. There'll be decision trees and discussion negotiations, multiple parties. We'll figure that out. Oliver had a second question here. Is 30 people enough for a trial for a commercial outcome? Again, maybe, Liam, you can talk to that just around the stats discussions that we've had around how we ended up with 30. Liam Tremble: Yes. So really happy to, Jeremy. Yes, so 30 patients is essentially more than enough for our purposes right now. About 70% of these patients are going to have CRS, so there's going to be a very strong indication of the level of efficacy. The priority from a clinical development perspective is to really get into your placebo-controlled trials as early as possible once you have an idea of the effect size. So we're going to see the effects in Grade 1 and Grade 2 and also the other elements of CRS management, like hospitalization, that will give us a really good indication of how to design later-stage trials. So 30 patients for this purpose is actually ample. Jeremy Skillington: Cool. These are kind of numbers that are not plucked out of the air. There's been kind of deep analysis into what are the right numbers. So again, credit to Liam and the team for their discussions with qualified statisticians to come up with those numbers. All right. Another question here. Could we see a deal after interim data? I mean again, it's a good question. Maybe I've already answered it. But when it comes down to what that data looks like, and as I say, rapid enrollment, we'll get an early read into what the data look like, if it's -- if we're seeing an impressive suppression of that inflammatory response, that CRS, then I think for certain companies, that might be enough to transact. For others maybe, and I've been through this in my past where there's always that next experiment or the next data point or the next dataset. Some companies are maybe a little more conservative when it comes to decision-making. Maybe I'm alluding to the fact these are more the bigger guys who have to work the chain of command. But I do think that, as I say, having interim data will be a key point. And if it's positive, I think there'll be strong interest. Richard had a question. Your projected time scale towards commercialization. Again, commercialization is always tricky in this industry. I mean getting on the market is one question. Again, that'll be done with a partner and we're driving that forward. As I say, we're experts in CRS, we're experts in running these initial clinical trials. The larger clinical trials we can do ourselves. But having a partner onboard to kind of fund that would be critical. But there are -- that'll be kind of a few years down the line. But as I say, once it's launched on the market, then it'll be -- we feel it'll be broadly applied to any and all bispecific CAR T. So again timeline, that'll be driven by the partner and say that we don't see ourselves as obviously driving that forward ourselves in isolation. Potentially through a partnership. Another question. If data lands well this summer, what does success look like? That's a really good question. I mean in my mind, and this goes back to my kind of business development training, I mean, we're looking at a nice, substantial transaction. We're looking at a partner to come onboard with capabilities, with funding, with funds. What happens in the industry when it comes to these licensing transactions, whether, as I say, maybe people want to buy the program, buy the company, just license the program, that'll be for another time and other discussions. But I think that what we're seeing what success looks like is certainly a juicy upfront payment when it comes to the work that we've put in. Because we've done a lot of work. We've derisked the program. It's a large market, it's an attractive market. We've filed important intellectual property, so we'll be protected. So we see significant value for our contributions there. And then, as I say, the structure after that is down to the individual company we'll speak with or decide to collaborate with, whether it's, as I say, just passing the baby across that a large pharma could develop, or co-develop ourselves. But that's all -- we believe, with strong data, that Poolbeg will have the leverage for those negotiations because the interest is so high. Appreciate that. I think we have time for one more question. How much interest are you seeing in the oral GLP-1 for potential partners? Again, appreciate the question. Good question. In our most recent partnering conference attendances at BIO-Europe, for example, we had companies reaching out to us. I was always pleasantly surprised, some of them are kind of in Asia, some of them in Europe. Some of them already had existing metabolic disease programs, and they were looking to kind of branch out, add to their pipeline. I think -- I don't want to be flippant and talk about no-brainer. But if you get GLP-1 that can be delivered orally, it opens up a whole host of markets and market opportunities. It's a huge and growing market. And moving away from injectables, the industry wants to go there, the patients want to go there. So if we can demonstrate that clinical proof of concept in the trial that I outlined with Carel le Roux, I think there'll be strong interest then in partnering the program out. And again, revenue from upfront payments, et cetera. So appreciate that. I think we've ran slightly over time. Appreciate people's patience. But yes, we can wrap up now. Just again, thank you again for attending.